gXconvert
System Description
Version 4.1.0
2009-10-20
SEAL Systems
Copyright
This document and all its parts are protected by copyright. Their use without prior
written consent by SEAL Systems is prohibited and subject to prosecution. In particular,
this applies to reproduction, translation, microfilming, and the storage and processing in
electronic systems.
Customers that currently own a valid SEAL Systems software license for the product(s)
described within the contents of this document, may freely distribute this documentation
in electronic form (i. e. CD/File Server or Intranet) for internal usage only.
All product names mentioned are the registered trademarks of the associated companies.
Copyright 2009
SEAL Systems AG
Lohmühlweg 4
D-91341 Röttenbach
Germany
Contents
i
Contents
1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Conventions............................................................................................................ 2
1.1.1 Typographical Conventions ....................................................................... 2
1.1.2 Pictograms.................................................................................................. 2
1.1.3 Cross References........................................................................................ 3
1.2 Overview of the Contents...................................................................................... 4
2 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Features of gXconvert ........................................................................................... 5
2.2 Formats and Functionality ................................................................................... 7
2.2.1 Input Formats ............................................................................................. 7
2.2.2 Output Formats .......................................................................................... 7
2.2.3 Parameters in the Program Call or in the Configuration File .................... 8
2.2.4 State Information for Processed Metafiles................................................. 9
2.2.5 Profiling ..................................................................................................... 9
2.2.6 Fonts........................................................................................................... 9
2.2.7 Line Types ................................................................................................. 9
2.2.8 Hatch Types ............................................................................................... 9
2.2.9 Device Configuration................................................................................. 9
2.3 Licensing............................................................................................................... 10
2.3.1 Formats and Corresponding Licenses...................................................... 10
2.3.2 Input License Groups............................................................................... 11
2.3.3 Output License Groups ............................................................................ 12
2.3.4 Demo Mode ............................................................................................. 13
2.4 Resource Requirements ...................................................................................... 14
3 Using gXconvert ............................................................................................................ 15
3.1 Program Parameters of gXconvert .................................................................... 16
3.2 Labels and Stamps File ....................................................................................... 46
3.3 Layout File............................................................................................................ 65
3.4 PDF Profile ........................................................................................................... 71
3.5 Output Device Parameters.................................................................................. 76
3.6 Windows STDOUT and STDERR ..................................................................... 77
3.7 Statistics File GXCONV.DSC............................................................................. 78
3.8 Information File GXCONV.INF ........................................................................ 79
3.8.1 Formal Grammar of GXCONV.INF........................................................ 80
3.8.2 Examples of Information Files................................................................. 82
3.9 Fonts...................................................................................................................... 83
4 Profiling.......................................................................................................................... 84
4.1 Environment......................................................................................................... 84
4.1.1 Line Width Environment File .................................................................. 86
4.1.2 Color Environment File ........................................................................... 87
4.1.3 CalComp Environment File ..................................................................... 88
4.1.4 HP-GL Environment File......................................................................... 89
4.2 Mapping Attributes (Profiling) .......................................................................... 90
4.2.1 Profile File ............................................................................................... 91
4.2.2 Color Mapping ......................................................................................... 95
4.2.3 Font Mapping........................................................................................... 96
4.2.4 Line Width Mapping................................................................................ 97
5 Input Format Configuration ........................................................................................ 98
5.1 PostScript and PDF Input................................................................................... 99
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
ii
Contents
5.1.1 PostScript Interpretation Environment.....................................................99
5.1.2 Position.....................................................................................................99
5.1.3 Paper Offset............................................................................................100
5.1.4 PostScript and PDF Environment Variables ..........................................100
5.2 HP-GL Environment Variables ........................................................................104
5.3 Versatec Environment Variables......................................................................108
5.4 CalComp Environment Variables ....................................................................109
5.5 Raster Environment Variables .........................................................................111
5.6 Environment Variables Independent From the Input Format......................112
6 Output Device Configuration .....................................................................................113
6.1 Specifying the Configuration File .....................................................................113
6.2 Assigning Devices and Properties .....................................................................114
7 PostScript and PDF Driver.........................................................................................116
7.1 Calling the CXXPSCRI Driver .........................................................................116
7.2 Configuring the CXXPSCRI Driver ................................................................117
7.3 Predefined PostScript Devices ..........................................................................135
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver.........................................................136
8.1 Calling the CHPGLX Driver ............................................................................136
8.2 Configuring the CHPGLX Driver ....................................................................138
8.3 Predefined HP-GL, HP-GL/2 and BGL Devices.............................................156
9 CalComp Driver ..........................................................................................................157
9.1 Calling the CCALHCBS Driver .......................................................................157
9.2 Configuring the CCALHCBS Driver ...............................................................158
9.3 Predefined CalComp Devices............................................................................174
10 Metafile Driver.............................................................................................................175
10.1 Calling the CXXMETA Driver .........................................................................175
10.2 Configuring the CXXMETA Driver ................................................................176
10.3 Predefined Metafile Devices ..............................................................................189
11 Raster Driver ...............................................................................................................190
11.1 Calling the CXXRAS Driver .............................................................................190
11.2 Configuring the CXXRAS Driver ....................................................................194
11.3 Predefined Raster Devices.................................................................................234
11.4 Dithering (Color Simulation) ............................................................................235
11.4.1 Configuration of the Dithering ...............................................................235
11.4.2 Computation Time..................................................................................236
11.5 Supported Parameters Sorted by Models ........................................................237
11.5.1 All Raster Models...................................................................................237
11.5.2 Printer Type Model bitimage .................................................................237
11.5.3 Printer Type Model bmp ........................................................................238
11.5.4 Printer Type Model cals, cals_1, ccitt ....................................................238
11.5.5 Printer Type Model ccrf .........................................................................238
11.5.6 Printer Type Model epsonfx80...............................................................239
11.5.7 Printer Type Model garo ........................................................................239
11.5.8 Printer Type Model gif ...........................................................................239
11.5.9 Printer Type Model hpdeskjet5x0c, hpdeskjet6x0c ...............................240
11.5.10 Printer Type Model hplaserjet, hplaserjetii, hplaserjetiii, hpdeskjet......241
11.5.11 Printer Type Model hppaintjet, hppaintjetxl ..........................................241
11.5.12 Printer Type Model hpquietjet ...............................................................242
11.5.13 Printer Type Model hprtl........................................................................242
11.5.14 Printer Type Model ibmprox24..............................................................242
11.5.15 Printer Type Model jpeg.........................................................................243
11.5.16 Printer Type Model necp6......................................................................243
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Contents
iii
11.5.17 Printer Type Model novajet, techjet....................................................... 243
11.5.18 Printer Type Model novajet, techjet....................................................... 244
11.5.19 Printer Type Model pcl3gui ................................................................... 244
11.5.20 Printer Type Model pcl5c ...................................................................... 245
11.5.21 Printer Type Model ps (PostScript Raster output)................................. 245
11.5.22 Printer Type Model pdf.......................................................................... 245
11.5.23 Printer Type Model raster (General Raster)........................................... 246
11.5.24 Printer Type Model rst ........................................................................... 246
11.5.25 Printer Type Model sni2050 .................................................................. 246
11.5.26 Printer Type Model stylusc.................................................................... 247
11.5.27 Printer Type Model tiff .......................................................................... 247
11.5.28 Printer Type Model versatec.................................................................. 248
11.5.29 Printer Type Model wfax ....................................................................... 248
11.5.30 Printer Type Model xbm........................................................................ 248
11.5.31 Printer Type Model xwd ........................................................................ 248
11.6 CCRF Raster...................................................................................................... 249
11.6.1 Environment Variables .......................................................................... 249
11.7 General Raster Format ..................................................................................... 250
11.8 Canon Garo Driver............................................................................................ 251
12 Canon Driver ............................................................................................................... 252
12.1 Calling the CCANLBP Driver.......................................................................... 252
12.2 Configuring the CCANLBP Driver ................................................................. 254
12.3 Predefined Canon Devices ................................................................................ 257
13 Support Programs....................................................................................................... 258
13.1 User-Defined Line Types................................................................................... 258
13.1.1 Line Type Definition File ...................................................................... 259
13.1.2 Parameters.............................................................................................. 260
13.1.3 Converting to a Binary File.................................................................... 265
13.1.4 Environment Variable............................................................................ 266
13.1.5 Example ................................................................................................. 267
13.1.6 Summary of How to Create Own Line Types ....................................... 268
13.2 User-Defined Markers....................................................................................... 269
13.2.1 Marker Type Definition File.................................................................. 270
13.2.2 Parameters.............................................................................................. 271
13.2.3 Converting to a Binary File.................................................................... 274
13.2.4 Environment Variables .......................................................................... 275
13.2.5 Example ................................................................................................. 275
13.2.6 Summary of How to Create Own Marker Types ................................... 276
13.3 User-Defined Hatch Types ................................................................................ 277
13.3.1 Parameters in a Simple Hatch Structure ................................................ 277
13.3.2 Parameters in a Complex Hatch Structure ............................................. 278
13.3.3 Converting to a Binary File.................................................................... 280
13.3.4 Environment Variables .......................................................................... 280
13.3.5 Example ................................................................................................. 281
13.4 User-Defined Pens and Patterns....................................................................... 283
13.4.1 Pen and Pattern Definition File.............................................................. 283
13.4.2 Parameters.............................................................................................. 284
13.4.3 Example of Pen and Pattern Definition ................................................. 290
13.4.4 Summary of How to Create Own Pens and Pattern............................... 291
13.5 Listener for UNIX.............................................................................................. 292
13.5.1 Environment Settings for the Listener ................................................... 293
13.5.2 Operation Modes.................................................................................... 293
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
iv
Contents
13.5.3 Example of Using the Listener...............................................................294
13.6 Listener for Windows NT..................................................................................295
13.6.1 Installation and Execution ......................................................................296
13.6.2 Example of Controlling a Directory.......................................................299
13.6.3 Event Messages ......................................................................................300
13.6.4 Changing Listener's Files .......................................................................301
13.7 ps2pdf - PostScript to PDF Conversion ...........................................................302
14 Codes and Command Lists .........................................................................................304
14.1 CGM Elements ...................................................................................................304
14.2 CalComp Input...................................................................................................306
14.3 HP-GL Input ......................................................................................................311
14.3.1 HP-GL Commands .................................................................................311
14.4 HP RTL Input ....................................................................................................318
15 List of Predefined Devices...........................................................................................322
15.1 Predefined PostScript and PDF Devices ..........................................................323
15.1.1 PostScript Devices..................................................................................323
15.1.2 Lexmark (Optra and Others) ..................................................................324
15.1.3 HP LaserJet.............................................................................................324
15.1.4 IBM ........................................................................................................325
15.1.5 Kodak PhotoPrinter ................................................................................325
15.1.6 QMS (Magicolor and Others).................................................................325
15.1.7 Seiko ColorPoint ....................................................................................326
15.1.8 Tektronix/Xerox Phaser .........................................................................326
15.1.9 QMS Magicolor......................................................................................327
15.1.10 Lexmark..................................................................................................327
15.1.11 WDV ......................................................................................................327
15.1.12 Océ..........................................................................................................328
15.1.13 Mannesmann Tally .................................................................................328
15.1.14 QMS (Magicolor and Others).................................................................328
15.1.15 PDF.........................................................................................................329
15.1.16 Hyprid PDF ............................................................................................330
15.2 Predefined HP-GL(/2) Devices..........................................................................331
15.2.1 HP-GL ....................................................................................................331
15.2.2 Standard Plot Format..............................................................................333
15.2.3 Rotring NC Plotscriber...........................................................................333
15.2.4 HP-GL/2 .................................................................................................333
15.2.5 Benson ....................................................................................................336
15.3 Predefined Versatec Devices .............................................................................337
15.3.1 Versatec ..................................................................................................337
15.3.2 Versatec Thermal Transfer.....................................................................338
15.4 Predefined CalComp Devices............................................................................339
15.4.1 CalComp Color Electrostat 58xx ...........................................................339
15.4.2 CalComp Pen Plotter 907ipe ..................................................................340
15.4.3 CalComp Electrostat B/W 57xx .............................................................340
15.4.4 CalComp Thermal Transfer 58xx...........................................................341
15.4.5 CalComp TechJet ...................................................................................341
15.5 Predefined Metafile Devices ..............................................................................342
15.5.1 CGM.......................................................................................................342
15.5.2 DXF ........................................................................................................342
15.6 Predefined Raster Devices.................................................................................343
15.6.1 Canon GARO .........................................................................................343
15.6.2 Epson FX 80...........................................................................................343
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Contents
v
15.6.3 HP LaserJet III (PCL) ............................................................................ 343
15.6.4 NEC P6/P7 ............................................................................................. 344
15.6.5 HP PaintJet (90 dpi) ............................................................................... 344
15.6.6 WFAX (Only Available With Raster Extension) .................................. 346
15.6.7 HP QuietJet ............................................................................................ 346
15.6.8 HP LaserJet III (PCL) ............................................................................ 346
15.6.9 TIFF G4 (Only Available With Raster Extension) ................................ 347
15.6.10 IBM ProPrinter....................................................................................... 347
15.6.11 Mannesmann Tally MT93/94 (Using IBM ProPrinter X24E Emulation)347
15.6.12 Bitimage................................................................................................. 348
15.6.13 XWD ...................................................................................................... 348
15.6.14 HP DeskJet 500 C (PCL) ....................................................................... 348
15.6.15 SNI 2050 ................................................................................................ 349
15.6.16 HP RTL (Like HP DesignJet 650C) ...................................................... 349
15.6.17 Encad Novajet (RTL) (Using RTL Emulation Mode)........................... 350
15.6.18 CALS ..................................................................................................... 350
15.6.19 CCITT Group 4 (2D) ............................................................................. 351
15.6.20 General Raster........................................................................................ 351
15.6.21 Versatec Compacted Raster 1D ............................................................. 351
15.6.22 Versatec 8845 Roll Paper....................................................................... 352
15.6.23 CCRF Electrostatic Plotter..................................................................... 352
15.6.24 TIFF G1 ................................................................................................. 352
15.6.25 TIFF LZW.............................................................................................. 353
15.6.26 CalComp TechJet Color (Using HP RTL)............................................. 353
15.6.27 PCX........................................................................................................ 353
15.6.28 TIFF Packbits......................................................................................... 354
15.6.29 Epson Stylus........................................................................................... 354
15.6.30 Indigo RST............................................................................................. 355
15.6.31 GIF ......................................................................................................... 355
15.6.32 Windows BMP....................................................................................... 355
15.6.33 Océ 9800 ................................................................................................ 356
15.6.34 Océ 9400 ................................................................................................ 356
15.6.35 X11 Bitmap............................................................................................ 357
15.6.36 RoWe 3200 ............................................................................................ 357
15.6.37 TIFF G4 ................................................................................................. 357
15.6.38 JPEG ...................................................................................................... 357
15.6.39 PostScript Raster.................................................................................... 358
15.6.40 PDF Raster ............................................................................................. 358
15.6.41 PCL3GUI ............................................................................................... 359
15.7 Predefined Canon Devices ................................................................................ 360
15.7.1 Canon LBP8A2...................................................................................... 360
15.7.2 Canon LBP8II ........................................................................................ 360
15.7.3 Canon LBP8III....................................................................................... 360
16 List of Exit Codes ........................................................................................................ 361
16.1 UNIX ................................................................................................................... 362
16.2 Windows ............................................................................................................. 365
List of Figures................................................................................................................... 369
List of Table...................................................................................................................... 370
Bibliography ..................................................................................................................... 373
Terminology ..................................................................................................................... 374
Abbreviations ................................................................................................................... 375
Index.................................................................................................................................. 377
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
1
1 Introduction
1
Introduction
This System Description is a reference book which lists the various configuration
files with all their possibilities of settings. It addresses to
• gXconvert system administrators who want to deepen their detail knowledge about the converter and
• gXconvert system administrators who intend to change or extend the
behavior of the converter.
To come to know gXconvert, its functionality and handling we recommend
reading [GXCONV_USR].
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
1 Introduction
2
1.1
Conventions
1.1.1
Typographical Conventions
The following table lists the typographical conventions employed in this documentation for file names, paths, variables, etc.
Typographical
Convention
Description
Courier
File names, paths, commands, key terms, special
values, short scripts and examples
Courier italic
Parameters; variables that must be replaced by current
values
Courier small
More extensive scripts and examples
Table 1-1:
1.1.2
Typographical Conventions Employed in this Documentation
Pictograms
As an aid for understanding, warnings and tips are indicated by a pictogram on
the margin. The following table lists all these pictograms and their meanings.
Pictogram
Meaning
Handling tips and tricks
Warning! Pay particular attention here.
Application example
Step-by-step instruction
Command
Reference to a source with additional information
Table 1-2:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Pictograms Employed in this Documentation
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
3
1 Introduction
1.1.3
Cross References
Sometimes cross references to other chapters are necessary but interrupt the
reading. In this case, the cross references are hidden in footnotes1 at the end of
the page, to provide the necessary information in the printed document.
For PDF documents, the glasses symbol2 is available in addition to the footnote. Click the symbol to move directly to the corresponding page.
If this kind of cross references appears within a table, the footnote is displayed
directly below the table, above the table labelling.
1. Chapter 1.1.3, Cross References, page 3
2. Chapter 1.1.3, Cross References, page 3
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
1 Introduction
1.2
4
Overview of the Contents
The description deals with the following topics:
Chapter 2, Overview, page 5, gives a short overview of the functionality of
gXconvert, the possible input and output formats and describes the licensing
policy.
Chapter 3, Using gXconvert, page 15, describes the program parameters of
gXconvert.
In Chapter 4, Profiling, page 84, the interpretation and modification possibilities
of the environment of gXconvert is explained.
Chapter 5, Input Format Configuration, page 98, describes the configuration of
the possible inputs formats of gXconvert.
Chapter 6, Output Device Configuration, page 113, explains the output device
configuration respectively.
Chapter 7, PostScript and PDF Driver, page 116, up to Chapter 12, Canon
Driver, page 252, describe the configuration of the specific gXconvert drivers.
Chapter 13, Support Programs, page 258, gives a listing of useful tools.
Chapter 14, Codes and Command Lists, page 304, lists the codes and commands
supported by gXconvert.
Chapter 15, List of Predefined Devices, page 322, lists all predefined devices.
Chapter 16, List of Exit Codes, page 361, lists all exit codes returned by gXconvert.
For an easier overview, a list of figures, list of tables, terminology list, bibliography, and index are included at the end of the documentation.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
5
2 Overview
2
Overview
The following section gives a quick overview of the functionality and the basic
features of gXconvert.
2.1
Features of gXconvert
functionality
gXconvert is a program to convert graphics data files of a variety of formats. In
addition to format conversion gXconvert is capable of performing a variety of
additional functions. This overview gives a list of gXconvert functionality:
format conversion
•
Format conversion includes the conversion of all important raster, vector,
and hybrid formats. This process can even convert file formats to different
types of formats. A huge number of file formats are supported. All market
relevant formats are available, in all format variants, sizes, coding, and resolutions.
adapting to
paper format
•
The functions scaling and rotation are available to match with any output
paper size. Scaling functions for any factor, even independent of the x- and
y-axis, are supported. Splitting an input image to fit onto several smaller
sized output formats may be used to create a large sized image even when
there is only a smaller output format available.
positioning
•
The output format may be moved to any place on a virtual device surface to give you full control over its position.
overlay
•
In addition to hybrid format conversion, several files may be added into one
output file. The overlay may be resolved with any graphics file format. It
may be added by controlling the transparency - to let parts of an image shine
through.
label and banner
•
Overlaying the image with additional descriptive elements is available in a
full set of features - the labels and banners may be placed inside or outside
the image boundaries.
attribute control
•
Defining and redefining pens (in width and color) may be required to adapt
old images to a new generation of output devices. Changing the fill types,
colors, and fonts within an image file is another advanced feature.
paper optimization
•
Several output images may be placed optimally on the output device - this
gives you the advantage of low paper waste. Use a large format output
device for supplying smaller sized formats.
work flow
optimization
•
The list of features may be combined easily - this gives you better print and
output results with the help of the output formats - it increases your overall
output throughput.
cost optimization
•
The full featured conversion process may reduce or even prevent you from
having additional costs - it can reduce your amount of materials - it can
solve your needs without upgrading your output device or workstation hardware - no RIPs required: gXconvert is able to generate the native high-speed
output device formats.
application
support
gXconvert has been tested for a wide range of applications. All standard methods
of coding graphics data are supported. But many applications require additional
support for graphics or application related data, like text fonts, line types,
symbols or colors. gXconvert knows how to handle these extensions.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2 Overview
6
gXconvert supports profiles: several sets of attributes can be configured to suit
the needs of an application, a user or a device. These profiles will also be used
for specifying default values that will be available when using gXconvert. Many
existing applications are already specified this way, new ones can be integrated
easily.
profiles
gXconvert gives you more than conversion of graphics file formats. It has
build-in processing capabilities to adapt to nearly all needs of an application or
an output device. These features are available during the conversion process and
comprise functions like scaling (resize), rotation, and splitting an output
(generate an A3 drawing by printing / plotting two A4 pages). Additionally,
re-mapping and changing individual features of an input file may be configured,
like changing the setting of a pen, and modifying line, color, and font attributes.
adaption of formats
Furthermore, gXconvert has extended capabilities to specify the layout of the
graphics files on the output devices. These functions include an individual positioning of files on the output surface, adding labels (or banners) provided by an
additional file. Selecting parts of a file is possible by setting a viewport and
enabling clipping. This may be combined with zooming and scaling features. All
of these additional features are independent of the graphics file format, they are
available for vector as well as for raster files.
layout capabilities
gXconvert is structured modularly and can therefore easily be configured to
specific needs. The basic version of gXconvert consists of an input and output
driver both freely selectable out of the list of drivers.
modular structure
gXconvert is available for a wide range of computers. The package can be delivered for all computers based on UNIX and X-Windows. Additionally, versions
for Windows, VMS and OpenVMS are available as well. Implementations for
other operating systems are available on request.
availability
gXconvert can be integrated into every program environment. The program can
be called directly by the user with given parameters or can be called from a shell
script and, this way, from an application program, too. The integration into an
interactive environment is as easy as using gXconvert in a batch processing
configuration. This is mostly important when a high volume throughput is
required.
integration
gXconvert can be configured according to device specific characteristics. A user
or a system integrator can define device characteristics via a configuration file,
thereby controlling the output formats. This includes the size of output area, a
selection of measure units, defaults or pens and color tables, picture rotation,
description of drawing qualities such as cap style, etc. Many configuration possibilities are common to all devices, others are device specific and therefore allow
the usage of special features offered by the device.
configuration
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
7
2 Overview
2.2
Formats and Functionality
This section summarizes the main functions of gXconvert organized by the
groups of features.
2.2.1
input format
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Anvil
CALS raster type 1 and 2
CGM (binary, character, cleartext encoding), CGM+
CalComp 906 / 907, HCBS
Catia Image
GKSM
HP-GL, HP-GL/2, HP RTL
Intergraph Raster
JPEG (ISO standard 10918)
The program supports a subset of the ISO JPEG standard handling interchange JPEG datastreams using 8 bit data precision: most baseline,
extended-sequential, and progressive JPEG processes. Unsupported ISO
options are: Hierarchical storage, lossless JPEG, arithmetic entropy coding
(unsupported for legal reasons), DNL marker, nonintegral subsampling
ratios.
PDF
PostScript
SGI Image
SUN Raster
Standard Plot Format
TAPE9
TIFF (LZW, Packbits, G1 - G5)
TIFF (LZW, Packbits, G1 - G5, JPEG if contained as single JPEG-stream)
VRF
XWD
2.2.2
output format
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
gXconvert
System Description
Input Formats
Output Formats
BGL
CalComp pen, electrostatic, thermal transfer output device by HCBS
CalComp electrostatic, thermal transfer output device by CCRF
Canon LBP
CGM
DXF
HP-GL, HP-GL/2
Indigo RST
JPEG (ISO standard 10918)
PostScript, EPS
PDF
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2 Overview
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Printer formats (Epson FX 80, Epson Capsl, HP PCL, HP LaserJet, HP
DeskJet, HP PaintJet, NEC P6, IBM ProPrinter, Mannesmann Tally)
Raster printer formats (HP RTL, NovaJet, Versatec 1d-compacted raster,
CCRF, SNI 2050)
Raster formats (XWD, CALS 1, CCITT Group 4, Bitimage, TIFF G1, TIFF
LZW, TIFF G4, TIFF G5, GIF, Windows BMP, PCX)
Standard Plot Format
Versatec (optional, full support for Versatec devices if VGS library from
XES is available. MS-DOS Versatec 1d-compacted raster only), VCGL,
VCRF
WMF (for computers with Windows)
X11 (for computers with X11 support)
2.2.3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8
Parameters in the Program Call or in the Configuration
File
List of input files
List of pictures to be processed in the first input file
File type (CGM, HPGL, CalComp, PostScript, Raster/TIFF, ...)
Name of output file
Name of log file
Selection of information for log file
Identification of output device definition
Action at the end of the picture
Action at the end of the file
Program break at the end of the picture or the end of the file
Rotation (fixed, automatic)
Scale factor
Scale mode
Output size and position
Error processing
Maximum number of errors
Definition of a profile
CGM file to preset the interpretation
Output optimizing (for pen plotters)
Help mode
Metafile statistic
Configuration file from which further information can be read
Zooming
Picture tiling
Composition of metafiles by layout
Banner
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
parameter
gXconvert
System Description
9
2 Overview
2.2.4
state information
•
•
•
•
Names of input files and output files and pictures
Processing state
Picture size and size of required output area
Statistic of the elements included in the input file
2.2.5
mapping
•
•
gXconvert
System Description
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hatch Types
User-definable hatch types
2.2.9
devices
Line Types
User-definable line types
2.2.8
hatch types
Fonts
A selection of fonts is available whenever graphics formats or devices don't
support the desired font capabilities.
• Symbols
• User-definable symbols and markers
2.2.7
line types
Profiling
Possibility of mapping attributes used in the input file onto other attribute values
for interpretation by gXconvert:
• Mapping of all values of a certain attribute onto the same value during
output
• Mapping of certain values onto others
• Mapping of ranges of values to a simple value
• Changing color table
2.2.6
fonts
State Information for Processed Metafiles
Device Configuration
Definition of devices and subdevices
Selecting measurement unit
Display of a startup message
Definition of color tables
Rotation on output
Definition of cap and join style
Further device-specific information
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2 Overview
2.3
10
Licensing
The complete operation of gXconvert requires a valid license. The delivery of the
product contains a license key that has to be entered into the file gtslic. This
file is available in the $GTS_FONTS directory.
license key
The license mechanism is operating on the machine identifier (Windows:
computer name) and individual input and output formats, or groups of formats.
Therefore, your installation may not be able to read or generate every graphics
format that is documented in this manual. The availability of some functionality
may depend on the purchased and licensed formats.
licensed format
Furthermore, a license may become invalid due to an expiration date. A license
violation may also occur if the allowed number of simultaneous users, or the
number of conversions allowed per time period has been exceeded.
license violation
2.3.1
Formats and Corresponding Licenses
A license to use a graphics file format supported by gXconvert is based on an
individual format, or on a group of formats. The following lists report the groups
and their names and reference the graphics file formats that are contained in a
group.
licensed format
The availability of a format or a group of formats depends on the license key. In
case you are uncertain of the supported formats in your installation, please
contact your sales representative.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
11
2 Overview
2.3.2
input
Input License Groups
Table 2-1 lists the available license input groups with the correspondent input
formats.
Input License Group
File Format
ANVILIN
Anvil
CALIN
CalComp (including raster elements)
CALSIN
CALS
CALVIN
CalComp (without raster elements)
CGM+IN
CGM (including Larson extension)
CGMIN
CGM (without Larson extension)
GKSMIN
GKSM
HPGLEXT
Allow HP RTL within HPGLIN
HPGLIN
HP-GL (without HP RTL)
IGDSIN
IGDS
IMGIN
XWD and all other raster formats without TIFF and
CALS
IMGIN
or RASIN
XWD
JPGIN
JPEG
PDFIN
PDF
PNMIN
PNM
PSIN
PostScript
STDPLDIN
STDPLD
TAPE9IN
TAPE9
TIFIN
or RASIN
VDSIN
Table 2-1:
TIFF (all TIFF subformats)
VDS
Input License Groups and Corresponding Input Formats
When using hybrid HP-GL or HP RTL input files, HPGLIN and
HPGLEXT have to be licensed.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2 Overview
2.3.3
12
Output License Groups
Table 2-2 lists the available license output groups with the correspondent output
formats and the configuration file.
Output
License
Group
output
Configuration File
File Format
CDEVTX40
DEC VTx40 (Device ID 6000 ... 6999); no license check
CALOUT
CCALHCBS
CalComp output by CalComp HCBS library (Device ID 5000 ... 5999)
CCRFOUT
CXXRAS
CCRF (Device ID 8000 ... 8999 and Device name (CR) )
CGMOUT
CXXMETA
CGM output (Device ID 7000 ... 7999 and Device name CGM)
DXFOUT
CXXMETA
DXF output (Device ID 7000 ... 7999 and Device name DXF)
GIFOUT
CXXRAS
Compuserve GIF (Device ID 8000 ... 8999 and Device name (GF))
HPGLOUT
CHPGLX
HP-GL, STDPLD, Rotring NC plotscriber, BGL, (Device ID 3000 ...
3999)
IMGOUT
CXXRAS
XWD, Windows BMP, X Bitmap, PCX (Device ID 8000 ... 8999 and
Device name (IM))
JPGOUT
CXXRAS
JPEG (Device ID 8000 ... 8999 and device name (JP))
LBPOUT
CCANLBP
Canon LBP (Device ID 9000 ... 9999)
PDFOUT
CXXPSCRI,
CXXRAS
PDF hybrid output (Device ID 2000 ... 2999), PDF raster output
(Device ID 8000 ... 8999)
PROUT
CXXRAS
Raster printer output (Device ID 8000 ... 8999 without Device name)
PSOUT
CXXPSCRI
PostScript (Device ID 2000 ... 2999)
RASOUT
CXXRAS
TIFF, CALS 1, CCITTG4, WFAX, Bitimage, Raster0/1 (Device ID
8000 ... 8999 and Device name (RF))
RPLOUT
CXXRAS
HP RTL, NovaJet RTL, SNI 2050 (Device ID 8000 ... 8999 and
Device name (RP))
RSTOUT
CXXRAS
Indigo RST Mark I/Mark II (Device ID 8000 ... 8999 and Device name
(RS))
RVGSOUT
CXXRAS
Versatec 1d-compacted raster (Device ID 8000 ... 8999 and Device
name (VR)), VCRF
VGSOUT
CVERVGS
Versatec output by Versatec Color Graphics Library (Device ID 4000
... 4999)
WMFOUT
CWINDOWS
Windows Metafile (Device ID 1000 ... 1999)
X11OUT
CXXX11
X11 output (Device ID 20 ... 29)
Table 2-2:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Output License Groups and Corresponding Output Formats
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
13
2 Overview
WMF output (WMFOUT) is only supported by the Windows versions
of gXconvert.
Due to licence agreements with CalComp, the CalComp output
(CALOUT) must not be used to drive Versatec printers.
2.3.4
demo
gXconvert
System Description
Demo Mode
When there is no license file available, a conversion is done nevertheless. In this
case, a message is generated to the standard out channel notifying that gXconvert
is running in demo mode. Additionally, five stamps are placed over the output
picture in the corners and the center stating that the demo mode was used. In
demo mode it is not possible to use layout files and devices larger than A0 size.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2 Overview
2.4
14
Resource Requirements
Installing gXconvert requires the minimal resources of the used operating
system.
minimal
resources
The required minimum disk space for the installation is approximately 15 to 20
MByte.
The conversion process requires additional main memory and disk space. The
free main memory size should not be less than 10 MByte. gXconvert is able to
convert large input files even when the images don't fit completely into the main
memory. In addition to the main memory, some conversions require an intermediate file on disk. The size of the intermediate file depends directly on the size of
the input and output format. The conversion generating a raster output format can
be calculated approximately by the product of the number of pixels in x- times
y-dimension times the color depth, plus some additional work space.
As an example, generating a raster image in A1 size (594 mm x 840 mm), 300
dpi resolution (approximately 11.8 dpmm) and 8 bit color will need more than
70 MByte intermediate disk space in addition to the space required by the input
and output file.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
15
3 Using gXconvert
3
Using gXconvert
Program parameters are used to control the processing of the graphics data file.
This includes the name of the input and output file, the graphics device used, the
maximum size of output, the list of pictures to be processed in one file, and
others.
The most important parameters are described in the following section. For
further information see the chapters dealing with the output device drivers.
The parameters are specified as follows:
-keyword parameter
A default value is usually used in case a -keyword parameter
sequence is not specified.
configuration file
The parameters can be stored in a configuration file. The name of the configuration file is specified using a command line parameter1.
Example of calling gXconvert with parameters:
gxconvert -input test.hpgl -device 8010 -output test.pcl
-overwrite yes
This command will convert test.hpgl, which is specified as an HP-GL
file, to an HP-PCL output file, test.pcl, for HP LaserJet (-device
8010). If test.pcl already exists, it is overwritten.
graphics format
gXconvert tries to detect automatically the type of the input file's graphics
format. In very rare cases the specification of the input file type may be necessary
using -filetype hpgl in the command line.
If the same parameter is given more than once, only the last value is
used.
exit code
The exit codes of gXconvert are listed both for UNIX and Windows in Chapter
16, List of Exit Codes, page 361.
temporary file
In the directory specified by the TMP environment variable, gXconvert writes its
temporary files. If TMP is not set, the current directory is used.
1. Chapter 6.1, Specifying the Configuration File, page 113
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
3.1
16
Program Parameters of gXconvert
In this section, all programs parameters available for gXconvert are listed alphabetically.
-acknowledge
acknowledgement desired
Parameter:
acknowledge
acknowledge
acknowledgement
allows the user to be asked for an acknowledgement under certain conditions.
NONE
no acknowledgement at all
EOF
at the end of each processed graphics
input file
EOL
at the end of the processed layout
EOP
at the end of each picture of a graphics
input file
EOT
at the end of each generated title
default:
EOP for output to X11-driver (device 20-29), NONE for all
other output drivers.
This command is useful for screen output when multiple pictures or input
files are to be displayed and the user wants to stop between each picture or
file. The user is asked for acknowledgement after writing the message
press return to continue to STDOUT and waiting for the return key
to be pressed.
Example of user interactive processing:
-acknowledge EOP
Example of automated file processing:
-acknowledge NONE
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
17
alignment
gXconvert
System Description
3 Using gXconvert
image alignment and device size tolerance
Parameter:
[align] [tolerance]
align
controls the positioning of the image.
NONE
The image is not aligned.
CENTER
The image will be centered (horizontally and vertically) on the output device. Centering will be performed only
when the image has to be clipped in order to fit onto the output device. The
output image will be centered only in
the direction the clipping has been taken place.
ALWAYS
The image is always aligned. If it is too
small, a margin will be around the
image. If it is too large, it is clipped.
ISO
The image is aligned on a drawing area
that has an aspect ratio of 1/ 2 . There
are two possibilities of this aspect ratio: portrait or landscape. If the image
fits into the portrait format (i. e.
y_extent is specified by device,
x_extent is y_extent2 / 2 ), portrait
is used. Otherwise landscape is used
(x_extent = y_extent* 2 ). If the
image is too large, it is clipped. If the
image is smaller, it is centered using a
margin. But the resulting drawing surface will always have the aspect ratio
1/ 2 .
ISOROLL Same as ISO; but if the image is too
large to fit in landscape mode, it is not
clipped. The drawing surface
x_extent will have the length of the
image.
TOP, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM
The image is aligned at the specified
margin. The other direction is centered.
tolerance
specifies the percentage value, i. e. the
value that will be used to (virtually)
increase the device's drawing area before comparing to the size of the
image.
NONE 0
default:
This parameter is useful when working with a list of output devices and
gXconvert is looking up the best device that the image will fit on. Usually,
when not applying the tolerance parameter, the first device in the list of
device IDs specified by -device that is able to completely display the
output image, is selected for output.
-align
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
18
For example, giving an exactly A4 sized image (210 mm x 297 mm) will
usually not fit onto an A4 printer because of the printer's unprintable
margins. To control whether the A4 image should nevertheless go onto the
A4 printer, the tolerance parameter is set to tell gXconvert to accept the A4
printer as an appropriate output device. Assuming a non-printable margin
of 2 mm on each side of the paper, a tolerance of 2 (%) will work. The
alignment flag CENTER should be used when you want the output to be
centered, giving you an image that will be cut off on all 4 sides (due to the
unprintable area).
Example:
-align CENTER
The command centers but does not use tolerance.
-align 5
No alignment is done, but 5% tolerance is used.
Example of using -align:
Suppose using the devices 2000 (PostScript A4 Landscape, 285 mm x
197 mm), 8012 (HP LaserJet III, A3 Landscape, 405 mm x 285 mm),
and 8070 (TIFF A0 Square, 1189 mm x 1189 mm).
Simply calling
gxconvert -device 2000 8012
will generate all output that is larger than 285 x 197 mm2 to the LaserJet
device.
gxconvert -device 2000 8012 -align 2
will generate only the output that is larger than 296 x 201 mm2 to the
LaserJet device.
gxconvert -device 2000 8012 8070 -align center 2
will generate the output to the PostScript device if it is less than 296 x
201 mm2; to the LaserJet device when the output is in size between 296
x 201 mm2 and 413 x 290 mm2; and to the TIFF device when it is larger
than 413 x 290 mm2. Centering will be done when a clipping has to be
done to make the image fit onto the device.
Centering will not be done when the image fits onto the
non-enlarged device dimensions.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
19
end of line
3 Using gXconvert
cap style; the parameter is passed to
output driver
-capstyle
Parameter:
capstyle
specifies the cap style
capstyle
default:
output device-dependent
color
none
This parameter is only available when converting to an output device of
one of the types: PostScript, HP-GL, Versatec, CalComp, and raster. The
parameter is passed directly to the output driver. The style of the line ends
depends on the capabilities of the output driver, see the appropriate chapters in this manual for a list of supported parameters.
color map file
-colmap
Parameter:
filename
specifies the name of the color map file.
filename
GXCONV.CMP
default:
A color map (often referred to as color table) is the mapping (transformation) of a color index (normally between 0 and 15 or 255) onto the real
color used by the output device. The color index is used by the application
while the contents of the table entry are used by the device. Both color
representations may differ. Most devices that use a color index representation are capable of setting the color table, i. e. to define what is meant by
the color index. The result of a color map definition is therefore
device-dependent.
color map file
An entry in the color map file is specified as follows:
colourmap=index,flag,red,green,blue
index {0
... 255} defines the color index to be defined.
flag {0|1}:
0 means that the color for index as defined in the color map file is
used, except when index is set in the graphics file; the color for index
of the graphics file overwrites the definition in the color map.
1 means that the color for index of the color map file will always be
used. The color for index of the graphics file is always ignored.
red, green, blue defines the color values of the red, green, and blue
components (0 ... 255).
-colmap is not evaluated if a layout file is specified (see -layout).
Use the COLOURMAP command in the layout file for this purpose.
Example of always setting the color index 0 to white and color index 1
to black:
colourmap=0,1,255,255,255
colourmap=1,1,0,0,0
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
20
or -colourmode
colormode
Parameter:
-colormode
colormode
bw
color
or colour
output color mode
color mode
specifies the appearance of the colors
in the output file.
A b/w output file is created. All colors
but white are mapped to black. If the
output driver has a b/w mode, it is
switched to b/w mode. If the output
driver supports a dithering, dithering is
switched off.
A color output file is created (if possible). If the output driver has a RGB color mode, it is switched to RGB color
mode. If the output driver supports an
indexed color mode, it is switched to
index color mode. If the driver supports a hardware color mode with dithering facility, it is switched to
hardware color mode with dithering
enable. Otherwise try a gray mode or
b/w dithered mode.
or colour_simulated
A color output file is created (if possible). If the output driver has a hardware/index color mode, it is switched
to hardware/index color mode. If the
output driver supports a dithering, dithering is enabled.
grey
A grayscale or dithered b/w output file
is created. Converts all colors to
shades of gray. If the driver has a gray
mode, it is switched to gray mode. If
the driver has a b/w mode along with
dithering facility, it is switched to b/w
mode with dithering enabled.
grey_simulated
A grayscale or dithered b/w output file
is created. Converts all colors to
shades of gray. If the output driver has
a b/w mode along with dithering facility, it is switched to b/w mode with
dithering enabled. If the driver has a
gray mode, it is switched to gray mode.
original
uses the current settings of output
driver. This may use a dithering or
mapping of colors due to the settings
of the driver.
default:
original
color_simulated
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
21
3 Using gXconvert
.
If an output driver does not support the requested color mode, the
best possible color type is used.
configuration file
parameter configuration file
-config
Parameter:
filename
specifies the name of the parameter
configuration file
filename
GXCONV.CON
default:
All parameters that may be given in the command line may also be specified in a configuration file. GXCONV.CON is searched in the current directory
(or working directory on Windows).
The parameter -config is not allowed within a configuration file!
% in the first column marks a comment line. Each line can only keep
one parameter including its arguments. Each line is limited to 511
characters.
Example of a parameter configuration file MY_CONF.CNF that generates
a TIFF G4 output file (device ID 8070a):
% Configuration file writing TIFF G4
-device 8070
-mode original
-overwrite yes
-statistics yes
-acknowledge none
This way, the configuration file is used when calling gXconvert:
gxconvert
-input my_file.hpgl
-config MY_CONF.CNF
-output my_file.tif
a. Chapter 15.6, Predefined Raster Devices, page 343
debug
debug output
-debug
Parameter:
debuglevel
debuglevel
3
10
sets the debug level.
default:
none
Write debug output to file GXCONV.ERR. debuglevel can be a value from
0 to 10. For larger values more information is written to GXCONV.ERR. The
output format is subject to changes.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
22
specification of the output device
-device
Parameter:
deviceID
deviceID
output device
All Supported Device IDs1.
default:
none
The format of the output (e. g. HP-GL, HP-GL/2, PostScript) is controlled
by specifying the output device ID. If multiple output devices have been
specified, gXconvert chooses one device which then will be used. This
selection depends on the input format and is performed in several steps:
• If the input file is abstract or mode is abstract, the largest device of the
list is used.
• If the picture fits onto one or more devices, the smallest device selected
by area which will fit the picture is used.
• Otherwise, the largest device is used.
The maximum size of the output area is thus also defined.
Chapter 15, List of Predefined Devices, page 322, contains a list of
predefined output device IDs. Chapter 7, PostScript and PDF Driver, page
116, up to Chapter 12, Canon Driver, page 252, provide detailed descriptions about the configuration of the devices for each driver.
dither mode (only supported for
certain printer type models)
Parameter:
dithermode [matrixsize]
dithermode
type of dithering algorithm used
0
no dithering
1
dithering by Floyd-Steinberg algorithm
2
For -dithermode 2 matrixsize can
be defined. matrixsize can be 2,4 or
8 (default 4).
3
8x8 dither matrix
4
8x8 dither matrix
0
default:
Dithering is used to simulate colors and shades of gray on devices with
limited color facility (8 or 16 colors, b/w). With dithering up to 256 colors
can be displayed. See Chapter 11.4, Dithering (Color Simulation), page
235, for a detailed description of the dithering funtionality.
-dithermode
dither mode
-dithermode is only available when converting to a raster output
devicea. The parameter is passed directly to the output driver.
a. Chapter 11, Raster Driver, page 190
1. Chapter 15, List of Predefined Devices, page 322
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
23
environment
3 Using gXconvert
interpreting environment
-env
Parameter:
environmentfile
environmentfile
specifies
the name of the environment
file
default:
GXCONV.ENV
-env allows to specify various pieces of information during the interpreta-
tion of metafiles, e. g.:
Mapping of pens in HP-GL files to specific plotter pens that are characterized by colors and width. An example how to do this is given in the
environment file HPGL.ENV that is delivered with gXconvert.
• Specification of an additional character expansion factor by which every
character expansion factor encountered in interpreted metafiles is multiplied. An example how to do this is given in the environment file
HPGL.ENV that is delivered with gXconvert.
• Replacement of defaults of interpreted graphics files.
•
environment file
operation at eof
All mapping data are specified in a file, the environment file. This environment file is interpreted before other graphics files are interpreted. Usually,
this file is a clear text CGM file, but it may also be character or binary
encoded. The default name for the environment file is CGM.ENV, HPGL.ENV
or CALCOMP.ENV etc., depending on the file type which has been specified
in the command line. Therefore, different default environment files for
different file types may be used without the need to specify them explicitly
via this option. If any of the default environment files does not exist when
accessed, gXconvert tries to use an environment file called GXCONV.ENV. If
this environment file does not exist either, no environment is used at all.
The default environment files are searched in the current directory.
Different locations (and filenames) have to be specified by -env.
For additional information and examples see Chapter 4, Profiling, page 84.
operation at end of file
-eof
Parameter:
eof
specifies the operation executed at the
end of the input file.
eof
CONTINUE
CLEAR
CLOSE
CLEAR
default:
-eof is used to control whether a new output is to be generated for each
input file (CLEAR and CLOSE), or the input files are to be overlaid
(CONTINUE). For printers, CLOSE creates a new file while CLEAR writes the
pictures of the new input file into the same output file.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
24
operation at end of picture
-eop
Parameter:
operation at eop
eop
specifies the operation executed at the
end of picture.
eop
CONTINUE
CLEAR
CLOSE
CLEAR
default:
-eop is used to control whether a new output is to be generated for each
picture (CLEAR and CLOSE), or the pictures are to be overlaid (CONTINUE).
For printers, CLOSE creates a new file while CLEAR writes a new picture into
the same file. CONTINUE will result in a single picture in the output file,
which keeps all input pictures overlaid on each other.
-eop sets -eof to the same value since a new file also implies a new
picture.
maximum number of errors
-errmax
number of errors
Parameter:
maximum_errors_number
maximum_errors_number
specifies
the maximum number of er-
rors.
default:
10000
Ignoring of faulty elements can result in sequence errors in case of faulty
input files. -errmax limits the number of errors which may occur when
processing an input file.
Some kind of errors cannot be ignored. The graphics file processing
is aborted in this case.
error handling
-error
Parameter:
error
error
ABORT
IGNORE
PROTOCOL
IGNORE
default:
-error
error handling
specifies the type of error handling.
abortion graphics file processing
continuation of processing
continuation and logging of error
is used to control the processing in case of an error.
This parameter has not yet been realized.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
25
input file type
3 Using gXconvert
type of input file
-filetype
Parameter:
filetype
filetype
ANVIL
CGM
specifies the type of the input file.
Anvil format
CGM (binary, character, or cleartext
encoded)
CalComp 906/907, CalComp HCBS
GKS Metafile
HP-GL, HP-GL/2
Intergraph Raster
Portable Bitmap format
CALCOMP
GKSM
HPGL
IGDS
PNM
POSTSCRIPT
STDPLD
TAPE9
TIFF
VDS
automatic file
type recognition
gXconvert
System Description
PostScript
Standard plot format
TAPE9
TIFF (Intel, Motorola), CALS, XWD
Versatec Data Standards (VRF only)
If the input file can not be interpreted with the specified file type, gXconvert tries to identify the correct file type. With the automatic file type
recognition, multiple input files with different file types can be interpreted
in a single pass. Usually, it is not necessary to specify a file type.
The automatic file type recognition performs several steps:
1. Look if some strong conditions which belong to the specified file type
match the input file (e. g. CGM files must start with the Begin Metafile
opcode). If the condition is not met, the specified file type is not
accepted for this file and gXconvert will continue with step 2. If the
condition is met, gXconvert tries to interpret the file with the specified
file type. If an error is detected in the very beginning of the file, gXconvert continues with step 2. Otherwise, the file is interpreted to end of
picture or end of file.
2. gXconvert tries to recognize the file type using some characteristics
(e. g. HP-GL files should contain SP commands). With this file type
gXconvert again tries to interpret the file. If an error is detected in the
very beginning of the file, gXconvert continues with step 3. Otherwise
the file is interpreted to end of picture or end of file.
3. Now gXconvert tries to interpret the file with all remaining file types. If
an error is detected in the very beginning of the file, the next available
file type is used. If all file types have been tried, an error message is
printed out that the file can not be interpreted.
Step 1 only includes some rigid conditions to check file type CGM, TIFF,
TAPE9 and STDPLD. For HP-GL the relation of recognized and
non-recognized HP-GL commands is used to determine whether the file is
a valid HP-GL file. Because of their flexibility, no rigid conditions can be
demanded for HPGL. Step 1 is used to force the interpretation of a file with
a certain file type, if the automatic recognition fails. Therefore, the file type
CALCOMP should only be specified when interpreting CALCOMP files.
Keep in mind that the default configuration file GXCONV.CON is always
interpreted. So, the specification of a file type in GXCONV.CON is always
present.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
26
The support of all file types is subject to installation or licensing.
paper size
-format
paper size
Parameter:
formatname
formatname
specifies the paper size.
default:
none
The format (paper size) has to be specified in the PPD file description, see
[GXNETPLOT_USR]. -format has to be used with -ppd which specifies
the PPD file to be used.
color brightness correction; the parameter is passed to the raster output driver
-gamma
Parameter:
gamma
specifies the color brightness correction.
gamma
default:
gamma correction
1.0
-gamma is used to lighten or darken the image (called gamma correction or
brightness/lightness correction). This parameter is only available when
converting to a raster output device and passed directly to the raster driver.
For a description see Chapter 11.2, Configuring the CXXRAS Driver, page
194.
The PostScript input driver is also able to perform a gamma correction by using the PSIGAMMA environment variable.
-help
display of help menu
help menu
Parameter:
none
This parameter displays a list of all parameters on STDOUT. No
processing of input or output files will be done when using this parameter.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
27
information file
GXCONV.INF
3 Using gXconvert
write information file
-info
Parameter:
none
gXconvert writes an information file called GXCONV.INF. This file contains
all relevant information and data about the input file. A description of the
data format is given in Chapter 3.8, Information File GXCONV.INF, page
79.
Using the -info parameter implies that the specified input file is not
converted. Only the information file is generated.
Using -info also requires to specify an output device by -device and an
input file list by -input.
An information file (GXCONV.INF) is automatically generated by
each conversion. -info should only be used if no conversion is
requested and only the information of the input files is needed. In
this case the interpretation is much faster than doing the complete
conversion.
input file
list of the input files to be processed
-input
Parameter:
filenames
specifies the input files separated by
blanks
filenames
default:
CGM.DAT
The input file name or a list of input file names is specified.
job name
job name
-jobname
Parameter:
jobname
specifies the name of the job.
jobname
default:
none
The job name is replaced in the label or stamp file using the #JOBNAME
placeholder, see Chapter 3.2, Labels and Stamps File, page 46.
join
Parameter:
style
default:
output device-dependent
style of joins; this parameter is passed
to output driver
-joinstyle
style
specifies the style of joins.
depends on the output driver
This parameter is only available when converting to an output device of
PostScript or HP-GL. The parameter is passed directly to the output driver.
The style of the joins depends on the capabilities of the output
driver, see the appropriate chapters in this manual for a list of
supported parameters.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
28
debug configuration data
-keepcfg
Parameter:
none
This parameter keeps the temporarily created configuration file when
using command parameters for a driver (-resolution, -merge). This is
for debugging purposes only. That file is located in the /tmp directory on
UNIX or in the current directory on Windows.
output comments
-label
Parameter:
string
debug configuration data
comments
string
specifies comments and descriptions
to be output.
default:
none
This parameter is used to add comments or descriptions to an output file.
Each specified string will be printed in a separate line. Up to 16 lines of
comments are available. To specify a line of comment with multiple words
separated by blanks, the line must be enclosed in quotes. Blanks within a
line can also be specified by @b. For example, @10b will be replaced by ten
blanks.
Example of specifying four lines of comment:
-label "Line 1 of comment" Line2 Line3 "Line 4 of comment"
or
-label Line@b1@bof@bcomment Line2 Line3 Line@b4@bof@bcomment
Within a layout file, use LABEL to specify comments.
in the command line or in a configuration file is ignored in
the case of layout files.
-label
The meta character @ is defined by the environment variable
GTSLBMETA.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
29
named label
3 Using gXconvert
(1 ... 99)
Parameter:
named labels
-labeln
string
string
specifies a named label.
default:
none
Defines up to 99 different texts that can be referenced with -labelopt
files. See -label for how to specify strings. See -labelopt for how to
reference the label file. See Chapter 3.2, Labels and Stamps File, page 46,
for how to reference a named label.
Multiple lines may be specified using several strings in sequence. Specify
empty lines using blanks.
Example of an empty second line:
-label1 "Line 1" " " "Line 3"
Example of -labelopt file (see below) that contains a reference to this
label using the following line:
-text #LABEL1
label offset
-labeloffsetn
or -stampoffsetn
Parameter:
xoffset
yoffset
unit
additional offset for labels or stamps
xoffset yoffset [unit]
specifies the offset in x-direction
specifies the offset in y-direction
specifies the measurement unit
mm
cm
m
inch
0 0 mm
default:
Specifies an additional offset for labels or stamps. The value n for the
offset number can be in the range of 1 to 99.
If the environment variable GTS_USE_INCH is set to 1 the default
unit is inch.
The label or stamp offset may be referenced in a label or stamp file
specified by -offseta.
a. Chapter 3.2, Labels and Stamps File, page 46
Example of setting offset for label 4:
-labeloffset4 10 12 inch
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
30
adding labels
filename [filename] ...
Parameter:
filename
specifies a file containing labels.
default:
none
A label created by this parameter is a text or image to be added to the
converted image. A label may be positioned inside or outside the converted
image. If the file is not found under its specified file name, it is searched in
the following places:
-labelopt
•
•
•
•
•
label file
$GTS_FONTS/filename
$GRALPLOTLIB/filename
./basefilename
$GTS_FONTS/basefilename
$GRALPLOTLIB/basefilename
Compared to -label, a label can be specified more detailed this way. See
Chapter 3.2, Labels and Stamps File, page 46, for a detailed description of
the label file format.
Up to 99 label file names may be specified.
layout file
-layout
Parameter:
layout
filename
filename
specifies the name of a layout file.
default:
none
Using the layout functionality, several pictures can be positioned freely
within a single drawing. Specific pictures from multi-picture graphics files
can be selected.
See Chapter 3.3, Layout File, page 65, for a detailed description of the
layout file format.
A layout file is also recognized using -input instead of -layout.
In this case LAYOUT has to appear within the first 16 lines of the
layout file.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
31
logging
3 Using gXconvert
log file
-log
Parameter:
filename
specifies the name of the log file.
filename
default:
GXCONV.LOG
The processing of input files is logged in this file. Changing the name of
the log file also changes the names of the description (.DSC), error (.ERR)
and statistics file (.STA). Therefore, the extension of the filename given in
the log parameter is stripped off the file name and the base name is used as
base name of the description, error, and statistics file. The capitalization of
the file name's extensions is the same as the capitalization of the log file's
extension.
Example of specifying the name of the log file and the additional files:
-log my_conv.log
also generates the files my_conv.dsc, my_conv.err, and my_conv.sta.
-log my_conv.LOG
will create the files my_conv.DSC, my_conv.ERR, and my_conv.STA.
The files GXCONV.LOG, GXCONV.ERR, and GXCONV.DSC can be
suppressed by specifying -log /dev/null on UNIX, -log NL: on
VMS, or -log NUL on Windows.
margins
margins of the image
-margins
Parameter:
left bottom right top
specifies the left margin.
specifies the bottom margin.
specifies the right margin.
specifies the top margin.
left
bottom
right
top
default:
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
The specified margin (blank boundary) is added to the output image. All
values are interpreted as specified by the GTS_USE_INCH environment variable. If the GTS_USE_INCH environment variable is not set, the values are
assumed to be millimeters.
All values must be greater than 0.0!
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
32
merge colors (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-merge
Parameter:
merge
color merging
merge
enables or disables the merging of colors.
no
disables color merging.
yes
enables color merging.
cmy_bits [on | off] [always]
specifies a 3-digit number giving the
number of bits used for representing
cyan (first digit), magenta (second digit), and yellow (third digit).
The flag on|off specifies if merging
should be on or off upon start of conversion. Depending on the input file
merging can be switched on/off dynamically
If the flag always is specified, merging is fixed to the specified value.
default:
no
Usually, graphics primitives will completely overlay everything that has
been drawn earlier in the same place. Merging gives the possibility to mix
the color of the actual primitive with the color of a primitive drawn earlier.
In this case overlaying yellow with magenta will result in red. Merging is
performed by bitwise OR-ing colors which are represented in a CMY color
model.
This parameter is only available when converting to a raster output
devicea. The parameter is passed directly to the output driver.
a. Chapter 11, Raster Driver, page 190
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
33
scaling
3 Using gXconvert
evaluation of scale mode
-mode
Parameter:
mode
specifies the scale mode.
mode
ORIGINAL
ABSTRACT
FIT
ORIGINAL
ORIGINAL
ABSTRACT
default:
This parameter controls whether the scale mode used in the input file is to
be evaluated (ORIGINAL), or the output is to be produced as large as
possible (ABSTRACT).
input file
There are two scale mode values possible in an input file: abstract and
metric.
metric
The metric scale mode means that the exact size of the picture is described
in the input file and has to be reproduced on the output. If the output area
is too small, the output has to be clipped down to the maximum output area.
abstract
The abstract scale mode means that there is no metric information in the
input file. For example, the XWD format only tells the width and height of
a raster image in pixels. But it does not tell the size of the pixels (usually
specified in dots per inch). Even a TIFF file may not contain metric information.
Note that it is always possible to use mode ABSTRACT, while mode
ORIGINAL may result in mode abstract or metric depending on the
value used in the input file. It is not possible to select scale mode
metric when the input file uses mode ABSTRACT, since then there is
no information about the size of the picture.
FIT
gXconvert
System Description
HPGL and CalComp input is handled as if the scale mode would be metric
since an output file always has a certain size on the output. With mode
ABSTRACT these files can also be resized so that the picture fits in the output
area available.
Mode FIT will fit input files to the size of the output area. But metric input
files are only scaled if the original size does not fit.
If the output area is large enough to print out the input file in its original
size, mode FIT works like mode ORIGINAL. Otherwise, it works like
ABSTRACT.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
34
level of optimization
-optimize
Parameter:
optimize
optimize
NONE
PEN
WAY
tolerance
maxseg
default:
optimization
specifies the optimization.
No optimization is done.
All output primitives using the same
pen are drawn successively. Internally,
all primitives using the same pen are
put in one segment.
In addition to PEN optimization this level of optimization tries to minimize
the distances, pens have to be moved
to continue drawing, i. e. PEN UP.
Is a measure to decide whether two
output primitives whose end point and
starting point lie a certain distance
apart are actually drawn successively.
The tolerance factor is an upper limit
for the distance and is expressed as the
product of the picture size times a factor, that is specified via this option. It
varies in the range from 0.0 to 1.0
(the default value is 0.1) with 1.0 meaning largest possible tolerance (in this
case WAY optimization becomes PEN
optimization) and 0.0 meaning the
smallest possible tolerance (although it
should not be used).
When internal segments are used for
this level of optimization, the maximum number of segments that may be
created can be restricted by specifiying
maxseg. By default, there is no limitation to the number of segments except
for the internal restrictions.
NONE
-optimize is used to group together output primitives for a more efficient
output on pen plotters; on other output devices it needs not to be used.
The specification of tolerance and maxseg is optional, but if
maxseg is to be given, tolerance also has to be specified.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
35
3 Using gXconvert
orientation
-orientation
Parameter:
orientation
orientation
AUTO
specifies the orientation
Use the orientation as specified in the
PPD-file.
PORTRAIT Use portrait orientation.
LANDSCAPE Use landscape orientation.
REVERSE_PORTRAIT Use reverse portrait orientation.
REVERSE_LANDSCAPE Use reverse landscape orientation.
default: AUTO
The orientation specifies the orientation of the output. For orientation
PORTRAIT and REVERSE_PORTRAIT, the formats read from the PPD-file
(e.g. ISO_A4, …) are rotated into portrait format. For orientation LANDSCAPE and REVERSE_LANDSCAPE the formats are rotated into landscape
format. With an automatic rotation activated (-rotate 1000), the rotation
for the input file is evaluated as usual. If REVERSE_PORTRAIT or
REVERSE_LANDSCAPE is specified, an additional rotation of 180 degree is
applied.
can only be used if -ppd and -format have been
specified. An automatic rotation should be applied also.
-orientation
-orientation can only be used for devices that allow to rotate
their format definitions.
For example PDF- or TIFF devices are not configured for a certain
ISO- or ANSI-format. When used with a device that is configured
for a certain ISO- or ANSI-format, the scaling might not be as
expected or parts of the drawing might be clipped.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
36
output file
-output
Parameter:
output file
filename
specifies the name of the output file.
filename
default:
PLdeviceID.PLT
In case several output files are generated they are distinguished by means
of a version number in the file name (see also -overwrite, -eop, and
-eof).
The specified file name may contain some placeholder signs which are
replaced depending of the name of the input file being processed:
• #F or @F will be replaced by the basename of the input file.
• #B or @B will be replaced by the basename of the input file with its
extension stripped off. If a layout file is processed, the name of the
layout file is used for the replacement
• #[0-9]P or @[0-9]P means output file name count and number formatting.
placeholder
To use this file count, -eop or -eof have to be specified with value
CLOSE.
Examples of working with placeholders:
gxconvert
-input /home/data/file.hpg
-output /home/archiv/#F
will generate /home/archiv/file.hpg.
gxconvert
-input /home/data/file.hpg
-output /home/archiv/#B.tif
will generate /home/archiv/file.tif.
gxconvert
will
-input file1.hpg file2.hpg
-output /home/archiv/#B.tif
-eof close
generate
file2.tif.
gxconvert
/home/archiv/file1.tif
and
/home/archiv/
-output [email protected]
will generate File0001.tif, File0002.tif, ...
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
37
overwrite output
file
3 Using gXconvert
overwriting existing output files
-overwrite
Parameter:
overwrite
overwrite
no
yes
specifies if an existing output file is
overwritten or not.
Version numbers for the output files
are created.
The already existing output file is
overwritten.
no
default:
When processing a metafile, this option controls the effect to an output file
that already exists under the same name as the one that will be generated.
pen option
pen option file
-penopt
Parameter:
filename
specifies the name of the pen option
file.
filename
default:
CalComp
HP-GL
pen selection
none
The pen option file for CalComp or HP-GL input may be specified. The
file is searched in the local directory, the directory specified by GTS_FONTS
or in the directory specified by GRALPLOTLIB. This parameter may be used
as an alternative to the environment variables CHPIN_PENS and
CCALIN_PENS (See Chapter 13.4, User-Defined Pens and Patterns, page
283)
pen selection; this parameter is passed
to the output driver
-penselectmode
Parameter:
mode
specifies the pen selection mode.
mode
default:
CalComp
HP-GL
picture
bycolorindex
This parameter is only available when converting to an output device of the
type HP-GL or CalComp. The parameter is passed directly to the output
driver.
pictures to be processed
-picture
Parameter:
numbers
numbers
int
-1
default:
specifies the pictures to be processed.
The numbers of the pictures to be selected separated by blank. The first picture is referenced by 1.
All pictures of the input file will be
processed.
-1
This parameter is not evaluated if more than one input files are to be
processed.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
38
PPD file
-ppd
Parameter:
PPD file
filename
specifies the name of the PPD File.
filename
default:
none
The PPD printer name uses the same file name for defining the PPD's
printer definition, see [GXNETPLOT_USR]. This parameter may be used
with -format.
profile file
-profile
Parameter:
profile file
filename
specifies the name of the profile file.
filename
GXCONV.PRO
default:
A profile is a collection of definitions for the appearance of graphics
elements. Most of the graphics elements within an input file are already
defined in that file. But it may be desirable to modify these attributes
without changing the original file. This can be controlled via the definition
of the user profile. See Chapter 4, Profiling, page 84, for more information
on profiling. If the file is not found under its specified file name, it is
searched in the following places:
•
•
•
•
•
$GTS_FONTS/filename
$GRALPLOTLIB/filename
./basefilename
$GTS_FONTS/basefilename
$GRALPLOTLIB/basefilename
scope of logging
-prot
Parameter:
prot
prot
NONE
BRIEF
default:
FULL
BRIEF
Parameter:
specifies the type of the log file.
No log file will be created.
A short logging of the file to be processed.
Currently the same as BRIEF.
resolution of the output device; this
parameter is passed to the output
driver
-resolution
logging scope
resolution
value unit
specifies the value of resolution.
specifies the unit of resolution.
dpi
Dots per inch
dpm
Dots per meter
dpmm
Dots per millimeter
default:
depends on the output device
The given value of resolution is mapped onto the nearest available resolution of the device.
value
unit
This parameter is only available when converting to an output device of
one of the types PostScript, Versatec, CalComp, Metafile and raster.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
output device
gXconvert
System Description
39
color resolution
3 Using gXconvert
color table for files using direct color
-rgbresolution
Parameter:
rgbresolution
rgbresolution
nred
ngreen
nblue
DIRECT
ALWAYS
default:
CGM
specifies the internal color table.
generates special color table only for
direct color CGM files (optional).
Always use special color table (optional).
6 6 6 DIRECT
Specifies which color table to use internally when interpreting files with
color mode direct. This parameter is useful only when dealing with CGM
files. For interpreting direct color files, an internal color table is generated
on which all colors are mapped. The red, green, blue part of the color table
can be partitioned into nred, ngreen, nblue values.
When nred ngreen nblue exceeds the capability of the output
driver, a color table the driver can handle is generated by reducing
these values.
Example of a color table of 6 6 6 = 216 colors with equally spaced red,
green and blue parts.
-rgbresolution 6 6 6
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
40
rotation of the graphics
-rotate
Parameter:
rotation
rotate
specifies the angle of rotation.
rotate
0
90
180
270
1000
1090
1270
2000
2090
2270
default:
0
Applies a rotation to the displayed picture using the angle specified. The
rotation is performed counter-clockwise.
The value of 1000 will perform a rotation of 90° under certain conditions:
• For metric pictures and original scale mode (-mode): If the picture does
not fit, it will be rotated by 90° if a larger area of the picture can be
displayed than without rotation. If the picture is of landscape format
(width > height) and it will fit onto the device when it is rotated by 90°
to portrait format, it will be rotated. This is done to save paper on output
devices with an endless roll.
• For abstract pictures or an abstract scale mode: The picture is not
rotated, if the picture and the output device have the same format (both
landscape or both portrait format). The picture is rotated by 90° if the
formats of the picture and the output device are not the same.
The value 1090 is equivalent to 1000. The value 1270 will perform an automatic rotation by 270° instead of 90°.
The values 2xxx behave like 1xxx, with the exception that a rotation by
180° is performed when 1xxx would do no rotation.
1000
> 1000
> 2000
can also be specified along with a layout file. But this will
only rotate the picture viewports and the picture inside viewports.
Since the pictures are always drawn in the bottom left corner of the
picture viewport, a rotated layout may look different to an unrotated
one, when the pictures do not fit exactly in their viewport.
rotate
As of gXconvert, version 3.49, the check for automatic rotation was
changed for -mode FIT. In previous versions this was handled like
-mode ABSTRACT. This means that the orientation of the image
(landscape or portrait) was previously rotated to match the orientation of the output device. Now if it fits unscaled, it is rotated in the
same way as in mode ORIGINAL. If it does not fit, the rotation is used
which gives the maximum scale factor (this is always < 1.0).
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
41
scaling
3 Using gXconvert
scale factor
-scale
Parameter:
scalefactor
scalefactor
xy_scale
x_scale
y_scale
default:
1.0
specify the scale factor.
A linear scaling of the output can be achieved via the scale factor. Scale
factors can be applied to the x- or y-direction of the picture. If only one
value has been specified, the picture is equally scaled in x- and y-direction
by this factor.
Note that the scale factors are applied to the x- or y-direction of the
input image. An additional rotation is applied after scaling. A layout
can only be scaled by equal x- or y-scale factors.
output size
output size
-size
Parameter:
width height x_low y_low
width height
specifies the
maximum width and
height of the output area. The dimensions are expected in meters (for restrictions see below).
x_low y_low
specifies the bottom left corner of the
output (optional). The low values are
defaulted to 0 0 when they are not specified. The dimensions are expected in
meters (for restrictions see below).
default:
size of the output area of the output device
This parameter defines the maximum output size (width and height) of a
picture and the position within the output area.
unit
gXconvert
System Description
The specifications are given in meters. If any of the values is larger than
50, all values are interpreted as millimeters. When the environment variable GTS_USE_INCH is set to 1, the dimensions are expected in inch. In this
case the limit of 50 does not apply, i. e. all dimensions are handled as inch
settings.
The maximum output size is specified by the physical size of the output
area. This area can be reduced specifying -size.
The VDC extent is undistortedly mapped onto this area as large as possible
with scale mode abstract. The picture content is additionally linearly scaled
via the scale factor.
To minimize paper waste, some drivers can automatically reduce the
output size to the used device extent. This is done by specifying
-plotsizemode byviewport or -plotsizemode bycliprect in the
driver configuration file, not in the configuration file GXCONV.CON or in the
command line. See the corresponding chapter of the desired driver whether
this parameter is supported. The converter will set the device viewport to
the device extent needed to display the picture.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
42
Example of a file which keeps a picture of size 13 x 18 cm (this could
be a CGM file with SCALEMODE METRIC 10.0 and VDCEXTENT 0 0 13
18) has to be scaled down by a factor of two.
-mode original -scale 0.5
Example of a file with a picture of unknown metric size (this could be
any XWD file or a CGM file with SCALEMODE ABSTRACT) has to be
converted to 20 x 15 cm.
-mode abstract -size 0.2 0.15 0.0 0.0
Then, gXconvert will set the device viewport to a maximum of 20 cm in
x-direction and a maximum of 15 cm in y-direction. The device viewport can be smaller in one direction due to isotropic scaling.
When using a layout file, the device viewport is set to the drawing
frame so that all pictures can be drawn on the output device.
adding stamps
Parameter:
filename [filename] ...
filename
specifies a file containing stamps.
default:
none
A stamp created by this parameter is a text or image to be added to the
converted image. If the file is not found under its specified file name, it is
searched in the following places:
-stampopt
•
•
•
•
•
stamp
$GTS_FONTS/filename
$GRALPLOTLIB/filename
./basefilename
$GTS_FONTS/basefilename
$GRALPLOTLIB/basefilename
A stamp may be positioned inside the converted image (for positioning
additional data inside or outside the image see -labelopt).
See Chapter 3.2, Labels and Stamps File, page 46, for a detailed description of the stamp file format.
Up to 10 stamp file names may be specified.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
43
statistics
3 Using gXconvert
-statistics
statistics about the graphics file
Parameter:
statistics
statistics
no
yes
specifies whether a statistics file is
generated.
No statistics file is generated.
A statistics file is generated for the
graphics file.
default:
no
For every graphics file processed a list will be generated that shows how
often an element was found. It includes, whenever possible, the list of
attributes of the elements. This information is written to a file with the
same base name as the log file and using the extension .STA.
rasterization
buffer
size of rasterization buffer (passed to
raster output driver)
-stripsize
Parameter:
size
specifies the buffer size.
size
default:
512
-stripsize specifies the buffer size in kilobytes used internally during
rasterization. This parameter is only available when converting to a raster
output device and is passed directly to the output driver.
Increasing the buffer size will speed up the rasterization process. A
size of 0 will use the minimum buffer size that can be used.
tile
picture tiling
-tiled
Parameter:
tiled
specifies whether the image is split or
not.
tiled
no
yes
default:
no
Tiling is the process to split the image into (rectangular) non-overlapping
parts. To generate large pictures on a small output device, -tiled yes can
be used. Then, the picture will be partitioned into several tiles, each of the
size of the output device and printed out as separate pages. The sequence
of the tiles is stepping from bottom left to bottom right corner, ending at
top right corner of the picture. For abstract pictures or an abstract scale
mode, the desired total size is specified by -size.
Example of using -tiled when generating a picture of 3.0 by 2.5
meters. An offset of 0.2 by 0.1 meters is used. The number of tiles generated depends on the size of the output device:
-size 3.0 2.5 0.2 0.1 -tiled yes
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
44
type of coordinates to be used
-units
Parameter:
coordinates
units
specifies the coordinates type.
units
integer
real
integer
default:
Usually, this option needs not be set.
It should be used only if advised so by your technical project
manager.
VDC extent
-vdc
VDC extent
Parameter:
VirtDevCoord
VirtDevCoord
FULL
specifies the VDC extent to be used.
The pictures VDC extent is used for
output.
x_min y_min x_max y_max
The part of the picture which lies inside this area is output.
default:
FULL
The minimum and maximum positions (corner points) of an area that is
used as a VDC extent. The possible dimensions are defined by the contents
of the input file.
To see which VDC extent is used by an input file, run gXconvert
once and look at the GXCONV.DSC file.
mode of wide line simulation; this
parameter is passed to output driver
-widelines
Parameter:
widelines
wide line simulation
widelines
specifies the kind of line type and line
width simulation.
simple
default:
This parameter is only available when converting to an output device of
one of the types: HP GL, CalComp, and raster. The parameter is passed
directly to the output driver.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
45
displayed part
3 Using gXconvert
part of the picture to be displayed
-window
Parameter:
window
specifies a part (a window) of a picture
that is output on the output device.
The whole picture is used for display.
window
FULL
x_min y_min x_max y_max
The part of the picture which lies inside this area is displayed.
FULL
default:
Like -vdc, -window specifies a part of a picture that has to be displayed on
the output device. The bottom left and top right corner of the window must
be given in percentages of the pictures VDC extent. If -window and -vdc
have been given, only the latter specified is used. The window values can
even be specified with negative numbers or larger than 100.
Example of displaying a whole picture:
-window 0 0 100 100
or
-window full
Example of displaying the bottom half of the top right quadrant of a
picture:
-window 50 50 100 75
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
3.2
46
Labels and Stamps File
Labels and stamps are texts to be added to the converted image. They may be
used to add remarks (comments, watermarks, additional text) to the output image
without changing the contents of the original (input) image.
additional text
A label may be positioned inside or outside the boundaries of the converted
image, a stamp may only be created inside the output image. A stamp that lies
(partly) outside the boundary of the input image will be clipped to that boundary.
A label will not be clipped.
position
A label or stamp is initiated using the program Parameter:
-labelopt filename or -stampopt filename
The options file given by filename specifies how a label or stamp is drawn. The
file keeps data about the text, the position, size etc.
options file
# in the first column of a line marks a comment line.
The following parameters are available within the options file:
alignment of the stamp or label
-align
Parameter:
alignment
parameters
alignment
alignment
specifies the alignment of the stamp or
label.
TOPLEFT
LEFTTOP
TOPCENTER
CENTERTOP
TOPRIGHT
RIGHTTOP
LEFTCENTER
CENTERRIGHT
CENTER
CENTERCENTER
RIGHTCENTER
CENTERRIGHT
BOTTOMLEFT
LEFTBOTTOM
BOTTOMCENTER
CENTERBOTTOM
BOTTOMRIGHT
RIGHTBOTTOM
BOTTOMLEFT
default:
Specifies the alignment of the label or stamp with regard to its position.
The alignment is the relative position of the text body or graphics body that
is meant to be placed at the referenced position. For text labels or stamps
every line of added text (not the text body as a whole) will be aligned by
the specified option.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
47
3 Using gXconvert
The parameter TOPLEFT and LEFTTOP and all the remaining tuples
are exactly the same.
background
background color index
-backcolind
Parameter:
colind
specifies the color index for the background.
colind
-1
default:
Defines the color index to be used for the background of the label or stamp.
If colind is negative, no background is drawn.
background
background color
-backcolor
Parameter:
backcolor
backcolor
red
green
blue
specifies the background color.
red component (0 ... 255)
green component (0 ... 255)
blue component (0 ... 255)
default:
none
Defines the color to be used for the background of a label or stamp. The
color is given in RGB color components.
If -backcolor has been specified without -backcolind, the color index 0
is used for the background. If neither -backcolor nor -backcolind is
specified, no background is drawn for the label or stamp.
Example of a white background color:
-backcolor 255 255 255
text color
text color
-color
Parameter:
textcolor
textcolor
red
green
blue
0 0 0
specifies the text color.
red component (0 ... 255)
green component (0 ... 255)
blue component (0 ... 255)
default:
Defines the color to be used for the text. The color is given in RGB color
components.
Graphics labels or stamps cannot be colorized this way. The color
given in the graphics file will be used.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
48
output device IDs
-device
Parameter:
device ID
deviceIDs
deviceIDs
specifies a list of device IDs.
default:
none
The lines in the label or stamp options file following a -device line are
only interpreted if the currently selected output device exists in the list of
device IDs.
Example:
-height 3
-font 201
-text "User: #USER"
# Default Text position is on right side
-position rightbottom
-align bottomleft
-offset -2 15
-orientation -1 0 0 1
# Text for A4 is at center left
-device 8010 2000
-position leftcenter
-align topcenter
-orientation -1 0 0 1
-offset 5 0
If output is created for device IDs 8010 or 2000, the position is leftcenter.
For other device IDs, the position is rightbottom.
font
-font
Parameter:
fontid
default:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
font
fontid
specifies the font to be used for the
text.
201 (Sans-Serif mono-spaced)
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
49
format
3 Using gXconvert
labels and stamp for certain formats
-format
Parameter:
format_name
format_names
specifies a list of paper formats
default:
none
The lines in the label or stamp options file following a –format line are
only interpreted if the conversion of the current picture uses one of the
specified formats. –format is interpreted with respect to –pdd and
-device.
The name of the format is case insensitive. –format a4 matches an active
format A4.
The prefixes ISO_ and ANSI_ can be omitted. –format a4 matches an
active format ISO_A4. –format ANSI_A matches an active format A, but
not A4.
Example:
This example shows how to set different text heights for different
printers and formats. The indent of the parameters is only to show where
–format is active
-text “Hello World“
-position topleft
-align topleft
-height 2.5
-format A4
-position bottomright # Valid only for A4
-align bottomright
-device 2000 2002
-position bottomleft
-align bottomleft
-format A4
-height 1.0 # Valid only for device 2000 or 2002 and A4
-format A3
-height 1.3# Valid only for device 2000 or 2002 and A3
-ppd LASERJET LASERJET2
-height 1.5
-format A4
-height 2.0 # Valid only for queue LASERJET or LASERJET2 and A4
-format A3
-height 2.3 # Valid only for queue LASERJET or LASERJET2 and A3
graphics
name of the graphics
-graphics
Parameter:
filename
specifies the name of the graphics file.
filename
default:
none
Specifies a graphics file that is used as label or stamp. If the file is not
found by the specified name, it is searched in the GTS_FONTS directory. The
graphics file must be of type CGM, TIFF, CALS or XWD. Filetypes which
are not supported for graphics labels or stamps will generate an error
message.
and -text can not be used in the same options file. A
previously specified text is overridden by the specified graphics and
vice versa.
-graphics
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
50
If the output device is a b/w raster device, no 24-bit true color raster
can be used within stamp files. Alternatively 8-bit index-color
raster may be used. Using the option -merge 888 off at the
command line is also possibly.
height of label or stamp
-height
Parameter:
height [unit]
specifies the height of the text or
graphic.
specifies the used unit.
height
unit
default:
height
2 mm
For a graphics label or stamp the width of the graphics is calculated by the
specified height and the aspect ratio of the image.
If unit is not specified, the current unit is used.
merging of the label or stamp
-merge
Parameter:
merge
merge
no
yes
default
default:
merging
specifies how the label or stamp is
merged with the image.
Do not merge label color with image
colors.
Merge label color with image color.
Do not change the current merge settings.
default
-merge only works with the raster driver. To be able to use merging,
the merging must have been enabled in the output driver (see
for driver CXXRAS).
-merge
Example of using the feature merging with the CXXRAS driver:
In CXXRAS configuration
-merge 555 off
file:
In stamp or label options file:
-merge yes
-color 160 160 160
-text "Sample"
The image is drawn without merging overlaying colors. Merging is
switched on only for the stamp or label. The text is drawn in light gray.
Dark colors of the image underneath the text will be visible.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
51
offset
3 Using gXconvert
offset of label or stamp
Parameter:
[#LOFFn|#SOFFn]x_off y_off [unit]
#LOFFn, #SOFFn
specifies the label or stamp.
x_off y_off
specifies the position of the label or
stamp.
unit
specifies the unit used for the offset.
default:
0 0 mm
-offset
If unit is not specified, the current unit is used.
If #LOFFn is specified, the offset specified by -labeloffsetn in the
command line is added to x_off y_off. For #SOFFn, the offset given with
-stampoffsetn is added. #LOFFn and #SOFFn can both be used in label
and stamp options files; n may be a number between 1 and 99.
Example of additional offsets:
When having specified
-labeloffset3 10 10 mm
using the offset of
-offset #LOFF3 8 12 mm
will result in the following offset used for the label
18 22 mm
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
-orientation
Parameter:
52
orientation of the stamp or label
x_up y_up x_base y_base [x_nl y_nl][percent]
specifies the orientation of the text or
graphics label or stamp. This defines
the position and direction of the text
used as label or stamp.
x_up y_up specifies the character up vector of the
text box (the direction where the vertical stems of the characters point).
orientation
x_base y_base
specifies the base line vector.
the direction vector to next
line of text. If not specified, x_base
y_base is used.
specifies that the orientation values are
interpreted in respect to the image extent.
x_nl y_nl specifies
percent
default:
0 1 1 0
The vectors specified in this parameter define directions only, not sizes or
dimensions. Therefore, the vector definition of 0 1 points straight upwards
in y-direction (to the "north"). This is the same as setting the vector to 0 3
since both vectors point upward.
Restrictions for graphics labels or stamps:
Graphics labels or stamps can only be drawn horizontally or vertically at 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees. Therefore, the up vector specified by -orientation is mapped to the nearest possible values (xor y-component must be 0). The base vector specified by -orientation is ignored.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
53
3 Using gXconvert
Examples of specifying -orientation:
-orientation 0 1 1 0
Draws the label or stamp text in the normal manner (left-to-right, horizontally): character-up vector points upward (90°), base line vector
points to the right (0°).
-orientation 1 2 1 0
Draws the label or stamp text in slanted / italic text horizontally: character-up vector 63.4° = arctan(2/1).
-orientation 1 2 1 1
This draws a heavily slanted text on a 45° base line (right upward), and
the angle between the character-up vector and the base line vector is just
18.4°!the character-up vector is 63.4°. The base line is 45° = arctan(1/1)
-orientation -2 8 -12 -3
The character-up vector is 104°, the base vector points left down (194°).
This means that the text is backwards non-slanted, resulting in a
mirrored display.
-orientation -1 2 1 1 0 -1
Defines a diagonal slanted text. The continuation line lies straight below
the previous line.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
54
page to be stamped
-page
Parameter:
pagelist
page
pagelist
specifies on which page the label or
stamp is drawn.
even
The stamp or label is drawn on each
even numbered page.
odd
The stamp or label is drawn on each
odd numbered page.
pagelist specifies a comma separated list of
page numbers or ranges of page numbers (see examples below).
default:
1The pages are counted from 1 for each generated output file.
If -page is not specified, the label or stamp is drawn on all pages for
which the label or stamp is not suppressed conditionally (see
-suppress).
Examples of specifiying pagelist at the parameter -page:
-page 1,3
Draw the label or stamp on page 1 and 3.
-page 1,3-5
Draw the label or stamp on page 1, 3, 4 and 5.
-page 1,3-
Draw the label or stamp on page 1, 3 and all following pages.
-page 2-
Draw the label or stamp on page 2 and all following pages.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
55
PPD
3 Using gXconvert
interpreting PPD command
-ppd
Parameter:
ppd_names
ppd_names
specifies a list of PPD names.
default
none
The lines in the label or stamp options file following a -ppd line are only
interpreted if the current queue (see command line parameter -ppd) is
listed in the list of PPD names.
Example:
-height 3
-font 201
-text "User: #USER"
# Default Text position is on right side
-position rightbottom
-align bottomleft
-offset -2 15
-orientation -1 0 0 1
# The chief does not need the user name
-ppd CHIEF
-text " "
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
56
position of the label or stamp
x_pos y_pos [unit]
Parameter:
x_pos y_pos
specifies the position of the label or
stamp.
unit
specifies the unit used for the position
of the label or stamp.
default:
0 0 mm
-position
position
If unit is not specified the current unit is used.
This parameter can also be used in the form of:
-position
Parameter:
position [BYVIEWPORT]
position
specifies the position of the label or
stamp.
TOPLEFT
LEFTTOP
TOPCENTER
CENTERTOP
TOPRIGHT
RIGHTTOP
LEFTCENTER
CENTERRIGHT
CENTER
CENTERCENTER
RIGHTCENTER
CENTERRIGHT
BOTTOMLEFT
LEFTBOTTOM
BOTTOMCENTER
CENTERBOTTOM
BOTTOMRIGHT
RIGHTBOTTOM
BYVIEWPORT
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
specifies if the stamp is placed with regard to the picture viewport instead of
the picture (i. e. with regard to VPP in
a layout file, with regard to size when
-size is used, with regard to drawing
area boundary if -size is not used).
This is only available for stampopt or
STAMPOPT within layout files.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
57
rotation
3 Using gXconvert
rotation of the text or graphics
-rotate
Parameter:
rotate
specifies if the text or graphics is rotated.
no
Text or graphics is not rotated.
bypicture Text or graphics is rotated in the same
way the input file is rotated.
rotate
default:
scaling
bypicture
scaling of the text or graphics
-scale
Parameter:
scale
specifies if the text or graphics is
scaled.
no
Text or graphics is not scaled.
bypicture Text or graphics is scaled in the same
way the input file is scaled.
scale
default:
line width
no
line width of the text
-strokewidth
Parameter:
width [unit]
specifies the line width to be used for
drawing the text of the label or stamp.
specifies the unit used for the line
width.
width
unit
default:
0.0
The unit percent can not be specified. The minimum line width is 0.0.
If -scale bypicture has been given, the line width is also scaled
with the image.
suppress
suppresses a label or stamp
-suppress
Parameter:
ifscale scale_low scale_high
ifscale scale_low scale_high
specifes the scaling range of a graphics
when to suppress the output of the label or stamp.
default:
none
Example of using the parameter -suppress:
The label defined within the label file should only be applied to the
image when the absolute scaling of the output graphics lies outside the
scaling range between 0.95 and 1.05. (In other words: Include the label
or stamp when the scaling becomes smaller than 0.95 or larger than
1.05). This requires a suppress option with these values:
-suppress ifscale 0.95 1.05
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
58
Text of the label or stamp
"Line1" ["Line2"]["Line3"] ...
Parameter:
Linen
specifes the text used for the label or
stamp. Every line parameter that is
surrounded by " will define one line
that is separated by a newline operation from the previous one.
default:
none
When no text is given, the text specified by -label in the command line is
used.
-text
text
Empty lines have to be specified using a blank, i. e. " ".
and -graphics can not be used in the same options file. A
previously specified text is overridden by the specified graphics and
vice versa.
-text
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The text may contain variables that will be replaced by their actual values
during conversion:
#DATE is replaced by the date (dd.mm.yyyy). If the environment variable
GXCDATEFORMAT is set, the value of the environment variable is used as a
formatting string. For the patterns that can be used in the formatting
string see Table 3-1.
#DATEUS is replaced by the date in US format (mm/dd/yyyy). This
format has been changed as of version 3.50 of gXconvert.
#DATEUSYY is replaced by the date in US format using 2-digit year (mm/
dd/yy).
#DATEYY is replaced by date using 2-digit year (dd.mm.yy).
#JOBNAME is replaced by the value given by -jobname in the command
line.
#FILE is replaced by the base name of the input file. The base name is
the file name without any path string, but including the file name's
extension.
#LABEL1 to #LABEL10 is replaced by the value of the command line
parameter -labeln. If the text consists only of a #LABELn, all lines of
#LABELn are used. If additional text is specified, only the first line of
#LABELn is used.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
variables
gXconvert
System Description
59
3 Using gXconvert
Example of using the parameter -label and #LABELn:
Command line:
-label1 "Label1 Line1" "Label1 Line2"
-label2 "Label2 Line 1" "Label 2 Line2"
Labelopt file:
-text #LABEL1
Will print:
Label1 Line1
Label1 Line2
Labelopt file:
-text "#LABEL1 #LABEL2"
Will print:
Label1 Line1 Label2 Line1
•
#PAGE
is replaced by the current graphics number in the current output
file.
•
•
gXnetplot-specific variables
•
•
•
•
•
•
is replaced by the scale factor of the converted graphics. The
scale factor is only valid for metric input files (those containing dimensioning descriptions, i. e. meters, inches, dpi). The scale value is shown
in 8 characters with a dynamic fractional part.The scale factor is always
1.0 when using scale mode abstract.
#TIME is replaced by the current time (hh:mm:ss). If the environment
variable GXCTIMEFORMAT is set, the value of the environment variable is
used as a formatting string. For the patterns that can be used in the
formatting string see Table 3-1.
#SCALE
There are more variables available when using gXconvert in a gXnetplot
environment. See the respective documentation for a description. In short,
these are the keywords that are taken out of the job.sl file:
#ACCOUNT is replaced by the account string of the processed job.
#COPIES is replaced by the number of copies that has been specified
when creating the job.
#HOST is replaced by the name of the output server's host name that has
processed the job.
#JOBID is replaced by the ID of the processed job.
#PLOTTER is replaced by the name of the queue or output device that the
job is directed to.
#USER is replaced by the name of the user that generated the job.
Example of using variables:
Specifying the command line:
gxconvert .... -label1 "Line one" "Line two" ...
and placing the following parameter line into the label options file:
-text "This is #LABEL1"
will result in the following label text:
"This is Line one"
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
60
Ordinary characters placed in the format string are copied to output without
conversion. Conversion specifiers are introduced by a '%' character, and are
replaced in output as follows:
Conversion Specifiers
Meaning
%a
The abbreviated weekday name according to the
current locale.
%A
The full weekday name according to the
current locale.
%b
The abbreviated month name according to the
current locale.
%B
The full month name according to the current
locale.
%c
The preferred date and time representation for
the current locale.
%C
The century number (year/100) as a 2-digit
integer.
%d
The day of the month as a decimal number (range
01to 31).
%D
Equivalent to %m/%d/%y. (Yecch - for Americans only. Americans should note that in other
countries %d/%m/%y is rather common. This
means that in international context this format is
ambiguous and not be used.) (SU)
%e
Like %d, the day of the month as a decimal
number, but a leading zero is replaced by a space.
(SU)
%E
Modifier: use alternative format, see below. (SU)
%F
Equivalent to %Y-%m-%d (the ISO 8601 date
format). (C99)
%G
The ISO 8601 year with century as a decimal
number. The 4-digit year corresponding to the
ISO week number (see %V). This has the same
format and value as %y, except that if the ISO
week number belongs to the previous or next
year, that year is used instead. (TZ)
%g
Like %G, but without century, i.e., with a 2-digit
year (00-99). (TZ)
%h
Equivalent to %b. (SU)
%H
The hour as a decimal number using a 24-hour
clock (range 00 to 23).
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
conversion specifiers
gXconvert
System Description
61
gXconvert
System Description
3 Using gXconvert
Conversion Specifiers
Meaning
%I
The hour as a decimal number using a 12-hour
clock (range 01 to 12).
%j
The day of the year as a decimal number (range
001 to 366).
%k
The hour (24-hour clock) as a decimal number
(range 0 to 23); single digits are preceded by a
blank. (See also %H.) (TZ)
%l
The hour (12-hour clock) as a decimal number
(range 1 to 12); single digits are preceded by a
blank. (See also %I.) (TZ)
%m
The month as a decimal number (range 01 to 12).
%M
The minute as a decimal number (range 00 to
59).
%n
A newline character. (SU)
%O
Modifier: use alternative format, see below. (SU)
%p
Either `AM' or `PM' according to the given
time value, or the corresponding strings for the
current locale. Noon is treated as `pm' and
midnight as `am'.
%P
Like %p but in lowercase: `am' or `pm' or a
corresponding string for the current locale.
(GNU)
%r
The time in a.m. or p.m. notation. In the POSIX
locale this is equivalent to `%I:%M:%S %p'.
(SU)
%R
The time in 24-hour notation (%H:%M). (SU)
For a version including the seconds, see %T
below.
%s
The number of seconds since the Epoch, i.e.,
since 1970-01-01 00:00:00 UTC. (TZ)
%S
The second as a decimal number (range 00 to
61).
%t
A tab character. (SU)
%T
The time in 24-hour notation (%H:%M:%S).
(SU)
%u
The day of the week as a decimal, range 1 to 7,
Monday being 1. See also %w. (SU)
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
62
Conversion Specifiers
Meaning
%U
The week number of the current year as a
decimal number, range 00 to 53, starting with
the first Sunday as the first day of week 01. See
also %V and %W.
%V
The ISO 8601:1988 week number of the current
year as a decimal number, range 01 to 53, where
week 1 is the first week that has at least 4 days
in the current year, and with Monday as the first
day of the week. See also %U and %W. (SU)
%w
The day of the week as a decimal, range 0 to 6,
Sunday being 0. See also %u.
%W
The week number of the current year as a
decimal number, range 00 to 53, starting with
the first Monday as the first day of week 01.
%x
The preferred date representation for the current
locale without the time.
%X
The preferred time representation for the current
locale without the date.
%y
The year as a decimal number without a
century (range 00 to 99).
%Y
The year as a decimal number including the
century.
%z
The time-zone as hour offset from GMT.
Required to emit RFC822-conformant dates
(using "%a, %d %b %Y
%H:%M:%S
%z"). (GNU)
%Z
The time zone or name or abbreviation.
%+
The date and time in date(1) format. (TZ)
%%
A literal `%' character.
Table 3-1:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Conversion Specifiers and Their Meaning
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
63
transparent
3 Using gXconvert
transparent stamp
-transparent
Parameter:transparent
transparent
yes
specifies if a graphics stamp is drawn
transparent.
specifies that the white parts of the
graphics stamp do not overlay the
image, only the black parts are drawn.
no
default:
no
-transparent yes can only be used with b/w raster graphics
stamp files on raster output devices.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
64
measurement unit
-unit
Parameter:
unit
unit
specifies the measurement unit to be
used.
unit
mm
cm
m
meter
inch
percent
default:
mm
label or stamp as watermark
-watermark
Parameter:
watermark
watermark
yes
default:
watermark
specifies if a label or stamp is drawn as
a watermark.
specifies that the label or stamp is
drawn prior to the image.
no
no
If a graphics stamp is used as watermark the input file may not be
rendered correctly.
Examples:
A text is placed outside the graphics at the bottom right corner. The text
is mirrored and will be readable from the backside (e. g. using a transparent material):
-position rightbottom
-align topright
-orientation 1 0 0 1
-text "Label in bottom right corner" "and this is the second line of the label"
The text is placed in the center of the graphics and is written at an angle
of 45°:
-position center
-align center
-orientation 1 1 1 1
-text "Centered Label" "Using Two Lines"
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
65
3 Using gXconvert
3.3
Layout File
At -layout the name of a layout file can be specified. Within a layout file the
position and size of the whole drawing (drawing frame) and the pictures are specified by defining viewports. The syntax of such a layout file is described below.
Example of the structure of a layout file:
LAYOUT
VPF...
VPP...
[ ROT ... ]
[ SCALE ... ]
[ LABEL ... ]
[ BANNER ... ]
[ COLOURMAP ... ]
[ MERGE ... ]
[ EXPORT ... ]
[ ALIGNPIC ... ]
[ STAMPOPT ... ]
[ LABELOPT ... ]
[ WINDOWS .. ]
[ VDC ... ]
[ VPP ... ]
[ ... ]
STOP
start layout definition
definition of the drawing frame
definition of the picture viewport
angle of rotation (optional)
scale factor (optional)
comments text (optional)
comments position (optional)
color mapping (optional)
color merging (optional)
environment variables (optional)
The optional parameters always refer to the previous picture viewport definition (VPP). Comments must start with % in the first
column.
In the following section the parameters of the layout file are described in detail:
VPF
gXconvert
System Description
1. Position and size of the whole drawing (drawing frame; VPF = viewport
frame):
Parameter:
VPF x_off y_off [x_size y_size]
VPF
specifies the position and size of the
drawing
x_off y_off
specifies the offset of the drawing frame to the output device origin. The dimensions are expected in mm (when
the
environment
variable
GTS_USE_INCH is set to 1 the dimensions are expected in inch).
x_size y_size
specifies the size of the drawing frame.
The dimensions are expected in mm
(when the environment variable
GTS_USE_INCH is set to 1 the dimensions are expected in inch).
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
66
2. Position of a viewport (VPP = viewport position):
Parameter:
VPP [input] picture x_pos y_pos x_size y_size
VPP
specifies the position of the viewport.
input
specifies the name of the input file to
be drawn. If this parameter is omitted
then the input filename specified by
the previous VPP definition is used. If
there was no previous VPP definition,
the name given by input is used.
picture
specifies the name of the picture. This
parameter selects the picture of the input file to be converted. VPP$1 selects
the first picture, VPP$2 selects the second picture and so on. For file types
that identify the picture by a name
(e. g. CGM), this picture name can be
used instead of the number.
x_pos y_pos
specifies the position of the viewport
relative to the origin of the drawing
frame. The dimensions are expected in
millimeters (when the environment
variable GTS_USE_INCH is set to 1 the
dimensions are expected in inch).
x_size y_size
specifies the size of the viewport. The
dimensions are expected in millimeters (when the environment variable
GTS_USE_INCH is set to 1 the dimensions are expected in inch).
VPP
3. Rotation of a picture:
Parameter:
ROT angle
rotation
specifies the rotation angle.
ROT
angle
0
90
180
270
1000
1090
1270
2000
2090
2270
default:
0
A value of 1000 means that the picture may be rotated automatically by 90°
to best fit into the viewport. A value graeter or equal 1000 means that the
picture may be rotated by 90° or 270° to best fit into the viewport. See
-rotate for a detailed description.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
67
scaling
3 Using gXconvert
4. Scaling a picture:
Parameter:
SCALE scale
specifies the scale factor.
scale factor
SCALE
scale
default:
1.0
Scale factor 0 means that the picture is automatically scaled to fit the viewport without distortion.
comment
5. Adding comments:
LABEL strings
Parameter:
adds comments.
strings that specify comments to a output file. The comments are printed inside the picture viewport even if the
comments are to be printed outside the
image. In this case, the viewport is reduced by the area of the comments.
The remaining area is used by the
image. See -label for specifying text
comments.
LABEL
strings
comment position
6. Positioning comments:
Parameter:
BANNER pos
positions banners.
position of comments.
Comments placed outside of the image are printed inside of the current
viewport. Thus, the area used for the image is the viewport reduced by the
comments area.
BANNER
pos
color merging
7. Merging colors:
Parameter:
MERGE flag
MERGE
flag
merges colors.
ON
OFF
CXXRAS
gXconvert
System Description
Specifies if the current image is to be merged (MERGE ON) with the current
drawing or overlaid onto it (MERGE OFF). This flag can only be used with
the raster output driver CXXRAS. Moreover, the selected device must have
been enabled for merging, see -merge in Chapter 11, Raster Driver, page
190. If MERGE is not used for a picture, it is added to the drawing with the
default settings of the output driver.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
68
8. Coloration of an image:
Parameter:
COLOURMAP cind flag red green blue
COLOURMAP
colorates an image.
cind
specifies the color index to be modified
flag
0
Use the specified color if the input
image does not set this color index.
1
Always use the specified color for this
color index.
red
specifies the red component of the color (0 ... 255).
green
specifies the green component of the
color (0 ... 255).
blue
specifies the blue component of the color (0 ... 255).
See -colmap for a detailed description.
color
Example of coloration of a bi-level (b/w) image using red and green:
COLOURMAP 0 1 255 0 0
COLOURMAP 1 1 0 255 0
9. Changing environment variables:
Parameter:
EXPORT envname envvalue
EXPORT
changes environment variables.
envname
specifies the name of the environment
variable to be set.
envvalue
specifies the value of the environment
variable.
When generating layout files which are composed from images of different
applications, this can be used to configure the input modules.
environment
Examples with different settings of CalComp pen definitions:
VPP "cad_application_1.cal" VPP$1 0 0 290 210
EXPORT CCALIN_PENS /dir/gxconv/fonts/CALPENS_APPL_1
VPP "cad_application_2.cal" VPP$1 0 0 290 210
EXPORT CCALIN_PENS /dir/gxconv/fonts/CALPENS_APPL_2
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
69
alignment
3 Using gXconvert
10. Picture alignment
Parameter:
ALIGNPIC halign valign [hoffset voffset]
ALIGNPIC
specifies alignment of picture within
the picture viewport.
halign
specifies the horizontal alignment.
LEFT
RIGHT
CENTER
specifies the vertical alignment.
valign
TOP
BOTTOM
CENTER
specifies the additional horizontal offset in mm.
specifies the additional vertical offset
in mm.
hoffset
voffset
default:
ALIGNPIC LEFT BOTTOM 0 0
hoffset and voffset are
not used for CENTER alignment.
Example of aligning the picture in the center of the picture viewport. If
the picture is too large for the viewport, the picture is clipped on both
sides.
ALIGNPIC CENTER CENTER
Example of aligning the picture at bottom left and, additionally, moving
it 10 mm outside the picture viewport.
ALIGNPIC LEFT BOTTOM 10 10
label and stamp
11. Labelling and stamping
Parameter:
LABELOPT filename
LABELOPT
specifies the label options.
filename
specifies the name of the label file.
Parameter:
STAMPOPT filename
STAMPOPT
specifies the stamp options.
filename
specifies the name of the stamp file.
Specifies the files that define the label or stamp options1. To use
multiple label and stamp options, multiple LABELOPT or STAMPOPT statements must be placed in the layout file.
1. Chapter 3.2, Labels and Stamps File, page 46
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
70
12. Displaying part of an image
Parameter:
WINDOW x_min y_min x_max y_max
specifies the size of the image part.
WINDOW
image part
x_min
y_min
x_max
y_max
Parameter:
VDC x_min y_min x_max y_max
VDC
x_min
y_min
x_max
y_max
specifies the size of the image part.
Specifies the part of the image to be displayed. If WINDOW is used, the
values are interpreted as percentage of the pictures VDC extent. If VDC is
used, the values are interpreted as VDC units.
13. Ending the layout definition
Parameter:
STOP
STOP
end of definition
ends the layout definition.
Example of a layout file:
LAYOUT
% Overall layout size (drawing frame)
VPF 0 0 130 140
% Place the CGM-picture 1 on bottom
VPP "pad.cgm" VPP$1 0 0 70 60
SCALE 1
% Insert some additional text from picture 2
VPP "pad.cgm" VPP$2 10 10 50 20
SCALE 1
% Get a logo on top
VPP "gts.xwd" VPP$1 70 60 60 60
SCALE 0
% Sample CalComp drawing
VPP "drawing.cal" VPP$1 0 60 130 40
SCALE 0.5
ROT 90
% Sample HP-GL drawing
VPP "picture.hp" VPP$1 0 100 130 40
SCALE 0.5
STOP
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
71
3 Using gXconvert
3.4
PDF Profile
PDF/A 1b
The hybrid PDF driver (driver CXXPSCRI, model pdf) and the PDF raster driver
(driver CXXRAS, model pdf) can be configured to create PDF files with various
characteristics. In the current version, a PDF profile for creating files compatible
to PDF/A 1b is delivered with gXconvert.
pdfprofile.cfg
The PDF profiles are configured in pdfprofile.cfg that is searched for in the
following locations:
1. Current working directory
2. $GTS_FONTS (standard)
3. $GRALPLOTLIB
configuration
The file contains several sections to specify the different characteristics. The
following settings are available within the sections:
color space
ColorSpaceType
sets the color space
colorspacetype
specifies the color space type to
Parameter:
be used
Device
DeviceGray/DeviceRGB without color
profile
DeviceWithOutputIntent DeviceGrey/DeviceRGB with OutputIntent
Default: Device
When specifying DeviceWithOutputIntent, the OutputIntentDictionary and OutputIntentDestOutputProfile must be specified, too.
Example:
ColorSpaceType=DeviceWithOutputIntent
output intent
OutputIntentDictionary
creates an output intent according to
PDF Reference 1.4, section 9.10.4;
only used if ColorSpacetype is set to
DeviceWithOutputIntent
Parameter:
values
specifies the components to be
set in the output intent dictionary; specifying /Type, /OutputIntent
and
/
DestOutputProfile is not necessary because these are added
automatically.
Default: none
Example:
OutputIntentDictionary=/S /GTS_PDFA1\n\
/OutputCondition (CGATS TR 001 (SWOP))\n\
/OutputConditionIdentifier (CGATS TR 001)\n\
/RegistryName (http://www.color.org)\n
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
72
OutputIntentDestOutputProfile
embeds a color profile file as a stream
into the PDF file; only used if ColorSpaceType is set to DeviceWithOut-
color profile
putIntent
Parameter:
profile
specifies the name of a color
profile file to be embedded
Default: none
An output profile must be specified if the OutputConditionIdentifier
in the output intent dictionary is not default. The color profile file is
searched for in
1. Current working directory
2. $GTS_FONTS
3. $GRALPLOTLIB
Example:
OutputIntentDestOutputProfile=CGATS TR 001.icm
CompatibilityLevel
Parameter:
level
sets the PDF version of the PDF file
specifies the PDF version to be
set: 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 ...
PDF version
Default: driver-dependent
Example:
CompatibilityLevel=1.4
If UserUnits are enabled, the PDF version may be set to at least
1.6 if necessary.
The conformance level tells to which standard the file is conform. This
information is contained in the XMP metadata with the pdfaid:conformance,
pdfaid:part and pdfaid:amd entries:
conformance
sets the pdfaid:conformance in the
XMP metadata
specifies the value of the entry
part
sets the pdfaid:part in the XMP
metadata
specifies the value of the entry
PdfaIdConformance
Parameter:
Default: none
PdfaIdConformance
Parameter:
Default: none
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
conformance level
gXconvert
System Description
73
3 Using gXconvert
PdfaIdAmd
Parameter:
Default: none
amd
sets the pdfaid:amd in the XMP
metadata
specifies the value of the entry
Example of PDF/A 1b conformance:
PdfaIdPart=1
PdfaIdConformance=B
font
embeds fonts in the PDF file
EmbedFonts
Parameter:
embed
fonts are embedded
fonts are not embedded
yes
no
Default: No
The hybrid PDF-driver (driver CXXPSCRI, model pdf) can embed fonts. It
embeds preset font files which are specified by –fontname in the driver
configuration file CXXPSCRI.
Example:
EmbedFonts=Yes
transparency
specifies whether elements using
transparency or special blend modes
are allowed in the PDF file
AllowTransparency
Parameter:
transparency
transparency is allowed
transparency is not allowed
yes
no
Default: Yes
PDF/A does not allow the use of transparency or special blend modes:
Example:
AllowTransparency=No
Some HP-GL/2 files may require the use of special blend modes to
represent the drawing in PDF correctly. With AllowTransparency=No usage of these blend modes is prohibited and the PDF file
may appear different to the HP-GL/2 drawing.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
74
specifies whether UserUnit is used in
the PDF file
UseUserUnit
Parameter:
UserUnit
use
never
always
ondemand
never use UserUnit; due to the limitation in Adobe Reader the file is not
viewable if the extent is larger than
200 inches
always use UserUnit. Because UserUnit is only valid as of PDF 1.6, this
will automatically set the PDF version
of the created file to at least 1.6.
Use UserUnit only for those pages
where the MediaBox would exceed the
implementation limit of 14400 units in
Adobe Reader. If at least one page of
the created file uses UserUnit, the
PDF version is set to at least 1.6. If no
page exceeds the implementation limit, the PDF version is not changed.
Default: never
Adobe Reader has an implementation limit that certain elements (MediaBox) are not allow having values larger than 14400. With this limitation
it is not possible to view PDF files in Adobe Reader up to version 6 that
have an extent larger than about 5 meters (14400 dpi/72 units, 200 inch).
With PDF 1.6 (Adobe Reader 7), the UserUnit element has been introduced. If PDF files representing more than 5 meters are to be viewed by
Adobe Reader with the correct extent, UserUnit must be set.
Example:
UseUserUnit=ondemand
The value for UserUnit is calculated for each page separately. A
value less than 1.0 is never used. This allows to show the extent of
a page in Adobe Reader 6 with the correct values if it does not
exceed 200 inches. Pages larger than 200 inches will be shown with
a wrong extent in Adobe Reader 6.
PDF files using UserUnit can be viewed in Adobe Reader prior to
version 7 (if no other implementation limit applies). Only properties
regarding sizes (extent) are shown wrong for pages that exceed 200
inches.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
75
3 Using gXconvert
Example of the PDF/A 1b profile:
[PDFA1B]
CompatibilityLevel = 1.4
UseUserUnit = Never
ColorSpaceType = DeviceWithOutputIntent
OutputIntentDictionary=/S /GTS_PDFA1\n\
/OutputCondition (SRGB)\n\
/OutputConditionIdentifier (SRGB)\n\
/RegistryName (http://www.color.org)\n
OutputIntentDestOutputProfile=srgb.icc
PdfaIdPart = 1
PdfaIdConformance = B
EmbedFonts = Yes
AllowTransparency = No
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
3.5
76
Output Device Parameters
Some parameters often used for device configuration can be specified in the
command line or in configuration files like GXCONV.CON to gXconvert. Usually,
these parameters are only used in the configuration files of the output driver (for
example, CXXRAS in the fonts directory).
For changing some properties of an output device, change the configuration file
or add a new device ID providing the new properties.
change output
device properties
To make it easier, the following parameters along with their arguments will be
passed to the output driver:
-dithermode
-merge
-stripsize
-resolution
-penselectmode
-capstyle
-joinstyle
-widelines
-gamma
Not every output driver supports all of these parameters. Also some
drivers will recognize a parameter, but it may have no effect.
Refer to Chapter 6, Output Device Configuration, page 113, and the following
ones whether a parameter is supported for a certain output driver.
Example of converting a color picture for an HP PaintJet using different
dithering techniques:
gxconvert -input color.tif -device 8030 -dithermode 2 8
gxconvert -input color.tif -device 8030 -dithermode 1
Example of converting a color CalComp HCBS file using Floyd-Steinberg dithering with merging enabled:
gxconvert -input merged.cal -device 8140
-dithermode 1 -merge 555
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
77
3 Using gXconvert
3.6
GXCLOGDIR
gXconvert
System Description
Windows STDOUT and STDERR
The Windows version of gXconvert redirects STDOUT (standard output) to the
file stdout.gxc and STDERR (standard error) to the file stderr.gxc. Both
files are created in the working directory.
The environment variable GXCLOGDIR can be set to a directory where these files
are to be placed. If GXCLOGDIR is set to NUL, STDOUT and STDERR will not be
redirected.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
3.7
78
Statistics File GXCONV.DSC
Statistical data is generated for further processing. This data is stored in a file
named GXCONV.DSC.
GXCONV.DSC
The following data are generated:
• name of the output file
• status of processing (OK or error)
• size of the graphics
The dimensions are given in millimeters and the size in square meter. When the
environment variable GTS_USE_INCH is set to 1, the dimensions are given in inch
and the size is given in square foot.
Example of a statistic file GXCONV.DSC:
Metafile name
: gxcgm.txt
Picture index
: 1
Picture name
:
Output device/file
: 8010 gxcgm.pcl
Pictures VDC extent : (0.000000,0.000000) to
(170.000000,140.000000)
Used device extent
: (0.000000,0.000000) to
(246.610000,203.130000) [mm]
Used scalemode
: ABSTRACT
Used scalefactor
: 1.450661
Rotation
: 0
Interpretation date : Fri Sep 19 10:50:22 1997
Protocol of plotfiles and pictures generated by GXCONV
Plotfile name
: gxcgm.pcl
Picture index
: 1
Printed area
: (0.000000,0.000000) to
(246.610000,203.130000) [mm]
Total area
: 0.050095 [m**2]
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
79
3 Using gXconvert
3.8
GXCONV.INF
Information File GXCONV.INF
The command line parameter -info is used to generate an information file. The
name of the information file is GXCONV.INF.
GXCONV.INF contains the following information:
• Global file information:
Filename: Name of the file
Filetype: HPGL, CALCOMP, etc.
Encoding: Binary, Text, etc.
Filesize: size of the file in KBytes, currently not used
Application: application name, currently not used
Number of Pictures: number of pictures
• Picture information:
Picture index (starting with 0)
VDC-Corner: bottom left and top right corner in pixels
VDC-Extent: extent in pixels
Picture size: picture extent in mm, if resolution is known
Picture resolution: resolution in dpi
Bits per pixel: not used
• Color information
Number of colors: number of colors that are defined
Number of colors used: number of used colors (2 means bi-level)
Color value extent: color range for red, green, blue
Color table
•
•
gXconvert
System Description
Type of graphics: Vector or raster
Information for raster images
Compression: used compression method
Colortype: bi-level, gray, color
Pixeltype: indexed or direct
Orientation: origin and scan line direction
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
3.8.1
80
Formal Grammar of GXCONV.INF
Syntax Element
<symbol>
nonterminal
<SYMBOL>
terminal
<symbol>*
0 or more occurrences
<symbol>+
1 or more occurrences
<symbol>o
optional (0 or 1 occurrences)
<symbol1>|<symbol2>
symbol1
or alternatively symbol2
<symbol1>::=<symbol2>
symbol1
has the syntax of symbol2
<LF>
line termination
<INT>
signed integer value
<UINT>
unsigned integer value
<FLOAT>
float value
<UNDEF_INT>
undefined integer value (9999)
<UNDEF_FLOAT>
undefined float value (9999.0)
<UNDEF_STRING>
undefined string value <UNKNOWN>
Table 3-2:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Formal Grammar of GXCONV.INF: Syntax Elements
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
81
3 Using gXconvert
Detailed Grammar
info
::=
<global_file_info> <picture_info>*
global_file_info
picture_info
::=
::=
Information of Input File : <LF>
Filename : <filename> : <LF>
Filetype : <filetype> <LF>
Encoding : <encoding> <LF>
Filesize : <filesize> <LF>
Application : <application> <LF>
Number of Pictures: <number_of_pictures>
<LF>
Information for picture <picture_index> <LF>
Picturename : <picture_name> <LF>
VDC-Corner : (<vdcxmin>,<vdcymin>) (<vdcxmax>,<vdcymax>)
<LF>
VDC-Extent : [<vdcdx>,<vdcdy>] <LF>
Picture size : [<dx>,<dy>] <LF>
Picture resolution : <resolution_x> <resolution_y> <LF>
Bits per Pixel : <bits_per_pixel>
Number of Colors : <number_of_colors> <LF>
Number of Colors used : <number_of_colors_used> <LF>
Color value extent: <color_extent> <LF>
Colortable :<number_of_colors> <LF> <color_entry>*
Graphictype : <graphic_type> <LF> <raster_information>o
raster_information
::=
Compression : <compression> <LF>
Colortype : <color_type> <LF>
Pixeltype : <pixel_type> <LF>
Orientation : <orientation> <LF>
filetype
::=
CGM | HPGL | HPGL/2 | CALCOMP_906 | CALCOMP_HCBS | STDPLD | TAPE_9
| TIFF | XWD | CALS | PSCRIPT | VersatecRandomFormat | IntergraphRasterFormat | PBM-Plus | EPSON | GKSM | ANVIL |
<UNDEF_STRING>
encoding
::=
BINARY | CHAR | TEXT
application
::=
color_extent
compression
| <UNDEF_STRING>
<APPLICATION_NAME> | <UNDEF_STRING>
::=
[<rmin>,<rmax>],[<gmin>,<gmax>],[<bmin>,<bmax>]
::=
NOCOMPRESSION | RLE | G2 | G3 | G4 | LZW | JPEG
color_type
::=
BILEVEL | GRAY | COLOUR
pixel_type
::=
INDEXED | DIRECT | <UNDEF_STRING>
picture_index
::=
| <UNDEF_STRING>
UINT
Table 3-3:
gXconvert
System Description
| <UNDEF_STRING>
Formal Grammar of GXCONV.INF: Detailed Grammar
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
3 Using gXconvert
3.8.2
82
Examples of Information Files
Example of an information file for vector type (HPGL):
Information of Input File :
Filename : file.hpg
Filetype : HPGL
Encoding : UNKNOWN
Filesize : -9999
Application : UNKNOWN
Number of Pictures : 1
Information for picture 1
Picturename : UNKNOWN
VDC-Corner : (40.000000,200.000000)
(15840.000000,11700.000000)
VDC-Extent : [15800.000000,11500.000000]
Picture size : [395.000000,287.500000]
Picture resolution : 1016.000000,1016.000000
Bits per Pixel : -9999
Number of Colours : 8
Number of Colours used : 8
Colour value extent : [0,1023],[0,1023],[0,1023]
Colourtable : 8
0 : 1023 1023 1023
1 : 0 0 0
2 : 1023 0 0
3 : 0 1023 0
4 : 1023 1023 0
5 : 0 0 1023
6 : 1023 0 1023
7 : 0 1023 1023
Graphictype : VECTOR
Example of an information file for raster type (TIFF):
Raster Type (TIFF)
Information of Input File :
Filename : file.tif
Filetype : TIFF
Encoding : BINARY
Filesize : -9999
Application : UNKNOWN
Number of Pictures : 1
Information for picture 1
Picturename : UNKNOWN
VDC-Corner : (0.000000,0.000000) (393.000000,393.000000)
VDC-Extent : [393.000000,393.000000]
Picture size : [99.821999,99.821999]
Picture resolution : 100.000000,100.000000
Bits per Pixel : 1
Number of Colours : 2
Number of Colours used : 2
Colour value extent : [0,65534],[0,65534],[0,65534]
Colourtable : 2
0 : 0 0 0
1 : 65535 65535 65535
Graphictype : RASTER
Compression : G4
Colourtype : BILEVEL
Pixeltype : INDEXED
Orientation : 1
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
83
3 Using gXconvert
3.9
Fonts
For some output devices text has to be simulated as lines or polygons. Therefore
gXconvert comes with a collection of software fonts. The files that define the
fonts are specified by the environment variables $GTS_FONTS and $SEALFONTS.
The font files at $GTS_FONTS are archived with the installation of gXconvert. The
font files defined by $SEALFONTS are available up to gXconvert 4.0.1. Which
fonts are used is controlled by the availability of the new SEALFONTS, the environment variable FORCE_GTS_FONTS and the font index in use:
SEALFONTS
available
$FORCE_GTS_FONTS
Font index
no
Used font
GTS_FONTS
yes
0
negative
SEALFONTS
yes
0
positive
SEALFONTS
yes
1
(default)
negative
SEALFONTS
yes
1
(default)
positive
GTS_FONTS
For example, if both types of fonts are available and FORCE_GTS_FONTS is not set
or set to 1, the new fonts can be used for labeling by using a negative font index
while other text (e.g. from HP-GL input) is still using the old GTS_FONTS.
The default value of 1 for the environment variable FORCE_GTS_FONTS may
change in future when the new fonts have been established.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
4 Profiling
84
4
Profiling
4.1
Environment
gXconvert allows to specify an environment file. In this file information can be
set that are evaluated during the interpretation of metafiles, e. g.:
•
•
•
environment file
mapping of pens in HP-GL files to specific output device pens that are characterized by colors and width. An example of how to do this is given in the
environment file HPGL.ENV1 that is delivered with gXconvert;
specification of an additional character expansion factor, by which every
character expansion factor encountered in interpreted metafiles is multiplied. An example of how to do this is given in the environment file
HPGL.ENV1 that is delivered with gXconvert;
replacement of defaults of interpreted graphics files.
This environment file is interpreted before other graphics files are interpreted.
Usually, this file is a clear text CGM file, but it may also be character or binary
encoded.
The default name for the environment file is CGM.ENV or HPGL.ENV1 or
CALCOMP.ENV2 etc., depending on the file type which can be specified in the
command line.
default name
If any of the default environment files does not exist when accessed, gXconvert
tries to use an environment file called GXCONV.ENV. If this environment file does
not exist either, no environment is used at all.
default file
The default environment files are searched in the current directory. Different
locations (and filenames) have to be specified by the -env program parameter.
This environment file is specified by the -env program parameter.
interpretation environment
-env
calling
Parameter:
environmentfile
environmentfile
specifies
the file containing the envi-
ronment.
default:
GXCONV.ENV
Example:
gxconvert -input cadplot.hgl -env LWIDTH.ENV
1. Chapter 4.1.4, HP-GL Environment File, page 89
2. Chapter 4.1.3, CalComp Environment File, page 88
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
85
examples
gXconvert
System Description
4 Profiling
The standard installation of gXconvert contains some examples of environment
files:
• Line width environment file LWIDTH.ENV
• Color environment file COLOURS.ENV
• CalComp environment file CALCOMP.ENV
• HP-GL environment file HPGL.ENV
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
4 Profiling
4.1.1
%
%
%
%
%
86
Line Width Environment File
+----------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Example how to map pens used in HPGL files to line widths|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------+
LWIDTH.ENV
%
%
%
%
%
BEGMF 'LWIDTH.ENV';
MFVERSION 1; MFDESC 'Jan. 20th,1988';
MFELEMLIST 'LINE LINETYPE LINEWIDTH LINECOLR MARKER MARKERTYPE
MARKERSIZE MARKERCOLR POLYGON INTSTYLE FILLCOLR PATINDEX
HATCHINDEX CHARHEIGHT
CHARSPACE TEXTALIGN TEXTCOLR CHAREXPAN CHARORI TEXTPATH';
VDCTYPE REAL;
BEGPIC 'pen definitions';
SCALEMODE METRIC 1.0;
LINEWIDTHMODE ABS;
BEGPICBODY;
ASF LINEWIDTH BUNDLED LINECOLR BUNDLED TEXTCOLR BUNDLED
FILLCOLR BUNDLED;
TEXTPREC STROKE;
TEXTFONTINDEX -201;
CHAREXPAN 0.8462;
%
%
%
%
%
+----------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Mapping of pens used in HPGL files to line widths
|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------+
%
%
%
%
%
% keyword (fixed)
pen-number linetype linewidth (mm) color%
% -------------------------------------------------------------%
LINEREP
1
1
0.25
1 ;
LINEREP
2
1
0.35
1 ;
LINEREP
3
1
0.50
1 ;
. . .
LINEREP
14
1
0.30
1 ;
LINEREP
15
1
0.30
1 ;
LINEREP
16
1
0.30
1 ;
% ------------------------------------------------------------ %
% keyword
pen-number font precision expansion spacing color%
% (fixed)
%
% -------------------------------------------------------------%
TEXTREP
1
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
2
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
3
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
. . .
TEXTREP
14
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
15
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
16
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
% -------------------------------------------------------------%
% keyword
pen-number interiorhatchpatterncolor %
% (fixed)
style
index
index
%
% -------------------------------------------------------------%
FILLREP
1
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
FILLREP
2
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
FILLREP
3
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
. . .
FILLREP
14
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
FILLREP
15
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
FILLREP
16
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
ENDPIC;
ENDMF;
To modify a pen width which a pen represents change the corresponding LINEREP instruction.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
87
COLOURS.ENV
4 Profiling
4.1.2
%
%
%
%
%
Color Environment File
+-----------------------------------------------------------+%
|
|%
| Example how to map pens used in HPGL files to device pens |%
|
|%
+-----------------------------------------------------------+%
BEGMF 'COLOURS.ENV';
MFVERSION 1; MFDESC 'Jan. 20th,1988';
MFELEMLIST 'LINE LINETYPE LINEWIDTH LINECOLR MARKER MARKERTYPE
MARKERSIZE MARKERCOLR POLYGON INTSTYLE FILLCOLR PATINDEX
HATCHINDEX CHARHEIGHTCHARSPACE TEXTALIGN TEXTCOLR
CHAREXPAN CHARORI TEXTPATH';
VDCTYPE REAL;
BEGPIC 'pen definitions';
SCALEMODE METRIC 1.0;
LINEWIDTHMODE ABS;
BEGPICBODY;
ASF LINECOLR BUNDLED TEXTCOLR BUNDLED FILLCOLR BUNDLED;
TEXTPREC STROKE;
TEXTFONTINDEX -201;
CHAREXPAN 0.8462;
%
%
%
%
%
+----------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Mapping of pens used in HPGL files to output device pens
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------+
%
%
%
%
| %
% ------------------------------------------------------------ %
% keyword (fixed) pen-number linetype linewidth (mm) color %
% ------------------------------------------------------------ %
LINEREP
1
1
0.01
1 ;
LINEREP
2
1
0.01
2 ;
LINEREP
3
1
0.01
3 ;
. . .
LINEREP
14
1
0.01
6 ;
LINEREP
15
1
0.01
7 ;
LINEREP
16
1
0.01
8 ;
% ------------------------------------------------------------ %
%keyword pen-number font precision expansion spacing color%
% (fixed)
%
% -------------------------------------------------------------%
TEXTREP
1
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
2
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
2 ;
TEXTREP
3
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
3 ;
. . .
TEXTREP
14
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
6 ;
TEXTREP
15
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
7 ;
TEXTREP
16
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
8 ;
%
%
%
%
------------------------------------------------------------%
keyword
pen-number
interiorhatchpattrncolor %
(fixed)
style
index
index
%
------------------------------------------------------------%
FILLREP
1
HOLLOW
1
1
1
;
FILLREP
2
HOLLOW
1
1
2
;
FILLREP
3
HOLLOW
1
1
3
;
. . .
FILLREP
14
HOLLOW
1
1
6
;
FILLREP
15
HOLLOW
1
1
7
;
FILLREP
16
HOLLOW
1
1
8
;
ENDPIC;
ENDMF;
To modify the color index which a pen represents change the color
entry of LINEREP, TEXTREP, and FILLREP.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
4 Profiling
4.1.3
%
%
%
%
%
88
CalComp Environment File
CALCOMP.ENV
+----------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Example how to map pens used in HPGL files to line widths|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------+
%
%
%
%
%
BEGMF 'CALCOMP.ENV';
MFVERSION 1; MFDESC 'Jan. 20th,1988';
MFELEMLIST 'LINE LINETYPE LINEWIDTH LINECOLR MARKER MARKERTYPE
MARKERSIZE MARKERCOLR POLYGON INTSTYLE FILLCOLR PATINDEX
HATCHINDEX CHARHEIGHT CHARSPACE TEXTALIGN TEXTCOLR
CHAREXPAN CHARORI TEXTPATH';
VDCTYPE REAL;
BEGPIC 'pen definitions';
SCALEMODE METRIC 1.0;
LINEWIDTHMODE ABS;
BEGPICBODY;
ASF LINEWIDTH BUNDLED LINECOLR BUNDLED TEXTCOLR BUNDLED
FILLCOLR BUNDLED;
TEXTPREC STROKE;
TEXTFONTINDEX -201;
CHAREXPAN 0.8462;
%
%
%
%
%
+----------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Mapping of pens used in HPGL files to line widths
|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------+
%
%
%
%
%
% keyword (fixed)
pen-number linetype linewidth (mm) color%
% -------------------------------------------------------------%
LINEREP
1
1
0.25
1 ;
LINEREP
2
1
0.35
1 ;
LINEREP
3
1
0.50
1 ;
. . .
LINEREP
7
1
2.00
1 ;
LINEREP
8
1
2.80
1 ;
% ------------------------------------------------------------ %
%keyword pen-number font precision expansion spacing color%
% (fixed)
%
% -------------------------------------------------------------%
TEXTREP
1
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
2
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
3
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
. . .
TEXTREP
7
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
8
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
%
%
%
%
--------------------------------------------------------------%
keyword
pen-number interiorhatchpattrncolor
%
(fixed)
style
index
index
%
-------------------------------------------------------------%
FILLREP
1
HOLLOW
1
1
1
;
FILLREP
2
HOLLOW
1
1
1
;
FILLREP
3
HOLLOW
1
1
1
;
. . .
FILLREP
7
HOLLOW
1
1
1
;
FILLREP
8
HOLLOW
1
1
1
;
ENDPIC;
ENDMF;
For an enhanced method to specify pen settings for CalComp files see Chapter
13.4, User-Defined Pens and Patterns, page 283.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
89
HPGL.ENV
4 Profiling
4.1.4
%
%
%
%
%
HP-GL Environment File
+----------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Example how to map pens used in HPGL files to line widths|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------+
%
%
%
%
%
BEGMF 'HPGL.ENV';
MFVERSION 1; MFDESC 'Jan. 20th,1988';
MFELEMLIST 'LINE LINETYPE LINEWIDTH LINECOLR MARKER MARKERTYPE MARKERSIZE
MARKERCOLR POLYGON INTSTYLE FILLCOLR PATINDEX HATCHINDEX
CHARHEIGHT CHARSPACE TEXTALIGN TEXTCOLR
CHAREXPAN CHARORI TEXTPATH';
VDCTYPE REAL;
BEGPIC 'pen definitions';
SCALEMODE METRIC 1.0;
LINEWIDTHMODE ABS;
BEGPICBODY;
ASF LINEWIDTH BUNDLED LINECOLR BUNDLED TEXTCOLR BUNDLED
FILLCOLR BUNDLED;
TEXTPREC STROKE;
TEXTFONTINDEX -201;
CHAREXPAN 0.8462;
%
%
%
%
%
+----------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Mapping of pens used in HPGL files to line widths
|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------+
%
%
%
%
%
%keyword (fixed)
pen-number linetype linewidth (mm) color %
% -------------------------------------------------------------%
LINEREP
1
1
0.25
1 ;
LINEREP
2
1
0.35
1 ;
LINEREP
3
1
0.50
1 ;
. . .
LINEREP
7
1
2.00
1 ;
LINEREP
8
1
2.80
1 ;
% ------------------------------------------------------------ %
%keyword pen-number font precision expansion spacing color%
% (fixed)
%
% -------------------------------------------------------------%
TEXTREP
1
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
2
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
3
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
. . .
TEXTREP
7
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
TEXTREP
8
1
STROKE
1.0
0.0
1 ;
%
%
%
%
-------------------------------------------------------------%
keyword
pen-number
interiorhatchpatterncolor%
(fixed)
style
index
index
%
-------------------------------------------------------------%
FILLREP
1
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
FILLREP
2
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
FILLREP
3
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
. . .
FILLREP
7
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
FILLREP
8
HOLLOW
1
1
1 ;
ENDPIC;
ENDMF;
For an enhanced method to specify pen settings for HP-GL files see Chapter
13.4, User-Defined Pens and Patterns, page 283.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
4 Profiling
4.2
90
Mapping Attributes (Profiling)
gXconvert allows to remap graphics attributes using a method called profiling.
Profiling means that attributes of the input file can be mapped onto other values
- regardless of the values that are set in that file.
remapping attributes
By default, gXconvert accesses the file GXCONV.PRO for profiling. Use the
parameter -profile filename to overwrite this.
To be able to use profiling you have to know the settings of the attributes:
• the attributes that are used in the input file.
To get this information, run gXconvert first with the parameter
-statistics yes. The file GXCONV.STA contains a list of all CGM
elements used. For the attributes there is also a listing of all values used.
• the attributes that are available for interpretation. These are listed in Chapter
14, Codes and Command Lists, page 304.
• You will still not know at which places marker 7, for instance, is used, but
this can be found out by trial and error using different mappings.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
settings of attributes
gXconvert
System Description
91
4 Profiling
4.2.1
Profile File
4.2.1.1 Entry in the Profile File
The profile file is specified as follows:
calling
profile file for mapping attributes
-profile
Parameter:
filename
specifies the name of the profile file.
filename
default:
file format
GXCONV.PRO
The format of an entry in the profile file is:
#cgmelementid code
value
#end
with
cgmelementid
code
value
specifies the number of the CGM element1 for which a mapping of values is to take place. Since only attributes
can be mapped, cgmelementid must
be between 641 and 670.
specifies how the values of the input
file are mapped.
0
all integer attribute values of this CGM
element are mapped onto the same integer value for output
1
several specified integer attribute values of this CGM element are mapped
onto other integer values
2
all real attribute values of this CGM
element are mapped onto the same real
value for output
3
several specified real attribute values
of this CGM element are mapped onto
other real values
4
several ranges of integer attribute values of this CGM element are mapped
onto an integer value
5
several ranges of real attribute values
of this CGM element are mapped onto
a real value
specifies the value of the mapping.
code = 0 A single line with one integer number:
All attribute values are mapped onto
this value.
code = 1 Several lines with two integer numbers
per line: The first integer specifies the
value of the input file which is
mapped. The second integer specifies
the value to map onto.
1. Chapter 14.1, CGM Elements, page 304
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
4 Profiling
92
A single line with one real number: All
attribute values are mapped onto this
value.
code = 3 Several lines with two real numbers
per line: The first real specifies the value of the input file which is mapped.
The second real specifies the value to
map onto.
code = 4 Several lines with three integer numbers per line: The first two integers
specify the range of values of the input
file which is mapped. The third integer
specifies the value to map onto.
code = 5 Several lines with three real numbers
per line: The first two real values specify the range of values of the input file
which is mapped. The third real specifies the value onto to map onto.
code = 2
For integer attributes, only code 0, 1, 4 can be used. For real
attributes only codes 2, 3, 5 can be used.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
93
4 Profiling
Example of how to choose the right code for mapping of attributes:
% Ranges of text font index (code 650) are:
% mapped by the range method.
% Indices 1000,...,1009 on input are mapped
% to 201 on output.
#650 4
1000 1009 201
1010 1019 202
1020 1029 203
#end
% Line width (code 643) is restricted to
% maximum 3.0 by using
% the range method of mapping.
#643 5
3.0 99999.0 3.0
#end
Example:
% (A per cent sign in the first column
% initiates a comment line.)
%
% 651 is the code for text precision, code 0
% means that all values are to be mapped onto
% the same value which stands in the next line, here 2.
% This results in always using text precision 2
% regardless of what is entered in the file.
#651 0
2
#end
%
% Fill colour (code 663) is mapped here according to the
% individual method. If code = 1 pairs of values follow,
% first the value entered in the file, then the value to
% be used for output. All colour indices for fill areas
% (except for the background colour) are set to
% foreground color in this example.
#663 1
0 0
1 1
2 1
3 1
4 1
5 1
6 1
7 1
#end
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
4 Profiling
94
Table 4-1 lists all attributes that can be mapped:
ID
Name
Type
Reasonable Values
641
LINE BUNDLE INDEX
integer
1, 2,
642
LINE TYPE
integer
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
643
LINE WIDTH
real
any value >= 0.0
644
LINE COLOUR
integer
0, 1,...(color
645
MARKER BUNDLE INDEX
integer
1, 2,
646
MARKER TYPE
integer
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
647
MARKER SIZE
real
any value >= 0.0
648
MARKER COLOUR
integer
0, 1,
... (color mode indexed only)
649
TEXT BUNDLE INDEX
integer
1, 2,
... 64
650
TEXT FONT INDEX
integer
stroke precision; string precision
651
TEXT PRECISION
integer
0, 1, 2,
652
CHARACTER EXPANSION
FACTOR
real
any value > 0.0
653
CHARACTER SPACING
real
any value
654
TEXT COLOUR
integer
0, 1,
655
CHARACTER HEIGHT
real
any value > 0.0
657
TEXT PATH
integer
0, 1, 2, 3,(right,
659
CHARACTER SET INDEX
integer
0, 1,
...
660
ALTERNATIVE CHARACTER
SET INDEX
integer
0, 1,
...
661
FILL BUNDLE INDEX
integer
1, 2,
... 64
662
INTERIOR STYLE
integer
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
... 64
mode indexed only)
... 64
(string, character, stroke)
... (color mode indexed only)
left, up, down)
(hollow, solid, pattern, hatch,
empty, bitmap)
663
FILL COLOUR
integer
0, 1,...(color
664
HATCH INDEX
integer
-8,
665
PATTERN INDEX
integer
1,
...
666
EDGE INDEX
integer
1,
...
667
EDGE TYPE
integer
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
668
EDGE WIDTH
real
any value >= 0.0
669
EDGE COLOUR
integer
0, 1,
670
EDGE VISIBILITY
integer
0, 1
Table 4-1:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
mode indexed only)
..., -1, 1, ... 6
... (color mode indexed only)
(off, on)
Attributes to be Mapped
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
95
4 Profiling
4.2.2
color table
Color Mapping
Sometimes it is useful to specify a color table which is used for the output file
instead of the values specified in the input file.
Profiling can not be used because it is not available for colors, only
for color indices.
The color table contained in an environment file will be overwritten by the color
table of the input file. For this reason the parameter -colmap has been introduced.
For how to specify a color mapping see description of -colmap on Page 19.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
4 Profiling
4.2.3
96
Font Mapping
On interpreting CGM files, the FONTLIST given in the CGM file is used to select
fonts. A FONTINDEX specified within the CGM file is treated as an index into this
font list. This named font can be mapped to a device-dependent font index. The
information which device-dependent font index to use for a certain font name is
passed to gXconvert by file.
font mapping
The file is searched by environment variable FONTS_dev where dev is replaced
by the device type in use. That is FONTS_2000 for device type 2000.
If the environment variable FONTS_dev is not set, a file with this name is
searched in the current directory. If this file is not available, a file named
FONTMAP is searched in the fonts directory. This file is shipped with gXconvert
and keeps the font mapping for some usual font names.
Each line of the file must contain the device-dependent font index and the font
name that has to use this index. Font names containing blanks must be enclosed
in double quotes.
If a named font is not found in the file or no file is present, FONTINDEX is used
for output.
The comparison of the names in the FONTLIST and the font mapping
file is case insensitive, e. g. LucidaSans and LUCIDASANS match
each other.
The format of a font mapping file is:
file format
Example of font mapping for device 2000:
CGM_File:
FONTLIST "LucidaSans"
"LucidaSans-Bold"
"LucidaSans-Typewriter"
"LucidaSans-TypewriterBold";
FONTS_2000:
35 "Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique"
36 "LucidaSans"
37 "LucidaSans-Bold"
38 "LucidaSans-Typewriter"
39 "LucidaSans-TypewriterBold"
Texts using CGM, FONTINDEX 2 (LucidaSans-Bold) will use font index
37 to display the text. Depending on the text precision, the text display
is performed by the device using the device's capabilities (text precision
string) or by simulation using the gXconvert fonts (text precision
stroke).
Font mapping is done prior to profiling.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
97
4 Profiling
4.2.4
line width mapping
Line Width Mapping
Sometimes it is necessary to define how line width is to be interpreted. The environment variable GXCLWSCALE is used to make the settings.
The variable can be in the range of
0.0 <= GXCLWSCALE <= 1.0
The value 0.0 means that the line width of the input files are not scaled, where
as a setting to 1.0 scales the line width of the input files with the scale factor of
the image. A value between 0.0 and 1.0 is a combination of the effect at 0.0 and
1.0.
The default setting of GXCLWSCALE is 1.0.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
5 Input Format Configuration
5
98
Input Format Configuration
For certain input formats, a special configuration is possible, sometimes necessary.
input format
In the following chapters these configurations are described in detail.
At the end some environment variables that are independent from the input
format are listed.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
99
5 Input Format Configuration
5.1
PostScript and
PDF
PostScript and PDF Input
PostScript and PDF are supported as an input format. Both formats are handled
using the same input driver. Therefore, all subsequent remarks regarding PostScript are also valid for PDF.
There are some PostScript-specific settings which are described in
this section.
5.1.1
environment
variables
PostScript Interpretation Environment
Interpretation of the PostScript and PDF input files is realized using a PostScript
input filter. The environment for this filter program is defined using several environment variables:
GS_LIB
Path to the runtime environment (fonts etc.) of the PostScript filter program
GS_PROGRAM
Path or name of the PostScript filter program
To configure the PostScript interpretation, additional environment variables are
available1.
The communication between the PostScript input program and gXconvert uses
pipes in order to save disk space and disk access time.
This may cause problems on some systems when gXconvert works
on mounted disks. In this case, turn off the pipe communication and
use file interconnection by setting the environment variable
PSIPIPE to 0.
5.1.2
positioning
Position
Within PostScript files, all coordinates are relative to the paper corner. Thus,
there is an offset for the pictures. The output will be done relative to the bottom
left corner of the display area. The configuration of the paper offset is defined by
using environment variables.
1. Chapter 5.1.4, PostScript and PDF Environment Variables, page 100
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
5 Input Format Configuration
5.1.3
100
Paper Offset
The PostScript interpreter of gXconvert uses two environment variables to
specify a paper offset:
• PSIOFFX and
• PSIOFFY.
paper offset
If the paper offset is not defined, the PostScript picture will be displayed starting
at the bottom left corner of the display area.
This means that the bottom left corner of the picture is mapped to
the bottom left corner of the display area.
If the paper offset is defined, and the minimum offset of all pictures within a
PostScript file is less than the paper offset, the PostScript pictures will be
displayed starting at the bottom left corner of the display area. Otherwise, they
will be displayed skipping the paper offset.
Example:
For correct output of a PostScript file on a HP DeskJet 500c we recommend specifying the following offsets:
• DeskJet500c with color cartridge:
PSIOFFX = 0.1181; PSIOFFY = 0.5906
•
DeskJet500c with monochrome cartridge:
PSIOFFY = 0.1181; PSIOFFY = 0.4331
5.1.4
PostScript and PDF Environment Variables
The following listing includes all supported environment variables for PostScript
and PDF input format.
GS_LIB
Path to the PostScript environment (like fonts)
default: none
When using our installation environment and the environment files gxconv.(c)sh, this path is set to $GTSHOME/
gs/lib:$GTSHOME/gs/fonts:$GTSHOME/gs/Resource
GS_PROGRAM
Path to the PostScript program
default: gs
When using our installation environment and the environment files gxconv.(c)sh, this path is set to $GTS_FONTS/
gs
PSICHKRES
Resolution for the first parse which checks the size of the
PostScript picture. The value is specified in dpi.
default: 10
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
101
5 Input Format Configuration
PSICHKSIZE
Maximum size of the input file for both x- and y-dimension. The value is specified in inch.
default: 47.0 (approx. A0 size)
Note: If you know the size of the input file and set the
PSICHKSIZE value, the performance will be improved!
PSICHKSIZX
PSICHKSIZY
Maximum size of the input file for either x- and y-dimension. The value is specified in inch.
default: PSICHKSIZE
PSICLIP
Possible values are 0 and 1.
0: PostScript input will not move the image frame outside
the drawing area.
1:
The image can be moved out of the drawing area. This
solves the problem that PostScript files with a frame can
not be properly positioned when using PSIOFFX and
PSIOFFY.
default: 0
PSIDITHER
Possible values are 0 and 1.
1:
Use dithering and work with indexed colors
0:
Don´t use dithering and work with direct color RGB if
possible
default: 1
PSIPDFDOCSIZE
Possible values are 0 and 1.
0: The extent of the PDF file
is detected automatically by
checking the used area.
1:
The extent specified by the PDF file is used.
default: 0
PSIPSDOCSIZE
Possible values are 0 and 1.
0:
The extent of the PostScript file is detected automatically by checking the used area or the Bounding Box.
1:
The extent specified by PostScript commands (e. g.
PageSize) is used.
default: 0
Note: Using PSIPSDOCSIZE on PostScript files that do not
keep a PageSize command may create an output image
with the default page size of ISO A4.
PSIDMODE
Possible values are 1 (Floyd-Steinberg dithering), 2, 3, 4
(ordered dithering).
Specifies the method used for dithering.
default: 1
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
5 Input Format Configuration
PSIFORMAT
102
Possible values are PSICOL, PSIGRAY and PSIBIT.
PSICOL:
PostScript is interpreted using color input.
PSIGRAY:
PostScript is interpreted using shades of gray
input.
PSIBIT:
PostScript is interpreted using monochrome
input.
default: PSIBIT
PSIGAMMA
Possible values are real values.
< PSIGAMMA <= 10.0: A gamma correction on the
colors of the PostScript input file is performed.
0.0
<= PSIGAMMA < 0.0: Black color removal is
performed.
-1.0
This gamma correction of the PostScript input is
performed in addition to a gamma correction possibly
given by -gamma (Raster output only). See -gamma in
Chapter 11.2, Configuring the CXXRAS Driver, page 194.
PSIMAXCOL
Possible values are integer values.
Maximum number of colors to be used for dithering (only
for PSIFORMAT = PSICOL).
default: 256
PSIOFFX
PSIOFFY
Paper offset of output device defining the offset from the
bottom left corner of the device. The values are specified
in inch.
default: none
PSIPIPE
Possible values are 1 and 0.
0:
Data communication via files
1:
Data communication via pipes
default: 1 (UNIX) 0 (Windows)
PSIRESOLUTION
Resolution for interpreting PostScript.
default: resolution of the selected output device
PSIRESTART
Possible values are 0 and 1.
1:
Starts PostScript for each picture.
default: 0
PSITHRESHOLD
Dithering threshold (range: 0 ... 255)
default: 10
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
103
5 Input Format Configuration
PSIUSEBOX
Possible values are YES and NO.
YES:
Uses bounding box to skip first pass
NO:
Ignores explicit bounding box and does first pass to
set the extent.
default: YES
PSIUSEQUIT
Possible values are 0 and 1.
0:
Does not append quit.
1:
Appends quit past last input file.
default: 0
TEMP
Directory for temporary files used by PostScript input
default: none
Note: A trailing / and a valid path setting is required!
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
5 Input Format Configuration
5.2
104
HP-GL Environment Variables
The following listing includes all supported environment variables for the
HP-GL input format:
CHPIN_BORDER_WIDTH
The right, top, left and bottom margins that are
added to the VDC extent when using HP-GL input.
The values are specified in mm.
Example:
CHPIN_BORDER_WIDTH=1 1 90 50
will generate a margin of 90 mm on the left and a
margin of 50 mm on the bottom of the output file.
default: 1 1 1 1
CHPIN_COLEPS
Specifies a tolerance to reduce the number of recognized colors.
Allowed range: 0.0,...,0.5.
The default value of 0.0078125 is equivalent to use
only the high order 7 bits of an 8 bit color value. For
using the full 8 bit range set the variable to a value
of 0.003.
CHPIN_DEBUG
Possible values are 0 and 1.
1:
Prints messages for undefined / bad PCL characters.
default: 0
CHPIN_HPGL_CLIP
Sets clip rectangle in RTL mode to the output size.
Possible values are 0 and 1.
0:
Does not limit clip rectangle in RTL mode to
output size. This is the setting used before version
3.66.
1:
Limits clip rectangle in RTL mode to the output
size
default: 1
CHPIN_HPSTEPS
Resolution which is used when calculating the coordinates of the HP-GL data. Senseful values: 1016 or
1200
default: 1016
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
105
5 Input Format Configuration
CHPIN_NP
Assume the HP-GL file has an instruction NP np,
possible values are the integer values np.
If the HP-GL file does not have this instruction, the
HP-GL input will perform a modulo 8 operation on
the pen numbers (like an output device will do).
CHPIN_NP must be used for HP-GL files with pen
numbers above 8 and if these pens must have
specific settings. Usually, CHPIN_NP is set to 256.
If the HP-GL file has this NP np instruction, the
setting of CHPIN_NP is ignored.
default: 8
CHPIN_PCL_PRINT
Possible values are 0, 1, TRUE and FALSE.
1 or TRUE: PCL characters are interpreted and drawn.
default: 1
CHPIN_OLD_TEXT
Possible values are 0 and 1.
or FALSE: Uses enhanced support for 8 bit character sets (as of gXconvert, version 3.58).
0
1
or TRUE: Uses the old behavior.
default: 0
CHPIN_SKIP_ESCCMNT
Possible values are 0, 1, TRUE and FALSE.
1 or TRUE: Skips the escape comment sequence
<ESC>`...`. These escape sequences may contain
valid HP-GL commands which will be interpreted
otherwise.
default: 0
CHPIN_PENS
Path and file name for user-defined pens and
patterns for HP-GL input (see Chapter 13.4,
User-Defined Pens and Patterns, page 283, and the
-penopt command line parameter).
default: none
CHPIN_PM_RESTORE
Possible values are 0, 1, TRUE and FALSE.
or FALSE: Avoids additional lines which are
connected to fill areas and which you do not want to
appear. This is a special handling of the pen position
after a fill area.
0
1 or TRUE: the pen position is restored to the position
on start of the fill area. If it does not help and you are
using
the
raster
driver,
try
using
GTSFILL = 111101.
This is a setting for the fill algorithm used in CXXRAS.
default: 1
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
5 Input Format Configuration
PEN_COLORS
106
Possible values are integer values.
Limits number of colors to ncols. This is used to
reduce the number of different colors created by
HP-GL input.
default: 2048
CHPIN_CA_DEFAULT
Specifies the default chord angle in degrees for
simulation arcs.
Allowed range: 0.05,...,180
default: 5
CHPIN_RESPECT_PS
Possible values are TRUE and FALSE.
TRUE:
The size of the clipping rectangle is determined by the smallest area that surrounds all
graphics object and is inside a possibly set
PS-command.
FALSE:
The size of the clipping rectangle is determined by the smallest area that surrounds all
graphics object. This may exceed a possibly set
PS-command.
default: FALSE
CHPIN_RTL_POS
Possible values are 0 and 1.
0:
The old version of positioning raster elements
within the HP-GL/2 drawing is used.
default: 1
CHPIN_USE_RP
Possible values are 0, 1, TRUE and FALSE.
0 or FALSE: The number of copies specified by
RP (RePlot) command is not written into
GXCONV.INF file, entry Bits per Pixel.
the
the
default: 1
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
107
5 Input Format Configuration
CHPIN_VDC_EXTENT
Sets the left, bottom, right and top VDC extent to the
given values at HP-GL input. The values are specified in mm.
The VDC extent is the area of the input file that is
used to cut-off the rectangle used for generating the
output. By default (when there is no
CHPIN_VDC_EXTENT variable specified), the whole
input area is used for the output. To get an image
with HP-GL coordinates starting at (0,0), set
CHPIN_VDC_EXTENT to 0 0.
When using the VDC extent values, make sure to use
the appropriate ones. To find out the default VDC
extend of an input file, convert it without
CHPIN_VDC_EXTENT set. This writes the VDC extent
of the input to the file GXCONF.INF and GXCONV.DSC.
Use those values to specify the desired extent. It is
quite common for HP-GL files to specify the default
VDC extend in the range from -16000 to 16000 in
both x- and y-dimensions.
default: none
GXCRHW
Possible values are real numbers.
This environment variable is only used in some rare
cases by the HP-GL input. It specifies the drawing of
lines for hatches, defined with user-defined line
types.
It will overwrite the command -capstyle round if
the line width of the lines is less than the specified
value (in millimeters).
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
5 Input Format Configuration
5.3
108
Versatec Environment Variables
The following listing includes all supported environment variables for the
Versatec input format.
CVDSIN_BORDER_WIDTH
Specifies the right, top, left and bottom margins
which are added to the VDC extent when using
Versatec input. The values are specified in mm.
Example:
CVDSIN_BORDER_WIDTH = 1 1 80 40
will generate a margin of 80 mm on the left and
a margin of 40 mm on the bottom of the output
file.
default: 1 1 1 1
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
109
5 Input Format Configuration
5.4
CalComp Environment Variables
The following listing includes all supported environment variables for the
CalComp input format.
CCALIN_BORDER_WIDTH
Specifies the right, top, left and bottom margins
which are added to the VDC extent when using
CalComp input. The values are specified in mm.
Example:
CCALIN_BORDER_WIDTH = 1 1 30 60
will generate a margin of 30 mm on the left and a
margin of 60 mm on the bottom of the output file.
default: 1 1 1 1
CCALIN_IGNORE_RO
Usually gxconvert evaluates the rotations that a
CalComp files uses. Depending on the application
that created the CalComp file, by using this enviroment variable it might be possible to create
"usually" oriented output files without additonal
rotation on the command line.
If set to 1, rotations that are used in a CalComp file
are ignored.
default: 0
CCALIN_NO_PATTERN
Possible values are 0 and 1.
1: The Fillstyle Pattern will be replaced by
Fillstyle Solid. This results in not using any
user-defined fill patterns or standard CalComp fill
patterns. The colors of the filled areas will be
approximated by the population of the pixels in the
pattern. Setting CCALIN_NO_PATTERN may give
visual enhancements during conversion from
CalComp to HP-GL/2, because the patterns will not
be simulated by Filetype Hatch.
default: 0
CCALIN_PENS
Path and file name for user-defined pens and
patterns for CalComp input (see Chapter 13.4,
User-Defined Pens and Patterns, page 283, and the
-penopt command line parameter)
CCALIN_RESOLUTION
Resolution of the output device for which the
CalComp file has been originally generated. This
is required to calculate the correct width of the
hardware pens. Usual values are 200 or 400. The
value is specified in dpi.
default: 400
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
5 Input Format Configuration
CCALIN_STEP_SIZE
110
Step size used for the output device for which the
CalComp file has been originally generated. The
value is specified in dpi.
A CalComp output device uses a virtual resolution
which can be set from the control panel. When
generating a CalComp file, it is usually created for
step size currently defined for the output device.
But the information about this step size is not
contained within the file. The picture size - in mode
original - depends on the step size of the Calcomp
input file and is influenced by CCALIN_STEP_SIZE.
To get the correct size, set CCALIN_STEP_SIZE to
the value used when creating the CalComp file.
Useful resolutions are 100, 200, 508, 1016 or 2032.
If the extent of the output file is smaller than
expected,
decrease
the
value
of
CCALIN_STEP_SIZE.
default: 2032
CCALIN_VDC_EXTENT
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Sets the left, bottom, right and top VDC extent to
the given values at CalComp input. For an explanation of the VDC extent see CHPIN_VDC_EXTENT in
Chapter 5.2, HP-GL Environment Variables, page
104.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
111
5 Input Format Configuration
5.5
Raster Environment Variables
The following listing includes all supported environment variables for the raster
input format.
CG08ROP
Possible values are 0 and 1.
1:
Uses enhanced raster operations.
Only necessary when using hyprid HP-GL/2 input
file.
For increasing the quality of the drawing it is
recommended
to
use
the
parameter
-merge 888 off as well.
default: 1
CG08WINTEMP
Possible values are 0 and 1.
1:
Tells Windows to handle the temporary files
created by the gXconvert as temporary files, i. e.
the files are opened differently to other files and
the data is not written to the disk. This might
enhance performance.
default: 0
GTSTIFFLONG
Possible values are 0 and 1.
1: Overrides type short in image width and
length in TIFF input files, read as long instead.
default: 0
GTS_CRIMAXBUFF
Size of the raster buffer in bytes.
default: 8388608
GRAL_CRI_JPEGDEFRES
Possible values are integer values used as resolution.
Sets the default for the resolution if the JPEG
input file has no information about it. The value is
specified in dpi.
GTSTIFFRESUNIT
Possible values are resunit, 2 and 3.
If a TIFF file uses a tag resolution unit specifying a value different to 2 (inch) or 3 (centimeter), the value resunit is assumed.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
5 Input Format Configuration
5.6
112
Environment Variables Independent From the
Input Format
The following listing includes all supported environment variables that are independent from the input format.
CGIBWSCALETYPE
Possible values are 0 and 1.
0:
use default scaling
1: When multiple pixels are combined, use black if any of
the combined pixels is black.
Additional type of scaling of b/w raster data. This can be
used to enhance quality when scaling down bitmap raster
data generated from PostScript/PDF, HP-GL/2 or any
other Raster input.
default: 0
CGISCALETYPE
Possible values are 0 and 1.
0:
use default scaling
1:
When multiple pixels are combined, use the darkest
color of the pixels involved. Only supported for 8 bit/24
bit raster data.
Additional type of scaling of color raster data. This can be
used to enhance quality when scaling down raster data
generated from PostScript/PDF, HP-GL/2 or any other
Raster input.
default: 0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
113
6 Output Device Configuration
6
output configuration
Output Device Configuration
The output is configured by assigning physical devices and properties to devices
and their subdevices. These assignments are read from a configuration file
searched via an environment variable. The name of the environment variable is
the name of the driver module.
Example:
The name of the configuration file of the PostScript driver of gXconvert
is called CXXPSCRI.
6.1
Specifying the Configuration File
At first, a file is searched whose name is the value of the environment variable.
If not present, a file whose name is the driver module is searched in the current
directory i. e. the directory in which gXconvert was called. At last, the fonts
directory specified by the GTS_FONTS environment variable, is searched for this
file.
Example how the configuration file of the PostScript driver CXXPSCRI is
searched:
1.: $CXXPSCRI
2.: ./CXXPSCRI
3.: $GTS_FONTS/CXXPSCRI
If the configuration file is not present, a message is printed out and
no output will be produced.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
6 Output Device Configuration
6.2
114
Assigning Devices and Properties
Due to the concept of output devices, 10 device IDs starting with a multiple of
10 belong to the same physical device.
For example, the device ID 2000 to 2009 may belong to a special PostScript
device.
Properties are assigned to a subdevice in several steps:
1. Assign a physical device to a sequence of subdevices.
Example:
-device 2000 qms postscript qms site
The device ID specified is the first ID of the sequence and must be a
multiple of 10. The subdevices, 2000 ... 2009, then will use the same physical device.
2. Assign properties which are common to the subdevices that will be used.
Example:
-rgb 0 1.0 1.0 1.0
-rgb 1 0.0 0.0 0.0
Up to now there are no properties assigned to the different subdevices. They
are stored as a default setup which must be explicitly assigned to a subdevice.
3. Assign default setup to a subdevice
Example:
-subdevice 2000
This sequence copies the default setup to the specified subdevice. Now
properties belonging to the subdevice may be changed.
4. Assign properties to a subdevice
Changing properties now applies only to the selected subdevice and will not
affect the default setup.
Example:
-size 297 210
The default setup may be assigned to other subdevices:
-subdevice 2001
-size 210 297
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
115
6 Output Device Configuration
It is not possible to switch between alternate subdevices. Once the
assignment of properties to a subdevice is finished by selecting
another subdevice, the previous one cannot be changed. Unused
subdevices are not available.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
7
116
PostScript and PDF Driver
The CXXPSCRI driver supports PostScript, EPS, and PDF output. It evaluates the
environment variable CXXPSCRI in order to search its configuration file. The
name of the configuration file is CXXPSCRI. The device IDs can be in the range
of 2000 to 2999.
7.1
CXXPSCRI
Calling the CXXPSCRI Driver
physical output device
-device
Parameter:
deviceID manufacturer language model site
deviceID
2000
2010
physical output
device
must be multiple of 10.
used sequence
...
2990
manufacturer
language
model
site
name of the manufacturer of the output
device
language supported for the output device
model of output device:
pdf|postscript
string to check site dependencies
default:
none
Assignments of properties will affect only the default setup until a subdevice is selected.
Example:
-device 2000 manuf postscript model site
The device ID can only be used once.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
117
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
7.2
Configuring the CXXPSCRI Driver
parameters
The remaining parameters for configuring the CXXPSCRI driver are given in
alphabetical order.
output file
-appendoutput
appending output file
Parameter:
appendoutput
appendoutput
no
yes
The driver deletes an already existing
output file and starts writing at the beginning
The driver will append all output to an
existing output file. If no output file
exists, a new file is created.
default:
no
When converting graphics files to PostScript, specify -overwrite yes in
the command line along with -appendoutput yes in CXXPSCRI.
-appendoutput yes
gXconvert
System Description
is not allowed for PDF output.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
118
cap style, i. e. the style of line ends
-capstyle
Parameter:
cap style
capstyle
specifies the style, see Figure 7-1.
capstyle
butt
The line is squared off at the endpoints
projecting
The line continues half a line width behind its endpoints and is squared off.
The line has round ends
round
triangular
The line ends in triangles
default:
Figure 7-1:
butt
Cap and Join Styles
Example:
-capstyle butt
fixing the cap style; only available for
model pdf.
-capstylefix
fixed cap style
Parameter:
capstylefix
capstylefix
yes
no
default:
specifies if cap style is fixed or allowed to be dynamic.
The cap style specified by -capstyle
is used.
The cap style is set dynamically according to cap style used in the input file.
yes
Example:
-capstylefix yes
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
119
colorimage
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
usage of the colorimage operator
-colorimage
Parameter:
colorimage
colorimage
specifies if the colorimage operator is
used.
yes
no
default:
yes
Indicates if the output device is capable of handling the PostScript operator
colorimage. If the device can handle this operator, colored raster images
are written to the output file using it. Otherwise the operator imagemask is
used.
is available on all PostScript printers, but the output
files may become very large.
Imagemask
color mapping
or -colourmap
color mapping
Parameter:
filename [color_model color_value_extent]
[-gamma gamma_value ][-tolerance number_bit]
[r g b rm gm bm] | [c m y cm mm ym] |
[c m y k cm mm ym km]
filename
specifies the file that keeps the information of how the color mapping is
performed.
color_model
specifies the color model which is used
in the color mapping file.
RGB
RGB color model
CMY
CMY color model
CMYK
CMYK color model
color_value_extent
specifies the color value extent which
is used in the color mapping file.
1
defines the maximum color value
used. Usually values of 100, 255 or
1023 are used. The minimum color value is always 0.
...
-colormap
65535
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
120
specifies a value for overall brightening or darkening of the graphics. Values larger than 1.0 will brighten the
image, values less than 1.0 will darken the graphics. When specifying
-gamma, no individual mapping of colors is performed.
-gamma gamma_value
0.1
...
10.0
-tolerance number_bit
r g b rm gm bm
c m y cm mm ym
c m y k cm mm ym km
default:
specifies the tolerance for individual
mapping of colors. number_bit specifies how many low order bits are stripped (set to 0) from the input image.
After stripping, the pixel value is set to
the nearest color defined in the color
table (the "new" value). This reduces
the amount of colors in the image.
If color_model RGB has been selected,
it defines a color mapping for the RGB
color r g b to the new color rm gm bm.
If color_model CMY has been selected,
it defines a color mapping for the
CMY color c m y to the new color cm
mm ym.
If color_model CMYK has been selected, it defines a color mapping for the
CMYK color c m y k to the new color
cm mm ym km.
none
Example of mapping all 255 image gray scales to 8 gray levels as result:
RGB 255
-tolerance 5
0
0
0
31 31 31
63 63 63
95 95 95
127 127 127
159 159 159
191 191 191
223 223 223
255 255 255
0
31
63
95
127
159
191
223
255
0
31
63
95
127
159
191
223
255
0
31
63
95
127
159
191
223
255
This table defines all possible shades of gray in a 3x8 bit color range. All
gray levels of (0, 0, 0) up to (15, 15, 15) will be mapped to (0, 0, 0); all
grays from (16, 16, 16) up to (47, 47, 47) will be mapped to (31, 31, 31);
and so on.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
121
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
Example of color mapping using gamma correction:
RGB 100
-gamma 0.7
color precision
-colorprecision
or -colourprecision
color precision
Parameter:
precision_bits
precision_bits
Number
of bits to use per red, green,
blue part of a color.
1
...
15
default:
10
Sets the precision to represent colors internally.
Example:
-colorprecision 10
color representation
representation of color
-colrep
Parameter:
colrep
specifies the color representation.
col
displays colors as colors.
grey
display colors as shades of gray.
fillgrey display lines in black and white, display fill area as shades of gray.
colrep
default:
col
Example:
-colrep col
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
122
image compression
-compressimage
compression
Parameter:
compressimage
compressimage
no
yes
specifies if the images are written
compressed to the output file.
writes images uncompressed to the
output file.
writes images compressed to the output file.
no
default:
Images (generated by cell-arrays) may occupy a large amount of space
within an output file. When using -compressimage yes, the image is
written in a compressed form to the output file in order to save disk space.
The reduction factor depends on the contents of the image. Uncompressing
the image will be done by the PostScript interpreter using a PostScript
procedure. Therefore, the time used to print the image will increase.
Example:
-compressimage yes
filling of the background; only available for model pdf.
-fillbackground
Parameter:
fillflag
background
fillflag
specifies how the background is filled
never
never fill background
always
always fill background
ondemand fill background if necessary
default:
ondemand
To have a correctly filled background is only necessary in some cases
when complex HP-GL/2, HP-RTL-files are converted to PDF 1.4 or later.
The HP files can contain commands that are responsible for merging
colors. This may require that the background is filled with white to show
the correct merging of colors in PDF using blend modes. But filling the
background with white may not allow to add watermarks to the PDF-file
when it is further processed. Watermarks would be overprinted by the
white background.
When using –fillbackground ondemand the background is only filled
with white for those pages that use a PDF blend mode other than blend
mode normal.
When creating PDF 1.3, -fillbackground has no effect because
blend modes have been introduced with PDF 1.4.
Example:
–fillbackground never
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
123
font
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
font name
-fontname
Parameter:
index name factor type softindex fontfile
associates a font index with a name.
index
1
...
maxfont
specifies the name of the font to be
used in the PostScript/PDF file.
additional scale factor to be applied to
the character height to work around
differences between software and
hardware fonts.
font type to be used in a PDF file;
should be TrueType.
font index for a software font that is similar to the hardware font; should be
201 for a monospaced font and 1 for a
proportional spaced font. This is required for calculating text extents.
font file name to be used when embedding the font; only used by model pdf.
name
factor
type
softindex
fontfile
default:
none
Usually fonts are simulated by vectors or fill areas during conversion. If
the output file should keep the text as it is, the PostScript and PDF driver
can use the capabilities of the output format to include the text. The font to
be used for the text is specified by –fontname. fontfile is only used by
model pdf when embedding fonts. Embedding of fonts must be enabled
through a PDF profile. See –pdfprofile on Page 130. For the Courier,
Helvetica and Times-Roman fonts various files (fontname.pdo) are available in the fonts directory.
Example:
-fontname 2 "Courier-Bold" 1.2 TrueType 201 "courier_b.pdo"
unit
units of measurement
-inches
Parameter:
default:
none
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as inches.
Example:
-inches
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
124
initialization files
-initfiles
initialization file
Parameter:
start_file start_image end_file
start_file
specifies the file whose
start_image
end_file
content is inserted once at the beginning of the output file.
specifies the file whose content is inserted at the beginning of each page.
specifies the file whose content is inserted at the end of the output file.
default:
- - These files must be line oriented with a maximum line length of 512 characters. The files are searched by their given names first. If the file is not
available, it is searched in the fonts directory. Files specified as - are not
inserted.
A pattern of #PS within any of these files is replaced by the values of the
top right corner of the page bounding box (e. g. the page size).
The special character notations listed in Table 7-1 will be replaced:
Notation
Replacement
\b
blank (0x20)
\r
carriage return (0x0D)
\xyz
octal character 0xyz (0<=x<=3, 0<=y, z<=7). Octal characters
have to be specified with three digits. \000 is not allowed.
\n
newline (0x0A)
\t
tab (0x09)
Table 7-1:
Replacement of Special Characters
Example to insert a PostScript Level 2 pagesize command to each page
(note: start_file and end_file are omitted):
-initfiles - pagesize.ps -
Contents of pagesize.ps:
mark {
<</PageSize [#PS] /ImagingBBox null>> setpagedevice
} stopped cleartomark
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
125
initialize device
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
initialization commands for the output
device
-initstring
Parameter:
string
specifies the initialization commands.
string
default:
none
If the string contains blanks, it has to be enclosed by double quotes. The
length of the string is limited to 511 characters (79 characters in versions
prior to 3.63).
The special character notations listed in table Table 7-2 will be replaced:
Notation
Replacement
\b
blank (0x20)
\r
carriage return (0x0D)
\xyz
octal character 0xyz (0<=x<=3, 0<=y, z<=7). Octal characters
have to be specified with three digits. \000 is not allowed.
\n
newline (0x0A)
\t
tab (0x09)
Table 7-2:
Replacement of Special Characters
Example:
-initstring "%!PS-Adobe-3.0"
-resetstring "%%EOF"
join
style of joins
-joinstyle
Parameter:
joinstyle
joinstyle
miter
round
bevel
default:
specifies the style how lines are joined
(see Figure 7-1, page 118).
The outer edges will continue until
they meet.
Round joins.
Segments ends with butt ends. A resulting notch is filled with a triangle.
miter
Example:
-joinstyle miter
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
126
line thickening
-lineenhance
Parameter:
addwidth
additional line width value
addwidth
default:
line thickness
0
The value is interpreted in units of the device resolution. If
-resolution 300 dpi has been specified, -lineenhance 2 will increase
all lines by 2/300 inch (about 0.17 mm). addwith can also be negative. If
the resulting line width would be less than 0.0, a line width of 0.0 is used.
The use of 0.0 as line width is not recommended with PostScript.
The representation of such a line is device-dependant.
line patterns
-linepattern
line pattern
Parameter:
linepattern
linepattern
specifies the behavior of line patterns
on wide lines.
fixed
Line patterns are fixed for all line
widths.
scalegap The gaps of dashed lines are proportional to the line width.
default:
fixed
To prevent wide dashed lines from becoming solid when using
-capstyle round
or
-capstyle projecting,
specify
-linepattern scalegap.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
127
maximum coordinates to use
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
maximum coordinate values to use
-maxcoordinate
Parameter:
coordinate
coordinate
default:
Specifies the maximum coordinate value to use.
740000
This is the maximm coordinate value that the PostScript/PDF-driver will use
internally for the configured size. The default value of 740000 is large enough
for 62 meters at 300 dpi. If the configured size and resolution would require a
larger value, the driver will reduce the resolution to be able to use the maximum
coordinate that is configured. In that case positioning of drawing elements and
steps for line widths would not be as smooth as with the original high resolution.
-maxcoordinate allows to configure this value up to 268435455.
This should only be used by an experienced user and only the
maximum required value should be used. If the value is choosen too
large and depending on the input format that has to be converted,
unpredictable output can occur.
Example to calculate a maxcoordinate value:
Size required: 80 m
Resolution used in PDF-driver: 300 dpi
Maxcoordinate value must be larger than 80 * 1000 / 25.4 * 300 =
944882
message
message string
-message
Parameter:
string
specifies the string that is printed to
STDOUT.
string
default:
none
Example:
-message "using standard CXXPSCRI"
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
128
or -millimetres
units of measurement
Parameter:
none
default:
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as millimeters.
-millimeters
unit
Example:
-millimeters
output format
-outputformat
output format
Parameter:
outputformat
outputformat
long
short
eps
pdf
default:
specifies the type of output format:
long PostScript commands
abbreviations
EPS
PDF; to create PDF files, the environment variables GS_PROGRAM and
GS_LIB must be set.
long
Example:
-outputformat eps
pdf is no longer recommended. Better use the
hybrid PDF-driver with device ID 231x.
-outputformat
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
129
page size
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
page size to be set in the PDF file; only
available for model pdf
-pagesize
Parameter:
width height
width
height
page width in units of 72 dpi
page height in units of 72 dpi
default:
none
Table 7-3 shows some common formats and the correspondent widths and
heights. A list of page sizes can be specified. If only one width and height
is specified, the specified page size is used for each page. If the specified
size is "0 0", the size given by the input file is used.
Format
Width
Height
DIN A4 portrait
595
842
DIN A3 landscape
1191
842
ANSI_A portrait
612
792
ANSI_B landscape
1224
792
Table 7-3:
Common Pagesizes
Example to set a page size to A4, A3 or a variable page size if A4 and
A3 do not fit:
-pagesize 595 842 842 1191 0 0
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
130
specifies the characteristics of the PDF
files to be created; only available for
model pdf
-pdfprofile
PDF profile
Parameter:
profilename
profilename
name of the PDF profile to be used.
default:
none
The PDF profiles are specified in the PDF profile configuration file
pdfprofile.cfg. For more information about PDF profiles see Chapter
3.4, PDF Profile, page 71.
Example:
-pdfprofile PDFA1B
resetting commands for the output
device
-resetstring
Parameter:
reset device
string
see -initstring
string
default:
none
See the description of -initstring earlier in this Chapter.
resolution of the output device
-resolution
Parameter:
resolution
value unit
value
unit
dpi
dpm
dpmm
300 dpi
specifies the value of the resolution
specifies the unit of the resolution:
dots per inch
dots per meter
dots per millimeter
default:
The given value of the resolution is mapped onto the nearest available resolution of the device.
Example:
-resolution 300 dpi
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
131
color table
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
color table entry
-rgb
Parameter:
color_index red green blue
color_index
color index to
red
color as red
0.0
be assigned
...
1.0
color as blue
blue
0.0
...
1.0
color as green
green
0.0
...
1.0
default:
none
The colors 0 and 1 (white, black) are predefined.
Example:
-rgb 1 0.0 0.0 0.0
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
132
rotation
-rotate
Parameter:
angle
angle
0
90
180
270
default:
rotation
specifies whether the graphics has to
be rotated.
no rotation
rotation by 90°
rotation by 180°
rotation by 2700°
0
Only available for PostScript drivers. Not available for hybrid PDF
driver.
The PostScript driver only supports 0 and 90.
The PDF driver supports 0, 90, 180 and 270.
When creating encapsulated PostScript, the rotation is ignored.
Example:
-rotate 90
Rotation is ignored when generating Encapsulated PostScript.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
133
drawing area
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
-size
Parameter:
x_size
y_size
x_offs
y_offs
default:
size and position of the drawing area
x_size y_size [x_offs y_offs]
specifies the size of the drawing area
in x-direction.
specifies the size ofthe drawing area in
y-direction.
specifies the offset of the graphics origin in x-direction (ignored for Encapsulated PostScript).
specifies the offset of the graphics origin in y-direction (ignored for Encapsulated PostScript).
device-dependent
If offsets are specified for model pdf, the same values are added as
top and right margins.
Example: The drawing area will get a left and right margin of 5 mm each
and a bottom and top margin of 6 mm each.
-size 200 285 5 6
subdevice
subdevice
-subdevice
Parameter:
subdeviceID
subdeviceID
deviceID
specifies the ID of the subdevice
first possible value
...
deviceID+9 last possible value
default:
none
Copies the default setup to the specified subdevice. Assignment of properties will affect only this subdevice.
Example:
-subdevice 2011
Each ID can only be used once.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
or -auxtray
Parameter:
134
paper tray
-tray
tray_name
tray_name
auxtray_name
tray
or auxtray_name
specifies the name of the tray to be
used
specifies the name of the auxiliary tray
to be used
default:
none
The PostScript device at first tries to use tray_name. If not present,
auxtray_name is tried. Refer to the output devices programming manual
for the PostScript commands to select the trays.
A pattern of #PS within the tray_name or auxtray_name is replaced by the
values of the top right corner of the page bounding box (e. g. the page size).
The special character notations listed in Table 7-4 will be replaced:
Notation
Replacement
\b
blank (0x20)
\r
carriage return (0x0D)
\xyz
octal character 0xyz (0<=x<=3, 0<=y, z<=7). Octal characters
have to be specified with three digits. \000 is not allowed.
\n
newline (0x0A)
\t
tab (0x09)
Table 7-4:
Replacement of Special Characters
Example:
-tray a4tray
-auxtray a4
-tray Tray\bwith\bLetter\bpaper
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
135
7 PostScript and PDF Driver
7.3
Predefined PostScript Devices
A summary of predefined PostScript device IDs is given in Chapter 15, List of
Predefined Devices, page 322.
For a complete list of predefined configuration parameters, have a look into the
PostScript device configuration file CXXPSCRI. It is located by using either the
environment variable CXXPSCRI or GTS_FONTS.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
8
136
HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD
Driver
The CHPGLX driver supports several HP-GL, HP-GL/2 and BGL devices, the
Rotring NC plotscriber, and Standard Plot Format. It evaluates the environment
variable CHPGLX in order to search its configuration file. The device IDs can be
in the range of 3000 to 3399.
8.1
CHPGLX
Calling the CHPGLX Driver
physical output device
-device
Parameter:
deviceID manufacturer language model site
deviceID
3000
3010
physical output
device
must be multiple of 10.
used sequence
...
3990
manufacturer
language
model
site
name of the manufacturer of the output
device
language supported for the output device
model of the output device; for an
overview of all supported models see
Table 8-1
string to check site dependencies
default:
none
Assignments of properties will affect only the default setup until a subdevice is selected. Currently only deviceID and model are checked. manufacturer, language, and site must be present, but are reserved for future
use. A specific output device is selected via the parameter file.
Example:
-device 3110 HP HP-GL/2 hppaintjetxl site
The device ID can only be used once.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
137
supported devices
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
Table 8-1 gives an overview of all supported devices and their model values.
Device
Allowed Values for Model
HP C 1602 A with HP-GL/2 cartridge
hpc1602, hppaintjetxl
HP 7475 A
hp7475a
HP 7550 A
hp7550a
HP 7570 A
hp7570a, hpdraftpro
HP 7585 B
hp7585b
HP 7586 B
hp7586b
HP 7595 A
hp7595a, hpdraftmasteri
HP 7596 A
hp7596a, hpdraftmasterii
HP 7599 A
hp7599a, hpdraftmastermx
HP 7600
hp7600
HP DraftMaster I
hpdraftmasteri, hp7595a
HP DraftMaster II
hpdraftmasterii, hp7596a
HP DraftMaster MX
hpdraftmastermx, hp7599a
HP DraftPro
hpdraftpro, hp7570a
HP LaserJet III using HP-GL/2
hplaserjetiii
HP PaintJet XL with HP-GL/2 cartridge
hppaintjetxl, hpc1602
General HP-GL/2 pen output device
hpgl2pen
Microfilm output device with HP-GL
o2m
Rotring NC plotscriber
plotscriber
General HP-GL/2 raster output device
hpgl2ras
Benson 16 series output devices
be16xx
Benson 18 series output devices
be18xx
Standard plot format
stdpld
Table 8-1:
Supported Device Models
For HP-GL/2 devices not found in the list, use the models
hpgll2pen (pen plotters) or hpgl2ras (electrostatic, inkjet plotters).
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
8.2
138
Configuring the CHPGLX Driver
The CHPGLX Driver evaluates the following environment variable:
environment
variable
Possible values are 0 and 1:
CG03PSROT
0:
no additional action
1: The image is additionally rotated by 180 degree if
HP-GL/2 output size length is less than output size
width (fixes problem with unexpected rotation of
image).
default: 0
The remaining parameters for configuring the CHPGLX driver are given in alphabetical order.
cap style, i. e. the style of line ends
(only supported for certain device
types)
-capstyle
Parameter:
parameters
cap style
capstyle
specifies the style, see Figure 7-1, page
118.
The line is squared off at the endpoints
capstyle
butt
projecting
The line continues half a line width behind its endpoints and is squared off.
The line has round ends
round
triangular
The line ends in triangles
default:
round
Example:
-capstyle round
is only supported for HP-GL/2 and BGL devices. For
BGL devices, only -capstyle round is recognized and used for
rounding of lines.
-capstyle
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
139
hardware text
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
character expansion factor for hardware text
-charexpansion
Parameter:
factor
specifies the character expansion factor.
factor
0.1
...
10.0
default:
1.0
Specifies a character expansion factor which is applied to all hardware text.
Example:
-charexpansion 0.87
color mapping
or -colourmap
color mapping
Parameter:
filename [color_model color_value_extent]
[-gamma gamma_value ][-tolerance number_bit]
[r g b rm gm bm] | [c m y cm mm ym] |
[c m y k cm mm ym km]
filename
specifies the file that keeps the information of how the color mapping is
performed.
color_model
specifies the color model which is used
in the color mapping file.
RGB
RGB color model
CMY
CMY color model
CMYK
CMYK color model
color_value_extent
specifies the color value extent which
is used in the color mapping file.
1
defines the maximum color value
used. Usually values of 100, 255 or
1023 are used. The minimum color value is always 0.
...
-colormap
65535
-gamma gamma_value
specifies a value for overall brightening or darkening of the graphics. Values larger than 1.0 will brighten the
image, values less than 1.0 will darken the graphics. When specifying
-gamma, no individual mapping of colors is performed.
0.1
...
10.0
-tolerance number_bit
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
specifies the tolerance for individual
mapping of colors. number_bit specifies how many low order bits are stripped (set to 0) from the input image.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
r g b rm gm bm
c m y cm mm ym
c m y k cm mm ym km
default:
140
After stripping, the pixel value is set to
the nearest color defined in the color
table (the "new" value). This reduces
the amount of colors in the image.
If color_model RGB has been selected,
it defines a color mapping for the RGB
color r g b to the new color rm gm bm.
If color_model CMY has been selected,
it defines a color mapping for the
CMY color c m y to the new color cm
mm ym.
If color_model CMYK has been selected, it defines a color mapping for the
CMYK color c m y k to the new color
cm mm ym km.
none
Example: see -colormap description in Chapter 7.2, Configuring the
CXXPSCRI Driver, page 117.
-colorprecision
or -colourprecisioncolor precision
color precision
Parameter:
precision_bits
precision_bits
Number
of bits to use per red, green,
blue part of a color.
1
...
15
default:
10
Sets the precision to represent colors internally.
Example:
-colorprecision 10
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
141
cutter
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
cutter
-cutter
Parameter:
cutter
cutter
yes
no
enables or disables the automatic cutter
enable the automatic cutter
disable the automatic cutter
default:
none
If -cutter is not specified, there will be no disable or enable command
written to the output file. Therefore, no cutter setting will be performed.
If -cutter is specified, the automatic rotation of the HP-GL/2 output
device is switched off. If -cutter is not used, no cutter command is
written to the output file and an automatic rotation of the HP-GL/2 output
device is not switched off.
Example:
-cutter yes
solid fill
line distance for solid fill
-filldistance
Parameter:
distance
specifies the distance of lines for fill
simulation.
distance
default:
0.35
(mm)
Example:
-filldistance 0.2
unit
units of measurement
-inches
Parameter:
default:
none
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as inches.
Example:
-inches
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
142
initialization commands for the output
device
-initstring
Parameter:
initialize the device
string
string
default
none
other
specifies the initialization commands
(see Table 8-3, page 143).
The default initialization string is written to the output file.
No initialization string is written to the
output file.
The specified string is written to the
output file instead of the default initialization string.
default:
default
The default strings work with most output devices. For HP-GL devices
they configure the output device to XON/XOFF handshake. For some output
devices using an HP-GL emulation it may be necessary to use string none.
If the string contains blanks, it has to be enclosed by double quotes. The
length of the string is limited to 511 characters (79 characters in versions
prior to 3.63).
Example:
-initstring none
The special character notations listed in Table 8-2 will be replaced in the string.
Notation
Replacement
\b
blank (0x20)
\r
carriage return (0x0D)
\xyz
octal character 0xyz (0<=x<=3, 0<=y, z<=7). Octal characters
have to be specified with three digits. \000 is not allowed.
Table 8-2:
Replacement of Special Characters
-initstring
should only be used by experienced output device
users.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
143
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
Table 8-3 lists all default initialization and reset strings sorted by devices IDs.
Remember the following conventions:
• <ESC> is the escape character <CTRL>+[
• <CR> is the carriage return character <CTRL>+M
• <LF> is line feed character <CTRL>+J
Device ID
Default Initialization String
Default Reset String
3000
to 3003
"<ESC>.Y<ESC>.I80;;17:<ESC>.N0;19:"
"<ESC>.Z"
3010
to 3013
"<ESC>.Y<ESC>.I80;;17:<ESC>.N0;19:"
"<ESC>.Z"
3020
to 3027
"<ESC>.Y<ESC>.I80;;17:<ESC>.N0;19:"
"<ESC>.Z"
3030
to 3039
"<ESC>.Y<ESC>.I80;;17:<ESC>.N0;19:"
"<ESC>.Z"
3040
to 3049
"<ESC>.Y<ESC>.I80;;17:<ESC>.N0;19:"
"<ESC>.Z"
3050
to 3059
"<ESC>.Y<ESC>.I80;;17:<ESC>.N0;19:"
"<ESC>.Z"
3060
to 3069
"<ESC>.Y<ESC>.I80;;17:<ESC>.N0;19:"
"<ESC>.Z"
3090
to 3093
none
none
3100
to 3109
"<ESC>%-1B"
none
3110
to 3113
"<ESC>E<ESC>&l3O<ESC>%-1B"
"<ESC>E"
3120
to 3123
"<ESC>%-1B"
none
3130
to 3131
"<ESC>E<ESC>&l3o0E<ESC>*p50Y
<ESC>*c8130x5710y0T<ESC>%1B"
"<ESC>E"
3200
to 3209
"GW 20 1 1 18
""GW 21 1 1 18 <CR><LF>
3210
to 3219
"GW 20 1 1 18
""GW 21 1 1 18 <CR><LF>
Table 8-3:
gXconvert
System Description
Initialization and Reset Strings
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
style of joins (only supported for
certain device types)
-joinstyle
Parameter:
join
joinstyle
joinstyle
miter
round
bevel
default:
144
specifies the style how lines are joined
(see Figure 7-1, page 118).
The outer edges will continue until
they meet.
Round joins.
Segments ends with butt ends. A resulting notch is filled with a triangle.
miter
Example:
-joinstyle miter
-joinstyle
is only supported for HP-GL/2 devices.
label terminator (only supported for
certain device types)
-labelterminator
label terminator
Parameter:
term_character
term_character
decimal
value of character which is
used as label terminator.
default:
3 (CTRL+C)
Example:
-labelterminator 3
-labelterminator
is only supported for HP-GL and HP-GL/2
devices.
message string
-message
Parameter:
string
specifies the string that is printed to
STDERR.
string
default:
message
none
Example:
-message "using standard CHPGLX"
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
145
unit
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
or -millimetres
units of measurement
Parameter:
none
default:
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as millimeters.
-millimeters
Example:
-millimeters
line width
minimum line width
-minlinewidth
Parameter:
min_width
specifies the minimum line width.
min_width
default:
0
Thin lines of light colors may not be visible.
Example:
-minlinewidth 0.35
This may be used for raster devices.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
-newline
or -newlines
Parameter:
146
line separation (only supported for
certain device types)
line separation
wrap
specifies if a newline characters is inserted.
no
does not add newline characters to the
output file.
yes
adds a newline characters to the output
file generating lines with an approximate length of 80 characters.
yes (VMS), no (others)
default:
For some output devices which treat a newline character as command separator, wrap is needed. Otherwise, output will be produced with missing
graphics primitives. For VMS, -newline yes is required in order to structure the output file.
wrap
Example:
-newline yes
-newline
is only supported for HP-GL and HP-GL/2 devices.
number of pens supported for the
device (only supported for certain
device types)
-npens
Parameter:
pen number
npens
npens
0
1
size of palette to be used.
number of pens to be used.
...
npens-1
default:
8
Example:
-npens 256
-npens
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
is only supported for HP-GL/2 devices.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
147
pen color and
width
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
color and width of each pen
-pen
Parameter:
pen_number red green blue width
pen_number
number of pen (range
depends on the
device)
color of pen as red
red
0
...
1.0
color of pen as green
green
0
...
1.0
color of pen as blue
blue
0
...
1.0
width
width of pen
default:
none
Output files for pen plotters will only use pens which are assigned. There
are no pens predefined.
Example of pen 1, black, 0.35 units of measure:
-pen 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.35
compression
compression of the output file (only
supported for certain device types)
-outputformat
Parameter:
compress_type
compress_type
0
7
8
7
default:
type of the compression
no compression
compression using 7 bits per character
compression using 8 bits per character
When using compression 8 the output files must be handled like binary
files when transferring over networks.
Example:
-outputformat 7
-outputformat
gXconvert
System Description
is only supported for HP-GL/2 devices.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
148
color overlay (only supported for
certain device types)
-overlay
Parameter:
overlay
overlay
default:
color overlay
yes
no
yes
specifies behavior of overlaying graphics primitives.
overlay colors previously used
merge colors
Example:
-overlay yes
-overlay
is only supported for HP-GL/2 raster devices.
pen selection (depends on the device)
-penselectmode
pen selection
Parameter:
penselectmode
penselectmode
specifies the mode of selecting
bycolorindex or bycolourindex
a pen.
pen plotters: The pen with the number
of the current color is used. If this pen
is not available, nothing will be drawn.
raster devices: The color specified for
the pen with the number of the current
color is used. If this pen is not available, nothing will be drawn.
bycolor or bycolour
pen plotters: A pen which color is similar to the current color will be selected. If there are more pens with this
same color, they are used for drawing
different wide lines.
raster devices: The color specified by
-rgb is used.
default:
bycolorindex
Example:
-penselectmode bycolorindex
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
149
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
-penselectmode bycolor can also be used to remap different line widths
to output device pens. If the line widths 0.1,0.3,0.5 and 0.7 mm are used
in the input file, the following pen configuration remaps them to the pens
1 to 4:
Example:
-pen 1 0 0 0 0.1
-pen 2 0 0 0 0.3
-pen 3 0 0 0 0.5
-pen 4 0 0 0 0.7
-penselectmode bycolor
-widelines no
To make the pen selection independent of the colors used in the input file,
all pens have been set to the same color.
The usage of -penselectmode depends on the device.
pen speed
pen speed (only supported for certain
device types)
-penspeed
Parameter:
speed
Pen speed to be used.
speed
1
2
3
4
default:
1
Specifies the pen speed for Rotring NC plotscriber.
Example:
-penspeed 4
-penspeed
gXconvert
System Description
is only supported for Rotring NC plotscriber.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
150
source of output size (only supported
for certain device types)
-plotsizemode
output size
Parameter:
plotsizemode
plotsizemode
bysize
specifies the source of the output size.
The output size is specified by with
-size.
byviewport
The output size is calculated from the
input image. This will minimize paper
waste.
bycliprect
The output size is the clip rectangle set
on start of output.
default:
bysize
gives a fixed size of the drawing area. For different sizes of
drawing areas different subdevices have to be used.
byviewport will set the output size to the size which is required to draw
the input image. The maximum size is restricted by the values specified by
-size.
bycliprect gives a variable size of the drawing area. Therefore, the clip
rectangle must be set to the size wanted with the first graphics primitive.
Use the maximum drawing area of the physical device with -size and use
bycliprect to minimize waste of paper.
bysize
-plotsizemode bycliprect
should no longer be used.
Example:
-plotsizemode byviewport
-plotsizemode can only be used with HP-GL/2 devices supporting
PS and PG commands, and STDPLD devices.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
151
copies
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
number of copies (only supported for
certain device types)
-replot
Parameter:
additional_copies
additional_copies
specifies
the number of additional co-
pies
default:
0
Example:
-replot 3
-replot
is only supported for devices able to output additional
copies.
-replot
resetting the device
is only supported for HP-GL and HP-GL/2 devices.
commands for resetting the output
device
-resetstring
Parameter:
string
string
default
default:
gXconvert
System Description
specifies the resetting commands (see
Table 8-3, page 143).
The default resetting string is written
to the output file. See -initstring
for default string settings.
default
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
152
color table entry
-rgb
color table
Parameter:
color_index red green blue
color_index
color index to
red
color as red
0.0
be assigned
...
1.0
color as blue
blue
0.0
...
1.0
color as green
green
0.0
...
1.0
default:
none
The colors 0 and 1 (white, black) are predefined.
Example:
-rgb 1 0.0 0.0 0.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
153
rotation
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
rotation (only supported for certain
device types)
-rotate
Parameter:
rotation
rotation
0
90
180
270
specifies whether the picture is rotated.
no rotation
rotation by 90°
rotation by 180°
rotation by 270°
0
default:
For unrotated pictures on printers, the x-axis is parallel to the direction of
paper motion. For image formats the unrotated x-axis will point to the
right.
Example:
-rotate 90
The devices and their supported rotation angles are listed in Table
8-4.
Device Type
Rotation Angle
HP-GL
0, 90
HP-GL/2
0, 90, 180, 270
STDPLD
0, 90
Plotscriber
0, 90
BGL
0, 90
Table 8-4:
Devices and Rotation Angles
For BGL devices and the Rotring NC plotscriber device, rotation is
performed by software. To evaluate the new origin, the values of -size are
used. The origin of the rotated picture is at position (0, x_size) of the unrotated drawing area.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
154
size of the drawing area
-size
Parameter:
x_size y_size
specifies the size of the drawing area
in x-direction.
specifies the size ofthe drawing area in
y-direction.
x_size
y_size
default:
drawing area
device-dependent
Example:
-size 297.3 210.2
subdevice
-subdevice
subdevice
Parameter:
subdeviceID
subdeviceID
deviceID
specifies the ID of the subdevice
first possible value
...
deviceID+9
last possible value
default:
none
Copies the default setup to the specified subdevice. Assignment of properties will affect only this subdevice.
Example:
-subdevice 3110
Each ID can only be used once.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
155
transparency
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
transparency (only supported
certain device types)
-transparency
for
Parameter:
transparency
transparency
yes
no
default:
specifies the transparency mode.
white areas are transparent, i. e. they
are not drawn.
white areas will overlay previously
drawn graphics primitives.
no
Example:
-transparency yes
-transparency
line width simulation
is only supported for HP-GL/2 raster devices.
simulation of wide lines
-widelines
Parameter:
widelines
widelines
yes
no
default:
specifies how wide lines are drawn.
The interpretation is device-dependent.
pen plotters that can not simulate wide
lines by restroking: Currently a wide
line simulation is not implemented.
pen plotters that can simulate wide lines by restroking (HP-GL/2 pen plotters): The line width simulation is done
by HP-GL/2 to get a line using the current line width.
raster devices: The current line width
is used.
pen plotters: The pen with the best fitting width is selected. No restroking is
done for lines wider than the width of
the widest pen corresponding to the
selected color.
raster devices: If -penselectmode is
bycolorindex, the line width given in
the pen description is used. If -penselectmode is bycolor, the current line
width is used.
no
Example:
-widelines yes
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
8 HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD Driver
8.3
156
Predefined HP-GL, HP-GL/2 and BGL Devices
A summary of predefined HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD device IDs is
given in Chapter 15.2, Predefined HP-GL(/2) Devices, page 331.
For a complete list of predefined configuration parameters, have a look into the
HP-GL, HP-GL/2, BGL, and STDPLD device configuration file CHPGLX. It is
located by using either the environment variable CHPGLX or GTS_FONTS.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
157
9 CalComp Driver
9
CCALHCBS
CalComp Driver
The CCALHCBS driver uses CalComp Host Computer Basic Software in the C
language (HCBS/C). It evaluates the environment variable CCALHCBS in order to
search the configuration file. The name of the configuration file is CCALHCBS.
The device IDs can be in the range of 5000 to 5999.
Some driver devices are only available as an option!
9.1
physical output
device
Calling the CCALHCBS Driver
physical output device
-device
Parameter:
deviceID manufacturer language model site
deviceID
5000
5010
must be multiple of 10.
used sequence
...
5990
name of the manufacturer of the output
device
language supported for the output device
model of the output device:
manufacturer
language
model
colourelectrostat
color electrostatic plotter
penplot pen plotter
bwelectrostat
monochrom electrostatic plotter
string to check site dependencies
site
default:
none
Assignments of properties will affect only the default setup until a subdevice is selected. Currently only deviceID and model are checked. manufacturer, language, and site must be present, but are reserved for future
use.
To select a specific model, model is used.
Example:
-device 5000 calcomp hcbs colourelectrostat site
The device ID can only be used once.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
9 CalComp Driver
9.2
158
Configuring the CCALHCBS Driver
The remaining parameters for configuring the CCALHCBS driver are given in
alphabetical order.
cap style, i. e. the style of line ends
-capstyle
Parameter:
parameters
line end style
capstyle
specifies the style, see Figure 7-1, page
118.
The line is squared off at the endpoints
capstyle
butt
projecting
The line continues half a line width behind its endpoints and is squared off.
The line has round ends
round
triangular
The line ends in triangles
default:
none
The cap style is only used for wide lines which are simulated by fill areas.
If -capstyle is not specified, a device-dependent cap style is used (see
Figure 7-1, page 118).
Example:
-capstyle round
output file checksum
-checksum
Parameter:
checksum
checksum
yes
no
default:
checksum
specifies whether a checksum is created.
The checksum is appended to the output data.
The checksum is not appended to the
output data.
no
Example:
-checksum yes
or -colourmap
color mapping
Parameter:
filename [color_model color_value_extent]
[-gamma gamma_value ][-tolerance number_bit]
[r g b rm gm bm] | [c m y cm mm ym] |
[c m y k cm mm ym km]
filename
specifies the file that keeps the information of how the color mapping is
performed.
color_model
specifies the color model which is used
in the color mapping file.
-colormap
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
color mapping
gXconvert
System Description
159
9 CalComp Driver
RGB
CMY
CMYK
color_value_extent
1
RGB color model
CMY color model
CMYK color model
specifies the color value extent which
is used in the color mapping file.
defines the maximum color value
used. Usually values of 100, 255 or
1023 are used. The minimum color value is always 0.
...
65535
-gamma gamma_value
specifies a value for overall brightening or darkening of the graphics. Values larger than 1.0 will brighten the
image, values less than 1.0 will darken the graphics. When specifying
-gamma, no individual mapping of colors is performed.
0.1
...
10.0
-tolerance number_bit
r g b rm gm bm
c m y cm mm ym
c m y k cm mm ym km
default:
specifies the tolerance for individual
mapping of colors. number_bit specifies how many low order bits are stripped (set to 0) from the input image.
After stripping, the pixel value is set to
the nearest color defined in the color
table (the "new" value). This reduces
the amount of colors in the image.
If color_model RGB has been selected,
it defines a color mapping for the RGB
color r g b to the new color rm gm bm.
If color_model CMY has been selected, it defines a color mapping for the
CMY color c m y to the new color cm
mm ym.
If color_model CMYK has been selected, it defines a color mapping for the
CMYK color c m y k to the new color
cm mm ym km.
none
Example of mapping all 255 image gray scales to 8 gray levels as result:
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
9 CalComp Driver
160
RGB 255
-tolerance 5
0
0
0
31 31 31
63 63 63
95 95 95
127 127 127
159 159 159
191 191 191
223 223 223
255 255 255
0
31
63
95
127
159
191
223
255
0
31
63
95
127
159
191
223
255
0
31
63
95
127
159
191
223
255
This table defines all possible shades of gray in a 3x8 bit color range. All
gray levels of (0, 0, 0) up to (15, 15, 15) will be mapped to (0, 0, 0); all
grays from (16, 16, 16) up to (47, 47, 47) will be mapped to (31, 31, 31);
and so on.
Example of color mapping using gamma correction:
RGB 100
-gamma 0.7
-colorprecision
or -colourprecisioncolor precision
color precision
Parameter:
precision_bits
precision_bits
Number
of bits to use per red, green,
blue part of a color.
1
...
15
default:
10
Sets the precision to represent colors internally.
Example:
-colorprecision 10
character interpreted as end of block
-eob
Parameter:
character
specifies the end of block character.
character
default:
end of block
3 (CTRL+C)
Example:
-eob 3
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
161
end of picture action
9 CalComp Driver
end of picture action (only supported
for certain device types)
-eop
Parameter:
action
specifies the action executed after a
picture.
wait
returns pen to origin when ending an
output and generates an operator message when starting the next output.
This option is used with single sheet
paper.
formfeed sets the new origin after the last picture
and continues with the output. This option is used with roll paper.
action
default:
wait
Example:
-eop wait
-eop
fill area
is only supported for pen plotters.
pattern size for fill areas
-fillpattsize
Parameter:
size
specifies the pattern size for fill areas.
size
2
4
8
16
default:
4
A pattern size of 4 will use patterns 4x4 pixels wide to generate colors.
With increasing values more different colors can be displayed by using
larger patterns to simulate colors.
Example:
-fillpattsize 8
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
9 CalComp Driver
162
initialization commands for the output
device
-initstring
Parameter:
string
specifies the initialization commands.
string
default:
initialize device
none
If the string contains blanks, it must be enclosed by double quotes.
Control characters like TAB, ESC must be written as a single character to the string. Notations like \t, \033 are not recognized. A line
feed must not be enclosed in the string.
pattern size for lines
-linpattsize
Parameter:
size
specifies the number of bits for the pen
color pattern
size
default:
pattern size
2
4
8
16
8
Example:
-linpattsize 8
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
163
line width simulation
9 CalComp Driver
line width simulation for eletrostatic
output devices (only supported for
certain device types)
-lwidsimulation
Parameter:
value unit
value
3
specifies the number of pixels where to
start the simulation.
lowest pixel size
...
17
unit
greatest pixel size
specifies the measurement unit
pixel
default:
17 pixel
By default, line widths up to 16 pixels are drawn with the configurable
pens of the CalComp output device. This leads to smaller output files and
faster processing. Setting the cap style, on the other hand, is only possible
with simulated lines (see -capstyle).
To use -capstyle for line widths less than 17 pixels, set -lwidsimulato a value less than 17.
tion
Example:
-lwidsimulation 3 pixel
-lwidsimulation is only supported for eletrostatic output devices.
message
message string
-message
Parameter:
string
specifies the string that is printed to
STDERR.
string
default:
none
Example:
-message "using standard CCALHCBS"
unit
or -millimetres
units of measurement
Parameter:
none
default:
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as millimeters.
-millimeters
Example:
-millimeters
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
9 CalComp Driver
164
model of the output device
-model
Parameter:
model
model
907
907ipe
951
951ipe
57xx
58xx
52xxx
67xxx
68xxx
default:
device model
58xx
907ipe
specifies the output device model:
for -device penplot; software level
1
for -device penplot; software level
2
for -device colourelectrostat or
-device bwelectrostat; software
level 3
for -device colourelectrostat or
-device bwelectrostat;software level 4
for -device colourelectrostat or
-device bwelectrostat;software level 5
for -device colourelectrostat or
-device bwelectrostat;software level 5
for -device colourelectrostat or
-device bwelectrostat;software level 6
for -device colourelectrostat or
-device bwelectrostat;software level 7
for -device colourelectrostat or
-device bwelectrostat;software level 7
for electrostatic plotters
for pen plotters
Example:
-model 907ipe
usage of clip code in output file
-noclip
Parameter:
clipmode
clipmode
no
yes
default:
clip mode
specifies the clipping mode.
The clipping of the output device is
used.
The output file does not contain clipping code. Clipping has to be done by
the software.
no
Example:
-noclip yes
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
165
sync character
9 CalComp Driver
number of sync characters used in the
output file
-nsync
Parameter:
sync
specifies the number of sync characters
sync
default:
1
2
1
Example:
-nsync 2
drawing mode
graphics drawing mode (only available
for certain device types)
-overlay
Parameter:
mode
mode
0
1
2
3
default:
specifies the graphic drawing mode.
merge
erase
overlay
sequential overlay (requires output device firmware revision V 4.01 or above)
3
Example:
-overlay 2
-overlay
gXconvert
System Description
is only supported for electrostatic plotters.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
9 CalComp Driver
166
color and width of each pen
-pen
Parameter:
pen_number red green blue width
pen_number
number of pen (range
pen color and
width
depends on the
device)
color of pen as red
red
0
...
1.0
color of pen as green
green
0
...
1.0
color of pen as blue
blue
0
...
1.0
width
width of pen
default:
none
Output files for pen plotters will only use pens which are assigned. There
are no pens predefined.
Example of pen 1, black, 0.35 units of measure:
-pen 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.35
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
167
pen selection
9 CalComp Driver
pen selection (only available for
certain device types)
-penselectmode
Parameter:
penselectmode
penselectmode
specifies the
bycolor or bycolour
default:
mode of selecting a pen.
A pen which color lies next to the current color is selected for drawing.
bycolorindex or bycolourindex
The pen with the number of the current
color is selected for drawing. If this
pen is not available, nothing will be
drawn.
cyclic
A modulo operation with regard to the
maximum pen index is performed on
each color index before selecting a
pen. Hence, if pens 1 to 4 are available,
color index 5 will use pen number 1
again.
bycolor or bycolorindex
Example:
-penselectmode bycolorindex
-penselectmode
output distance
is only supported for pen plotters.
distance between outputs
-plotdistance
Parameter:
distance
specifies the distance between two
outputs.
distance
default:
10
(millimeters)
Example:
-plotdistance 15.0
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
9 CalComp Driver
168
CalComp library tailoring
-plotvals
Parameter:
CalComp library
filename
specifies the name of the file containing user settings.
filename
default:
none
The file contains redefinitions of the elements of the plotvals structure
defined in plotlist.h. These redefinitions overwrite the definitions of
the configuration file CCALHCBS.
Example:
-plotvals uservals.d
character number used to represent an
output code
-radix
Parameter:
output code
plotcode
plotcode
59
64
95
specifies the number of characters to
represent a output code
severely limited radix
limited radix
normal radix
default:
95
This parameter defines the radix and therefore the value indicating how
many different characters can be used to represent output codes.
Example:
-radix 95
resetting commands for the output
device
-resetstring
Parameter:
reset device
string
string
specifies the resetting commands.
default:
none
See the description of -initstring earlier in this Chapter.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
169
resolution
9 CalComp Driver
resolution of the output device
-resolution
Parameter:
value unit
value
unit
default:
dpi
dpm
dpmm
400 dpi
specifies the value of the resolution
specifies the unit of the resolution:
dots per inch
dots per meter
dots per millimeter
Example:
-resolution 300 dpi
color table
color table entry
-rgb
Parameter:
color_index red green blue
color_index
color index to
red
color as red
0.0
be assigned
...
1.0
color as blue
blue
0.0
...
1.0
color as green
green
0.0
...
1.0
default:
none
The colors 0 and 1 (white, black) are predefined.
Example:
-rgb 1 0.0 0.0 0.0
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
9 CalComp Driver
170
color table definition
-rgbtable
Parameter:
color table
mode
mode
fixed
specifies the usage of the colors specified by -rgb
Assume these colors are already defined on the output device. These colors
must be available for fill colors and
pen colors with the same color index.
The pen width must be 1 nib. No additional colors can be defined on the output device. Colors are to be mapped.
predefined
Assumes these colors are already defined on the output device. These colors
must be available for fill colors and
pen colors with the same color index.
The pen width must be 1 nib. Additional colors can be defined on the output
device.
todefine
The driver has to define the fill colors
and pen colors. Additional colors can
be defined on the output device.
default:
predefined
Example:
-rgbtable todefine
-rgbtable
is only supported for electrostatic plotters.
rotation of the graphics
-rotate
Parameter:
angle
specifies the angle
(counter-clockwise).
angle
default:
rotation
of
rotation
0
Example:
-rotate 90
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
171
drawing area
9 CalComp Driver
size of the drawing area
-size
Parameter:
x_size y_size
specifies the size of the drawing area
in x-direction.
specifies the size ofthe drawing area in
y-direction.
x_size
y_size
default:
device-dependent
Example:
-size 297.3 210.2
CalComp library
CalComp library step size
-stepsize
Parameter:
value unit
value
unit
default:
dpi
dpm
dpmm
400 dpi
specifies the value of the resolution
specifies the unit of the resolution:
dots per inch
dots per meter
dots per millimeter
Example:
-stepsize 2032 dpi
If -stepsize is not given, the value specified by -resolution is
used.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
9 CalComp Driver
172
subdevice
-subdevice
subdevice
Parameter:
subdeviceID
subdeviceID
deviceID
specifies the ID of the subdevice
first possible value
...
deviceID+9
last possible value
default:
none
Copies the default setup to the specified subdevice. Assignment of properties will affect only this subdevice.
Example:
-subdevice 5000
Each ID can only be used once!
sync character used in the output file
-sync
Parameter:
sync
specifies the character used for starting
the output.
sync
default:
sync character
2 (CTRL+B)
Example:
-sync 2
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
173
line width simulation
9 CalComp Driver
line width simulation (only available
for certain device types)
-widelines
Parameter:
widelines
widelines
no
yes
default:
specifies whether wide lines are simulated
Selects a pen with the best fitting
width and draws lines with a single
stroke.
Enables drawing wide lines by multiple strokes.
no
Example:
-widelines yes
-widelines
gXconvert
System Description
is only supported for pen plotters.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
9 CalComp Driver
9.3
174
Predefined CalComp Devices
A summary of predefined CalComp device IDs is given in Chapter 15.4,
Predefined CalComp Devices, page 339.
For a complete list of predefined configuration parameters, have a look into the
CalComp device configuration file CCALHCBS. It is located by using either the
environment variable CCALHCBS or GTS_FONTS.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
175
10 Metafile Driver
10
CXXMETA
Metafile Driver
The CXXMETA driver supports the CGM and DXF drivers. It evaluates the environment variable CXXMETA in order to search its configuration file. The name of
the configuration file is CXXMETA. The device IDs can be in the range of 7000 to
7999.
10.1 Calling the CXXMETA Driver
physical output
device
physical output device
-device
Parameter:
deviceID manufacturer language model site
deviceID
7000
7010
must be multiple of 10.
used sequence.
...
7990
manufacturer
language
model
cgm
site
name of the manufacturer of the output
device
device language supported
model of the output device:
uses the CXXMETA driver
string to check site dependencies
default:
none
Assignments of properties will affect only the default setup until a subdevice is selected. Currently only deviceID and model are checked. manufacturer, language, and site must be present, but are reserved for future
use. A specific output device is selected via the parameter file.
Example:
-device 7000 manuf cgm cgm site
The device ID can only be used once.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
10 Metafile Driver
176
10.2 Configuring the CXXMETA Driver
The remaining parameters for configuring the CXXMETA driver are given in alphabetical order.
integer precision for binary encoded
CGM (only supported for certain
device types)
-binintprec
parameters
integer precision
Parameter:
number_of_bits
number_of_bits
specifies the integer precision for bina-
ry encoded CGM.
default:
16
Example:
-binintprec 32
-binintprec
is only supported for the CGM driver.
VDC integer precision for binary
encoded CGM (only supported for
certain device types)
-binvintprec
VDC integer precision
Parameter:
number_of_bits
number_of_bits
specifies
the VDC integer precision
for binary encoded CGM.
default:
16
Example:
-binvintprec 32
-binvintprec
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
is only supported for the CGM driver.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
177
integer precision
10 Metafile Driver
integer precision for character encoded
CGM (only supported for certain
device types)
-chrintprec
parameters:
number_of_bits
number_of_bits
specifies
the integer precision for character encoded CGM
default:
10
Example:
-chrintprec 32
-chrintprec
VDC integer precision
is only supported for the CGM driver.
VDC integer precision for character
encoded CGM (only supported for
certain device types)
-chrvintprec
Parameter:
number_of_bits
number_of_bits
specifies
the VDC integer precision
for character encoded CGM
default:
20
Example:
-chrvintprec 32
-chrvintprec
gXconvert
System Description
is only supported for the CGM driver.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
10 Metafile Driver
178
coding of the output format parameter
-codingtype
Parameter:
coding
default:
default:
output coding
coding
specifies the coding of the output format parameter.
character for CGM driver
binary
for CGM driver
text
for CGM driver
binary
for DXF driver
text
for DXF driver
text
for CGM driver
text
for DXF driver
DXF: When using binary DXF files, the floating point numbers are
coded according to the IEEE (IEC) format. On host systems that do
not support this floating point format, a binary file type is not available.
Example:
-codingtype binary
or -colourmap
color mapping
Parameter:
filename [color_model color_value_extent]
[-gamma gamma_value ][-tolerance number_bit]
[r g b rm gm bm] | [c m y cm mm ym] |
[c m y k cm mm ym km]
filename
specifies the file that keeps the information of how the color mapping is
performed.
color_model
specifies the color model which is used
in the color mapping file.
RGB
RGB color model
CMY
CMY color model
CMYK
CMYK color model
color_value_extent
specifies the color value extent which
is used in the color mapping file.
1
defines the maximum color value
used. Usually values of 100, 255 or
1023 are used. The minimum color value is always 0.
...
-colormap
65535
-gamma gamma_value
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
color mapping
specifies a value for overall brightening or darkening of the graphics. Values larger than 1.0 will brighten the
image, values less than 1.0 will darken the graphics. When specifying
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
179
10 Metafile Driver
-gamma,
no individual mapping of colors is performed.
0.1
...
10.0
-tolerance number_bit
r g b rm gm bm
c m y cm mm ym
c m y k cm mm ym km
default:
specifies the tolerance for individual
mapping of colors. number_bit specifies how many low order bits are stripped (set to 0) from the input image.
After stripping, the pixel value is set to
the nearest color defined in the color
table (the "new" value). This reduces
the amount of colors in the image.
If color_model RGB has been selected,
it defines a color mapping for the RGB
color r g b to the new color rm gm bm.
If color_model CMY has been selected, it defines a color mapping for the
CMY color c m y to the new color cm
mm ym.
If color_model CMYK has been selected, it defines a color mapping for the
CMYK color c m y k to the new color
cm mm ym km.
none
Example: see -colormap description in Chapter 7.2, Configuring the
CXXPSCRI Driver, page 117.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
10 Metafile Driver
-colorprecision
180
or -colourprecisioncolor precision
color precision
Parameter:
precision_bits
precision_bits
specifies
the number of bits to be used
per red, green, blue part of a color.
1
...
15
default:
10
Sets the precision to represent colors internally.
Example:
-colorprecision 10
The value of -colorprecision is also used in the CGM driver to
specify the color value extent in the CGM file (0...2
precision_bits-1
).
text font
-font
Parameter:
text font
index name expansion
specifies the font index to be assigned.
specifies the name of the font.
specifies the expansion of the text.
index
name
expansion
any MONOTXT 1.0
default:
When drawing texts with text precision string ("hardware text"), the
AutoCAD DXF fonts can be used. For each font index in use, the name of
the AutoCAD font can be specified. Additionally, an expansion factor can
be specified which is applied to the current character expansion factor.
Example of using the AutoCAD font iso8 when font index 3 has been
selected. Also all text drawn with this font index is expanded by a factor
of 1.2:
-font 3 iso8 1.2
units of measurement
-inches
Parameter:
default:
unit
none
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as inches.
Example:
-inches
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
181
name of line type
10 Metafile Driver
name of line type (only supported for
certain device types)
-linetypename
Parameter:
index name
index name
1
2
3
4
5
specifies the name for a line type used
within the DXF file.
solid
dash
dot
dash-dot
dash-dot-dot
default:
see the example below
Each line type can have an individual name for DXF output.
Example:
-linetypename
-linetypename
-linetypename
-linetypename
-linetypename
1
2
3
4
5
solid
dash
dot
dash-dot
dash-dot-dot
-linetypename
line types
is only supported for the DXF driver.
use of line type (only supported for
certain device types)
-linetypes
Parameter:
linetype
linetype
no
yes
default:
no
-linetypes
gXconvert
System Description
selects the type of lines.
Simulates all standard line types DASH,
DOT, DASH-DOT and DASH-DOT-DOT by
small segments of solid lines. Therefore, the CGM files will get increased.
Standard line types for drawing lines
are used.
is only supported for the CGM driver.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
10 Metafile Driver
182
maximum color index
-maxcolindex
Parameter:
maximum_color_index
maximum_color_index
specifies
maximum color
index
the maximum color index
written to a CGM file.
default:
63
Example:
-maxcolindex 256
-maxcolindex
is only supported for the CGM driver.
message string
-message
Parameter:
string
specifies the string that is printed to
STDERR.
string
default:
message
none
Example:
-message "using standard CXXMETA"
or -millimetres
units of measurement
Parameter:
none
default:
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as millimeters.
-millimeters
unit
Example:
-millimeters
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
183
metafile
identifier
10 Metafile Driver
Metafile identifier
-mfidentifier
Parameter:
identifier_string
identifier_string
specifies
string used as Metafile iden-
tifier.
default:
""
Example:
-mfidentifier "CGM generator by GRAL-CGI"
picture name
picture names
-picnames
Parameter:
num_of_pic_name_string
num_of_pic_name_string specifies picture
""
default:
names.
Example:
-picnames 4 "Pic 1" "Pic 2" "Pic 3" "Pic 4"
output size
output size
-plotsizemode
Parameter:
plotsizemode
plotsizemode
bysize
specifies the source of the output size.
The output size is specified by with
-size.
byviewport
The output size is calculated from the
current device viewport which is active when the first graphics primitive is
drawn.. This will minimize paper waste.
default:
bysize
Using byviewport, the size data written to the output file is specified by
the size of the input file after the conversion process.
When converting files using metric scaling you should specify a
device using the maximum size that is expected to occur (e. g. A0)
and additionally specify -plotsizemode byviewport. This results
in output files that contain the desired size and you don't have to use
different devices. The disadvantage of this method is that abstract
(non-metric) images or abstract conversions (-mode abstract)
will be scaled to maximum size.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
10 Metafile Driver
184
resolution of the output device
-resolution
Parameter:
resolution
value unit
value
unit
dpi
dpm
dpmm
400 dpi
specifies the value of the resolution
specifies the unit of the resolution:
dots per inch
dots per meter
dots per millimeter
default:
If the scale mode is metric and no scale factor has been specified, the resolution is also used as the metric scale factor.
Example:
-resolution 40 dpmm
color table entry
-rgb
color table
Parameter:
color_index red green blue
color_index
color index to
red
color as red
0.0
be assigned
...
1.0
color as blue
blue
0.0
...
1.0
color as green
green
0.0
...
1.0
default:
none
Example:
-rgb 1 0.0 0.0 0.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
185
scaling mode
10 Metafile Driver
scaling mode (only supported for
certain device types)
-scalemode
Parameter:
scalemode
specifies the scaling mode.
abstract description
metric
description
scalemode
default:
metric
Example:
-scalemode metric
-scalemode
is only supported for the CGM driver.
For information about how to use line width mapping, refer to
Chapter 4.2.4, Line Width Mapping, page 97.
drawing area
size of the drawing area
-size
Parameter:
x_size y_size
specifies the size of the drawing area
in x-direction.
specifies the size ofthe drawing area in
y-direction.
x_size
y_size
default:
device-dependent
Example:
-size 297.3 210.2
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
10 Metafile Driver
186
subdevice
-subdevice
subdevice
Parameter:
subdeviceID
subdeviceID
deviceID
specifies the ID of the subdevice
first possible value
...
deviceID+9
last possible value
default:
none
Copies the default setup to the specified subdevice. Assignment of properties will affect only this subdevice.
Example:
-subdevice 7012
Each ID can only be used once.
VDC integer precision for clear text
CGM (only supported for certain
device types)
-txtvintprec
VDC integer precision
Parameter:
min_int max_int
min_int max_int
specifies
default:
min_int
max_int
-32767 32767
the VDC integer precision
for clear text CGM
minimum integer value
maximum integer value
Example:
-txtvintprec -2147483647 2147483647
-txtvintprec
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
is only supported for the CGM driver.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
187
integer precision
10 Metafile Driver
integer precision for clear text CGM
(only supported for certain device
types)
-txtintprec
Parameter:
min_int max_int
min_int max_int
specifies the integer precision for clear
min_int
max_int
-32767 32767
default:
text CGM
minimum integer value
maximum integer value
Example:
-txtintprec -2147483647 2147483647
-txtintprec
VDC extent
is only supported for the CGM driver.
dimension of VDC Extent (only
supported for certain device types)
-vdcext
Parameter:
vdc_xmin vdc_ymin vdc_xmax vdc_ymax
specifies the minimum VDC x-value
specifies the minimum VDC y-value
specifies the maximum VDC x-value
specifies the maximum VDC y-value
vdc_xmin
vdc_ymin
vdc_xmax
vdc_ymax
default:
(see -size)
These parameters are expressed as real values (for VDC type integer, as
well as real). If the VDC extent is specified, it is written to the CGM file,
for whatever reason the user did this.
If -vdcext has not been specified, the VDC extent written to CGM file is
evaluated by the specified size (see -size).
Example:
-vdcext 0 0 600 400
-vdcext
gXconvert
System Description
is only supported for the CGM driver.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
10 Metafile Driver
188
type of the VDC data (only supported
for certain device types)
-vdctype
Parameter:
vdctype
vdctype
integer
real
default:
VDC type
specifies the VDC type.
integer VDC
real VDC
device-dependent
Example:
-vdctype integer
Currently, only VDC type integer is supported!
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
189
10 Metafile Driver
10.3 Predefined Metafile Devices
A summary of predefined Metafile device IDs is given in Chapter 15.5,
Predefined Metafile Devices, page 342.
For a complete list of predefined configuration parameters, have a look into the
Metafile device configuration file CXXMETA. It is located by using either the environment variable CXXMETA or GTS_FONTS.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
11
190
Raster Driver
The CXXRAS driver supports several raster printer formats and as an extension
several raster image formats. It evaluates the environment variable CXXRAS in
order to search its configuration file. The name of the configuration file is
CXXRAS. The device IDs can be in the range of 8000 to 8999.
CXXRAS
Some driver devices are only available as an option!
11.1 Calling the CXXRAS Driver
physical output device
-device
Parameter:
deviceID manufacturer language model site
deviceID
8000
8010
physical output
device
must be multiple of 10.
used sequence
...
8990
manufacturer
language
model
site
name of the manufacturer of the output
device
language supported for the output device
model of the output device; for an
overview of all supported models see
Table 11-1
string to check site dependencies
default:
none
Assignments of properties will affect only the default setup until a subdevice is selected. Currently only deviceID and model are checked. manufacturer, language, and site must be present, but are reserved for future
use. A specific output device is selected via the parameter file.
Example:
-device 8000 epson lang epsonfx80 site
The device ID can only be used once.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
191
11 Raster Driver
Do not use the same parameters in the default section (between
-device and first -subdevice) and the subdevice section. This
may cause incorrect results when the same parameter is specified in
the command line.
Example:
-device 8070 manuf tif tiff site
-dithermode 0
-subdevice 8070
-dithermode 2 8
If
gXconvert
is called with -colormode original and
below the default section, the driver will not do a
dithering. Therefore, do not use the same parameter in the default
and the subdevice section. Use -keepcfg for finding the sequence
of the parameters used by the converter.
-dithermode 0
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
192
Table 11-1 gives an overview of all supported devices and their model values.
Device
Model
Canon Garo
garo
Epson FX 80
epsonfx80
Epson Stylus Color
stylusc
HP DeskJet
hpdeskjet
HP DeskJet 500 C
hpdeskjet500c
HP DeskJet 5x0 C
hpdeskjet5x0c
HP DeskJet 6x0 C
hpdeskjet6x0c
supported devices
HP LaserJet with PCL (hplaserjet and hplaserjetii are hplaserjet
using a reduced instruction set against hplaserjetiii or
hpdeskjet)
HP LaserJetII with PCL (hplaserjet and hplaserjetii are hplaserjetii
using a reduced instruction set against hplaserjetiii or
hpdeskjet)
HP LaserJetIII with PCL
hplaserjetiii
HP PaintJet
hppaintjet
HP PaintJet XL
hppaintjetxl
HP QuietJet
hpquietjet
IBM ProPrinter X24
ibmprox24
NEC P6/P7
necp6
Mannesmann Tally MT91 with emulation mode NEC P6/ necp6
7
Mannesmann Tally MT92C with emulation mode DeskJet
Color (must be used with -resolution 150 dpi or 300
dpi)
hppaintjet
Mannesmann Tally MT93/MT94 with emulation mode ibmprox24
IBM ProPrinter X24 (must be used with -outputformat
mt93)
Bitimage (additional printer format licence required)
bitimage
CalComp TechJet (RTL) (additional printer format techjet
licence required)
CALS 1 raster (additional printer format licence required) cals_1
CCRF raster (additional printer format licence required)
ccrf
CompuServe GIF (additional printer format licence gif
required)
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
193
11 Raster Driver
Encad Novajet (additional printer format licence novajet
required); (see the -colrep description later in this section
for the data formats used; the printer must be operated in
RTL emulation mode)
General raster (additional printer format licence required)
raster
HP DesignJet 650 C (additional printer format licence hprtl
required) ; (see the -colrep description later in this
section for the data formats used)
HP PCL3GUI
pcl3gui
HP RTL (additional printer format licence required); see hprtl
the -colrep description later in this section for the data
formats used)
Indigo output devices (additional printer format licence
required)
rst
JPEG (additional printer format licence required)
jpeg
PCL 5c
pcl5c
PCX (additional printer format licence required)
pcx
PDF raster (additional PDF format licence required)
pdf
PNG (additional printer format licence required)
png
PostScript raster (additional printer format licence raster
required)
PostScript raster (additional printer format licence ps
required)
SNI 2050 (additional printer format licence required)
sni2050
TIFF (additional printer format licence required)
tiff
Versatec compacted raster (additional printer format versatec
licence required)
Windows BMP (additional printer format licence bmp
required)
WFAX (additional printer format licence required)
wfax
X11 bitmap (additional printer format licence required)
xbm
XWD X11 window dump (additional printer format
licence required)
xwd
Table 11-1:
gXconvert
System Description
Supported Device Models
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
194
11.2 Configuring the CXXRAS Driver
The CXXRAS Driver evaluates the following environment variable:
CG08BWTHRESHOLD
environment
variable
This environment variable specifies a threshold that
is used when a b/w-raster is scaled down.
Possible values:
• 1...255
The result of the downscaling is more white
(low integer value) or more black (large integer
value).
• TRUE | true
The threshold that has been given by the input
module (TIFF, HP-RTL, ...) will be used.
• FALSE | false
A value of 243 is used (more black).
Default: FALSE
The remaining parameters for configuring the CXXRAS driver are given in alphabetical order.
parameters
Note that not every parameter is supported for all printer type
models. A listing of supported parameters sorted by printer type
models is given in Chapter 11.5, Supported Parameters Sorted by
Models, page 237.
ATA-compatible TIFF
-atacompatible
ATA-compatible
Parameter:
atacompatible
atacompatible
specifies whether to create ATA-compatible TIFF files.
yes
no
default:
no
The difference to TIFF G4-files created by default settings are:
• use the newsubfiletype tag
• don't use the tag planar configuration, min./max. sample value or fill
order
In order to conform to the ATA profile, the TIFF file has to contain an
image description. The text for the image description can be set by environment variable GRALIMGDSC. This environment variable is used independently of the -atacompatible setting. To conform to the ATA profile, the
string assigned to GRALIMGDSC must have a length of 33 characters, where
the 33rd character is a blank.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
195
11 Raster Driver
Example:
-atacompatible yes
background
background color (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-background
Parameter:
background
background
yes
no
default:
specifies wether a background color is
used.
A background color is used.
No background color is used.
no
In some cases it is useful to suppress a background color (e. g. a background color suitable for the terminals will waste ink on ink printers).
Example:
-background no
-background is not supported for the models wfax, xwd,
using -colrep grey10 or -colrep grey17.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
and when
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
196
cap style, i. e. the style of line ends
-capstyle
Parameter:
cap style
capstyle
specifies the style, see Figure 7-1, page
118.
The line is squared off at the endpoints
capstyle
butt
projecting
The line continues half a line width behind its endpoints and is squared off.
The line has round ends
round
triangular
The line ends in triangles
default:
none
If -capstyle is not specified or the style is not round, a device-dependent
cap style is used. A specific cap style is only used when
-widelines complex is specified.
Example:
-widelines complex
-capstyle round
Only -capstyle round is recognized for raster output.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
197
fixed cap style
11 Raster Driver
fixing the cap style
-capstylefix
Parameter:
capstylefix
capstylefix
yes
no
default:
specifies if cap style is fixed or allowed to be dynamic.
The cap style specified by -capstyle
is used.
The cap style is set dynamically according to cap style used in the input file.
yes
Example:
-capstylefix yes
color mapping
or -colourmap
color mapping
Parameter:
filename [color_model color_value_extent]
[-gamma gamma_value ][-tolerance number_bit]
[r g b rm gm bm] | [c m y cm mm ym] |
[c m y k cm mm ym km]
filename
specifies the file that keeps the information of how the color mapping is
performed.
color_model
specifies the color model which is used
in the color mapping file.
RGB
RGB color model
CMY
CMY color model
CMYK
CMYK color model
color_value_extent
specifies the color value extent which
is used in the color mapping file.
1
defines the maximum color value
used. Usually values of 100, 255 or
1023 are used. The minimum color value is always 0.
...
-colormap
65535
-gamma gamma_value
specifies a value for overall brightening or darkening of the graphics. Values larger than 1.0 will brighten the
image, values less than 1.0 will darken the graphics. When specifying
-gamma, no individual mapping of colors is performed.
0.1
...
10.0
-tolerance number_bit
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
specifies the tolerance for individual
mapping of colors. number_bit specifies how many low order bits are stripped (set to 0) from the input image.
After stripping, the pixel value is set to
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
198
r g b rm gm bm
c m y cm mm ym
c m y k cm mm ym km
default:
the nearest color defined in the color
table (the "new" value). This reduces
the amount of colors in the image.
If color_model RGB has been selected,
it defines a color mapping for the RGB
color r g b to the new color rm gm bm.
If color_model CMY has been selected, it defines a color mapping for the
CMY color c m y to the new color cm
mm ym.
If color_model CMYK has been selected, it defines a color mapping for the
CMYK color c m y k to the new color
cm mm ym km.
none
Example: see -colormap description in Chapter 7.2, Configuring the
CXXPSCRI Driver, page 117.
representation of color
-colrep
Parameter:
colrep
colrep
bw
color representation
specifies the color representation.
use black/white; only supported for
printer type model:
bmp
ccrf1
hplaserjet
hplaserjetii
hplaserjetiii
hpdeskjet
necp6
hpdeskjet500c
hppaintjetxl
hprtl2
pcl3gui
pcx
ps (Raster only PostScript output)
pdf (Raster only PDF output)
raster3
novajet4
stylusc
techjet
tiff
1.
2.
3.
4.
using 1 color plane, row by row mode
using 1 color plane; row by row mode
using 1 color plane, row by row mode
using 1 color plane, row by row mode
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
199
11 Raster Driver
grey10
use 10 shades of gray (effective resolution reduced by factor 3); only supported for printer type model:
hplaserjet
hplaserjetii
hplaserjetiii
hpdeskjet
grey17
use 17 shades of gray (effective resolution reduced by factor 4); only supported for printer type model:
hplaserjet
hplaserjetii
hplaserjetiii
hpdeskjet
grey256
use 256 shades of gray; only supported
for printer type model:
jpeg
tiff
hwcmyk
use 4 bit CMYK. For some RTL output devices the use of hwcmyk might
increase print speed compared to hwcol.Only supported for printer type
model:
hprtl
pcl3gui
techjet
hwcol
use the colors available on the device;
only supported for printer type model:
bmp
ccrf1
necp6
hpdeskjet500c2
hppaintjet3
hppaintjetxl
hprtl4
raster5
novajet6
stylusc
techjet
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
gXconvert
System Description
using 1 color plane; row by row mode
8 colors
8 colors with 180, 300 dpi; 16 colors with 90;150 dpi
using 3 color planes (RGB), row by row mode
using 3 color planes (RGB),row by row mode
using 4 color planes (BCMY), row by row mode. Note: The BCMY format is not available
for HP printers.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
200
index
use image with index colors; only supported for printer type model:
bmp
ccrf
hprtl
pcx
techjet
tiff
rgb
use RGB color model; only supported
for printer type model:
hprtl
jpeg
pcl3gui
ps (Raster only PostScript output)
pdf (Raster only PDF output)
techjet
tiff
default:
bw
Example:
-colrep
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
grey10
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
201
compression
11 Raster Driver
type of compression (only supported
for certain printer type models)
-compression
Parameter:
compression
compression
specifies which type of compression is
used.
adaptive tries to combine compression modes.
Thus, a better overall compression can
be achieved compared with using only
one compression mode. Only supported for printer type model:
hplaserjetiii
default
default compression. Only supported
for printer type model:
hplaserjetiii
deflate
deflates compression. Only supported
for printer type model:
pdf
g1
uses TIFF G1 (uncompressed). Depending on -colrep, the raster data within
the TIFF file is a bitmap (bw), a
grayscale bytemap (grey256) or a color bytemap (index). Only supported
for printer type model:
tiff
g4
lzw
uses TIFF G4. Only supported for
printer type model:
tiff (bitmap only)
pdf (bitmap only)
uses TIFF LZW. Only supported for
printer type model:
tiff
pdf
packbits
uses Packbits compression. Only supported for printer type model:
tiff
hplaserjetiii
default:
device-dependent
Example:
-compression g4
For TIFF output the compression modes g1, g4 (bitmaps only),
packbits and lzw are supported.
For laserjet PCL-driver the compression modes packbits and
adaptive are supported.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
202
number of copies (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-copies
Parameter:
number
specifies the number of copies.
number
default:
copies
1
The generation of copies uses a feature of the output device. The
device needs to be equipped with enough memory to hold the
complete output data once. Otherwise, messages like not enough
memory may appear on the output device's display.
-copies is only supported for the HP RTL driver. The option is not
supported for NovaJet RTL and TechJet RTL.
cutter (only supported for certain
printer type models)
-cutter
Parameter:
cutter
cutter
cutter
yes
no
enables or disables the automatic cutter
enable the automatic cutter
disable the automatic cutter
default:
none
If -cutter is not specified, there will be no disable or enable command
written to the output file. Therefore, no cutter setting will be performed.
is only supported for the HP RTL and the PCL3GUI
driver. The option is not supported for NovaJet RTL and TechJet
RTL.
-cutter
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
203
dither mode
11 Raster Driver
dither mode (only supported for
certain printer type models)
Parameter:
dithermode [matrixsize]
dithermode
specifies the algorithm used for dithering.
0
no dithering
1
dithering by Floyd-Steinberg algorithm
2
For -dithermode 2 matrixsize can
be defined. matrixsize can be 2,4 or
8 (default 4).
3
8x8 dither matrix
4
8x8 dither matrix
0
default:
Dithering is used to simulate colors and shades of gray on devices with
limited color facility (8 or 16 colors, b/w). With dithering up to 256 colors
can be displayed. See Chapter 11.4, Dithering (Color Simulation), page
235, for a detailed description of the dithering funtionality.
-dithermode
-dithermode cannot be used along with -colrep grey10 or
-colrep grey17. If colors appear too dark or too light on the
output device, use -gamma in order to modify the color table.
-dithermode is not supported for devices that use -colrep index,
-colrep grey256, -colrep rgb.
Example:
-dithermode 1
fduplex setting (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-duplex
Parameter:
duplex
specifies the duplex setting.
duplex
ON
OFF
none
default:
OFF
Writes the variable DUPLEX to the PJL header. If none is specified, the variable is not written.
-duplex
gXconvert
System Description
is only supported for the PCL3GUI printer model.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
204
form length (only supported for certain
printer type models)
-formlength
Parameter:
form length
length
specifies the length of the form in a
printer.
length
-1.0
default:
For large pictures a form length of at least the picture size in the direction
of paper motion must be specified. Otherwise, the printer will advance the
paper when it reaches its default form length. If a form length less or equal
to zero is specified, no form length command will be written to the output
file.
Example:
-formlength 10.5
-formlength is only supported for printer type models:
necp6 (the form length is rounded up to inches/4)
ibm (the form length is rounded up to inches/8)
color brightness correction
-gamma
Parameter:
gamma
gamma correction
sets the color brightness correction.
gamma
-1.0 <= gamma < 0.0
correction by black value reduction on
(CMY)K output values (see further explanation).
0.0 < gamma <= 10.0
correction on RGB input values (see
further explanation)
default:
1.0
This parameter is used to lighten or darken the image (also called gamma
correction or brightness/lightness correction). It modifies the color table
when using dithering.
There are two possibilities of modifying the color lightness:
• Correction on RGB input values (0.0 < gamma <= 10.0)
The gamma correction factor is used to lighten or darken colors before
starting dithering. The lightness value is applied to the color table as
follows:
red' = red(1/value)
green' = green(1/value)(0.0 <= red, green, blue <= 1.0)
blue' = blue(1/value)
Therefore, a lightness value less than 1.0 will lighten colors, a value
greater than 1.0 will darken colors, since larger red, green, blue
components mean lighter colors. Reasonable values are device-dependent.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
205
11 Raster Driver
•
Correction by black value reduction (-1.0 <= gamma < 0.0)
The black value reduction factor is used to lighten colors by reducing
the amount of black. In order to describe the effects of this color modification, it is necessary to explain the internal color conversion
process:
RGB input values are converted to CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow,
key / black) values using the operation:
(c', m' ,y') = (1-R, 1-G, 1-B)
assuming that the internal RGB values range between 0 and 1, with 1
being the lightest value.
From the intermediate (c', m', y') value a key / black component is
extracted using the minimum color value of these (c', m', y') components. The reason for such a black removal is to gain a good black /
gray reproduction. The key value is calculated using:
k' = min (c', m', y')
Then, the final CMY values are corrected by:
(C, M, Y) = (c' - k', m' - k', y' - k')
Finally, the resulting key value is processed using the gamma correction value:
K = k'(-1/value)
Therefore, the specified gamma correction value reduces the black
value in the output file. A value of -1.0 will use the full black range.
A value larger than -1.0 (but less than 0.0) will lighten the resulting
output.
Usually, a value larger than -1.0 (and less than 0.0) will give better
color shade transitions, especially for dark colors. But, as explained
before, the best gamma value might only be gained by trial and error.
Example:
-gamma 0.6
The optimum color correction factor depends on the dither mode,
the toner or ink used in the device, the output material, and sometimes even on the viewing conditions. In order to evaluate the
appropriate value, perform test conversions.
unit
units of measurement
-inches
Parameter:
default:
none
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as inches.
Example:
-inches
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
206
initialization files (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-initfiles
Parameter:
initialization file
startfile betweenfile endfile
specifies the file whose content is inserted once at the beginning of the output file.
specifies the file whose content is inserted between two images. For the
PostScript raster driver betweenfile
is written prior to each image inside
the PostScript file.
specifies the file whose content is inserted at the end of the output file.
startfile
betweenfile
endfile
- - default:
If the name of any of these files is specified as -, the default values will be
inserted at that position to the output file. If none is specified, nothing is
inserted at that position. This may result in incorrect output files. If a file
is not found with the given name, it is searched in the fonts directory
(environment variable GTS_FONTS).
If a command must be sent prior to each image, this command has
to be added to startfile and betweenfile.
If a file is specified, certain commands (that are included otherwise) are not
written to the output file:
• PCL drivers:
startfile:
betweenfile:
endfile:
•
Reset (<ESC>E)
Formfeed
Reset (<ESC>E)
HP RTL driver:
startfile
(inserted at beginning of each picture):
Reset (<ESC>E)
Enter HP-GL/2 (<ESC>%0B)
Begin Picture (BP5,1)
betweenfile
(inserted at end of each picture):
Enter HP-GL/2 (<ESC>%0B)
Page advance (PG;)
Replot (RPn;) (if -copies is
Reset (<ESC>E)
used)
(inserted at end of each file):
By default, nothing is added only at the end of the file.
Encad-RTL and TechJet-RTL driver:
startfile (inserted at beginning of each picture):
endfile
•
Reset (<ESC>E)
betweenfile
(inserted at end of each picture):
Reset (<ESC>E)
(inserted at end of each file):
By default, nothing is added only at the end of the file.
endfile
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
207
11 Raster Driver
•
PostScript raster driver:
The PostScript raster driver has no default instructions which are
written when - is specified as filename. Therefore,
-initfiles - - - and -initfiles none none none will create
the same PostScript raster output.
Example:
-initfiles init.pjl - reset.pjl
-initfiles is only supported for
LaserJet
DeskJet PCL
PaintJet
DeskJet PCl driver
HP RTL
Encad-NovaJet RTL
CALCOMP-Techjet RTL driver
PostScript Raster
form feed
initial form feed commands (only
supported for certain printer type
models)
-initformfeed
Parameter:
formfeed
formfeed
normal
0
1
2
default:
printer type models:
specifies the form feed commands to
be added.
A single form feed command is added
for monochrome output, no form feed
command is added for color output.
No form feed command is added.
One form feed command is added.
Two form feed commands are added.
0
Example:
-initformfeed 2
Some Versatec output devices of the CE series may need an initial
form feed before color output. Otherwise, they rewind the paper up
to a position where they received the last form feed, possibly skipping previous outputs.
-initformfeed
gXconvert
System Description
is only supported for Versatec raster models.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
208
JPEG output quality
-jpegoptions
Parameter:
JPEG output
quality smoothing progressive
quality
0
specifies the quality of the image (and
thus the compression ratio).
low quality with highest compression
ratio
...
100
smoothing
0
best quality with lowest compression
ratio
specifies how the image is to be smoothed prior to compression.
no smoothing
...
100
progressive
0
1
75 0 0
maximum smoothing
specifies whether a „progressive JPEG
file“ is created.
No „progressive JPEG file“ is created
A „progressive JPEG file“ is created.
default:
A „progressive JPEG file“ can be displayed in multiple passes. The user
will first see the image in low resolution. Then, more details are added to
the image. Otherwise, the user will see that the image is shown from top to
bottom in one pass. The effect of a „progressive JPEG file“ may not be
visible if it is loaded fast enough (from disk or fast network).
Example:
-jpegoptions 75 0 1
logical resolution
-lunits
Parameter:
logical resolution
value unit
value
unit
dpi
dpm
dpmm
specifies the value of the logical resolution
specifies the unit of the logical resolution
dots per inch
dots per meter
dots per millimeter
default:
device-dependent
The logical resolution and the device resolution may be different. -lunits
is only supported for the model sni2050 where the resolution of the
command image block origin is defined (default 1800).
Example:
-lunits 1800 dpi
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
209
used material
11 Raster Driver
type of media used for the printing
(only supported for certain printer type
models)
-material
Parameter:
material
material
0
2
4
7
100
default:
specifies the used material.
Materials supported by Canon Garo
driver depend on the used printer. See
Chapter 11.8, Canon Garo Driver,
page 251 for details.
Materials supported by HP DesignJet
130 are:
plain paper
coated paper
transparency
photo paper
heavy weight coated and proofing
matte
none
Table 11-2 shows some tested combinations of resolutions, materials, intensity
and qualities for HP DesignJet 130
Resolution
Material
Intensity
Quality
Note
300x300
0
2
DRAFT
fast output; colors are
very light
300x300
0
4
NORMAL
600x600
2
4
NORMAL
at least coated paper
must be mounted
600x600
0
4
HIGH
much color is used
Table 11-2:
Valid Combinations for the HP DesignJet 130
Example:
-material 4
-material is only supported for the pcl3gui and garo printer type
models.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
210
picture block size (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-maxdata
Parameter:
size
specifies the maximum size of a picture block.
size
default:
block size
device-dependent
Example:
-maxdata 16
-maxdata is
ccrf
only supported for the following printer type models:
1
enables disk buffering for CCRF Library. -maxdata 0 is not allowed to
disable disk buffering. -maxdata must
then be removed from CXXRAS. If
-maxdata 1 is specified, the setting of
environment variable CR_IDISK is
ignored.
sni2050
4
specifies the maximum size of data (in
KB) for command write image 2
...
64
32
1
default:
tiff
specifies the number of raster lines per
strip
...
quality setting (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-maxdetail
Parameter:
quality setting
quality
quality
ON
OFF
none
default:
OFF
Writes the variable MAXDETAIL to the PJL header. If none is specified the variable
is not written. This option might be used along with -quality.
-maxdetail is only supported for the PCL3GUI printer model.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
211
nesting width
11 Raster Driver
nesting width (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-maxnestwidth
Parameter:
maxnestwidth
maxnestwidth
default:
-1
Specifies the nesting width.
If the width of the current RTL image is less than maxnestwidth, the RTL
file can be nested by DesignJets built in queuing/nesting facility.
Example:
-maxnestwidth 842
-maxnestwidth
can only be used with HP RTL driver and TechJet
RTL driver.
color merging
merge colors (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-merge
Parameter:
merge
merge
enables or disables the merging of colors.
no
disables color merging.
yes
enables color merging.
cmy_bits [on | off] [always]
specifies a 3-digit number giving the
number of bits used for representing
cyan (first digit), magenta (second digit), and yellow (third digit).
The flag on|off specifies if merging
should be on or off upon start of conversion. Depending on the input file
merging can be switched on/off dynamically
If the flag always is specified, merging is fixed to the specified value.
no
default:
Usually graphics primitives will completely overlay everything that has
been drawn earlier in the same place. Merging gives the possibility to mix
the color of the actual primitive with the color of a primitive drawn earlier.
In this case overlaying yellow with magenta will result in red. Merging is
performed by bitwise OR-ing colors which are represented in a CMY color
model.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
212
The following drivers can be used for merging:
• all drivers which can perform dithering (except dithering by
-colrep grey10 and -colrep grey17)
• all drivers which can handle up to 256 different colors (TIFF,
PCX, XWD). If C + M + Y is less or equal to 256, no dithering is
necessary and the colors returned from the merging process are
used directly. If C + M + Y is greater than 256, an additional dithering down to the eight primary colors is performed.
By default, -merge yes will use 3 bits for cyan, 3 bits for magenta and 2
bits for yellow. Therefore, 256 different colors can be generated.
-merge yes is equivalent to -merge 332, specifying the number of bits
per CMY component.
Consider
the
following
restrictions
when
specifiying
-merge cmy_bits:
1 <=C, M, Y <= 8;
C + M + Y <= 16 or C = M = Y = 8
If dithering is necessary, -merge will automatically enable dithering with
-dithermode 2 8. Another type of dithering can be used by specifying
-dithermode with a different type.
Example of specifying another type of dithering:
-merge 555
-dithermode 3
Shades of gray can only be generated if C = M = Y. But C + M + Y > 8 will
need twice as much memory for dithering as C + M + Y <= 8.
simulating
shades of gray
Example of simulating shades of gray:
-merge 222
-merge 555 is equivalent to -merge 555 on.
With -merge 555 off, the
driver is prepared for merging, but will start by overlaying previous colors.
This can be used with the layout facility of gXconvert.
Example:
-merge 555 on or
-merge 555
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
213
message
11 Raster Driver
message string
-message
Parameter:
string
specifies the string that is printed to
STDERR.
string
default:
none
Example:
-message "using standard CXXRAS"
microweave
microweave feature (only supported
for certain printer type models)
-microweave
Parameter:
microweave
microweave
yes
specifies whether microweaving is
switched on or off.
increases print quality, but also increases print time
no
default:
no
Example:
-microweave no
-microweave is only supported for the stylusc printer type model.
unit
or -millimetres
units of measurement
Parameter:
none
default:
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as millimeters.
-millimeters
Example:
-millimeters
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
214
minimum line width
-minlinewidth
Parameter:
min_width
specifies the minimum line width in
pixel.
min_width
default:
line width
0
-minlinewidth may be used for output devices which use a defined reso-
lution but that cannot output single pixels or thin lines continuously. In this
case, -minlinewidth 3 should be appropriate.
Example:
-minlinewidth 2
physical printer model (only supported
for certain printer type models)
-model
Parameter:
model
specifies the physical printer model for
which the output has to be created
model
default:
physical printer
mode
no default
Example:
-model w8400
is only supported by model garo. For the specified model,
the file $GARORESOURCE/model.cfg must be available.
-model
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
215
page orientation
11 Raster Driver
page orientation (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-orientation
Parameter:
orientation
orientation
NONE
specifies the page orientation.
does
not
output
the
Page orientation command
0
portrait
1
landscape
2
reverse portrait
3
reverse landscape
0 for models hplaserjet, hplaserjetii,
default:
hplaserjetiii, hpdeskjet, pcl5c
none for models hppaintjet, hppaintjetxl,
hpdeskjet500c, hpdeskjet5x0c, hpdeskjet6x0c
orientation
is
used
in
the
HP-PCL
command
Logical Page Orientation (ESC&l#O).
Example:
-orientation 0
-orientation is
hplaserjet
hplaserjetiii
hplaserjetiii
hpdeskjet
pcl5c
hppaintjet
hppaintjetxl
hpdeskjet500c
hpdeskjet5x0c
hpdeskjet6x0c
gXconvert
System Description
only supported for the printer type models:
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
216
output formats (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-outputformat
Parameter:
format
specifies the output format.
mt93
printer type model ibmprox24; this
must be used with Mannesmann Tally
MT93/94 printers in IBM ProPrinter
X24E emulation mode
mki
printer type model rst; Indigo MK-I
format
mkii
printer type model rst; Indigo
MK-II format
binary
printer type model sni2050; binary
format
translib printer type model sni2050; ASCII
format TRANSLIB
intel
printer type model tiff; TIFF with Intel format
motorola printer type model tiff; TIFF with
Motorola format
auto
printer type model tiff; TIFF with
hardware-dependent format
format
default:
output format
none
Example:
-outputformat mkii
page size (PostScript raster only)
-pagesize
Parameter:
page size
width height
specifies the width of the page (in units
of 72 dpi)
specifies the height of the page (in
units of 72 dpi)
width
height
0 0
default:
The values are specified in units of 72 dpi. If width and height are both
specified to 0, the page size is automatically calculated from the image
extent. This can be used for output devices with roll media. Output devices
with sheet media might need fixed values to select different paper formats.
Page sizes unknown to the printer may activate the manual feeder.
Example (paper size A4):
-pagesize 595 841.
-pagesize
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
is only supported for PostScript and PDF raster.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
217
paper format
11 Raster Driver
paper size (only supported for PCL
drivers)
-paperformat
Parameter:
format
format
NONE
1
2
3
6
26
27
80
81
90
91
default:
specifies the paper size that is to be
used by the printer:
does not output Paper Size command.
Executive
Letter
Legal
Ledger
A4
A3
Monarch
Com-10
International DL
International C5
NONE
For PCL devices (HP LaserJet, HP PaintJet, HP DeskJet) the PCL
command Paper Size is issued with the same parameter as specified by -paperformat.
See your printer's manual to find out which values of format are
supported.
-paperformat
is only supported for PCL drivers.
Example:
-paperformat 26
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
218
options for the PCL3GUI output (only
supported for certain printer type
models)
-pcl3guioptions
PCL3GUI output
Parameter:
intensitylevel photocolor planes
intensitylevel
specifies the intensity level
2
4
256
photocolor
0
1
planes
1
4
6
of the colors:
two intensity levels are used (100%,
0%)
four intensity levels are used (100%,
66%, 33%, 0%)
used for contone output
activates or deactivates photocolor for
-colrep hwcmyk:
off
on; light cyan and light magenta are
used
specifies the number of planes:
b/w or contone output
CMYK output
CMYKcm output
default:
none
Not all possible values may be combined freely or are supported by the
printer. Also -colrep must be taken into account. The following example
shows possible combinations.
Examples:
b/w output (requires 6 planes):
-colrep bw
-pcl3guioptions 4 1 6
-dithermode 2 8
color output:
-colrep hwcmyk
-pcl3guioptions 4 1 6
-dithermode 2 8
color output with fixed dithering mode:
-colrep rgb
-pcl3guioptions 4 1 6
contone output:
-colrep rgb
-pcl3guioptions 256 0 1
-pcl3guioptions
is only supported for the pcl3gui printer type
model.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
219
PDF profile
11 Raster Driver
specifies the characteristics of the PDF
files to be created; only available for
model pdf
-pdfprofile
Parameter:
profilename
profilename
name of the PDF profile to be used.
default:
none
The PDF profiles are specified in the PDF profile configuration file
pdfprofile.cfg. For more information about PDF profiles see Chapter
3.4, PDF Profile, page 71.
Example:
-pdfprofile PDFA1B
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
220
source of output size (only supported
for certain device types)
-plotsizemode
output size
Parameter:
plotsizemode
plotsizemode
specifies
bypicture
the source of the output size.
uses the minimum bounding box of all
drawn graphics primitives. If the output image has white margins, the margins are dropped and the image
contents are moved to the left and
down. This is avoided by specifying
minpicture.
The output size is specified by -size.
bysize
byviewport
mapped
uses the extent of the picture that has
been drawn.
uses the smallest metric paper size
(A4, B3, etc.) which can keep the picture’s extent. The extent of the picture
is evaluated from the displayed VDC
extent of the picture, an additionally
applied scale factor and the scale mode. Note that drawing abstract pictures
will fit the picture to the maximum device extent.
minpicture
drops only the right and the top white
margins.
default:
model-dependent
Usually the size of each output is specified by -size. When used with
gXconvert, the size of the outputs can be reduced automatically for some
models. To use this feature the size specified by -size should be large
enough to fit the whole pictures which will be generated.
Please refer to Chapter 11.5, Supported Parameters Sorted by Models,
page 237, for a reference of options recognized by the various models.
Example:
-plotsizemode byviewport
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
221
PNG file
11 Raster Driver
options for creating PNG files
-pngoptions
Parameter:
compression interlace
compression
specifies the compression
-1
default compression
0
no compression
ratio
...
default:
9
best compression
0
1
specifies if interlacing is used
no interlace
interlace
5
interlace
default:
0
Example:
-pngoptions 9 1
print quality
print quality (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-quality
Parameter:
quality
specifies the print quality
quality
DRAFT
NORMAL
HIGH
BEST
STRING
default:
none
The specified value, if not "none", is written into the PJL header and as an
Escape Sequence into the PCL data. If none is specified, no quality
command is written into the PJL header or PCL data.
For the garo driver, the value of STRING is used to select the corresponding output table. The possible values depend on the printer, that is
used. See Chapter 11.8, Canon Garo Driver, page 251 for further details.
Example:
-quality HIGH
-quality
is only supported for pcl3gui and garo printer type
models.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
222
resolution of the output device (only
supported for certain printer type
models)
-resolution
Parameter:
value unit
value
unit
default:
resolution
dpi
dpm
dpmm
300 dpi
specifies the value of the resolution
specifies the unit of the resolution:
dots per inch
dots per meter
dots per millimeter
The given value of the resolution is mapped onto the nearest available resolution of the device.
Example:
-resolution 150 dpi
-resolution is only supported for the printer type models listed in
Table 11-3.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
223
11 Raster Driver
Printer Type Model
Available Resolution
hplaserjet
75, 100, 150, 300, 600 dpi (if -colrep grey10
or -colrep grey17 is specified, the resolution
must be 300 or 600 dpi)
hplaserjetii
75, 100, 150, 300, 600 dpi
hplaserjetiii
75, 100, 150, 300, 600 dpi
hpdeskjet
775, 100, 150, 300, 600 dpi
hpdeskjet500c
75, 150, 300, dpi
necp6
180, 360 dpi
hppaintjet
90, 150, 180, 300 dpi
hppaintjetxl
90, 150, 180, 300 dpi
garo
depends on the used printer
tiffg4
any resolution
xwd
any resolution
bitimage
any resolution
wfax
any resolution
sni2050
any resolution
hprtl
any resolution
jpeg
any resolution
novajet
any resolution
Table 11-3:
gXconvert
System Description
-resolution:
Supported Printer Type Models
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
224
record format for VMS
-rms
VMS record
Parameter:
formstrings
formstrings
default:
specifies the strings that specifie the
record format. Up to five strings formatted as keyword=value can be specified.
rfm=udf ctx=stm
Example:
-rms rfm=stmlf
-rms rfm=udf ctx=stm
-rms rfm=fix bls=512 mrs=512
-rms should only be used by advanced VMS users. The formstrings are
passed to open() without any checking. Not all combinations of RMS
parameters will open output files correctly.
Generating output files on remote network devices may result in
incorrect output files.
rotation
-rotate
Parameter:
rotation
rotation
rotation
0
90
specifies whether the graphics has to
be rotated.
no rotation
rotation by 90°
0
default:
For unrotated graphics on real output devices (printers), the x-axis is
parallel to the direction of paper motion. For graphics formats like TIFF
the unrotated x-axis will point to the right.
Example:
-rotate 90
Only values 0 and 90 are supported! The gXconvert’s command
line option -rotate does not change the value of -rotate specified
in CXXRAS.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
225
drawing area
11 Raster Driver
-size
Parameter:
x_size
y_size
x_offs
y_offs
default:
size and position of the drawing area
(only supported for certain printer type
models)
x_size y_size [x_offs y_offs]
specifies the size of the drawing area
in x-direction.
specifies the size ofthe drawing area in
y-direction.
specifies the offset of the graphics origin in x-direction.
specifies the offset of the graphics origin in y-direction.
device-dependent
Example:
-size 297.3 210.2
For printer type model hppaintjet, hppaintjetxl and hpdeskjet500c
an additional positive offset x_offs y_offs of the unrotated picture can be
specified. This effect is measured from a device-dependent origin which
sometimes is outside of the printable area. Therefore, it may be necessary
to specify a positive offset to get an unclipped picture. Pictures generated
by -size x y or -size x y 0 0 will start at a device-dependent position
within the printable area. Sometimes it is possible to increase the drawing
area by specifying a device-dependent offset which lets the picture start at
the beginning of the printable area.
It depends on the printer type model whether the offset specification
is availablea.
a. Chapter 11.5, Supported Parameters Sorted by Models, page 237
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
226
The model bitimage is configured by the configuration file cgbit.dat.
Additionally, the environment variable EUM_FILES must point to the directory where the file cgbit.dat is located.
bitimage
The structure of this file is as follows:
first line: integer value specifying the width of the drawing area in
pixels
second line: integer value specifying the height of the drawing area in
pixels
third line: float value specifying the width of the drawing area in
inches
fourth line: float value specifying the height of the drawing area in
inches
Example of cgbit.dat:
600
400
12.5
10.0
When cgbit.dat is used, no size, resolution or rotation should be specified in the configuration file CXXRAS. Otherwise, the values specified in
cgbit.dat will be overwritten. But at least -device and -subdevice
must be present.
size of rasterization buffer (only
supported for certain printer type
models)
-stripsize
Parameter:
rasterization
buffer
size
size
specifies the size of the buffer used for
the internal rasterization. This value is
specified in KB.
default:
512
Increasing the buffer size will speed up the rasterization process. A size of
0 will use the minimum buffer size that can be used.
Example:
-stripsize 4096
-stripsize is not supported for the printer type models epsonfx80
and .ibmprox24 without output format mt93.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
227
subdevice
11 Raster Driver
subdevice
-subdevice
Parameter:
subdeviceID
subdeviceID
deviceID
specifies the ID of the subdevice
first possible value
...
deviceID+9 last possible value
default:
none
Copies the default setup to the specified subdevice. Assignment of properties will affect only this subdevice.
Example:
-subdevice 8001
Each ID can only be used once.
input source
input source (only supported for
certain printer type models)
-tray
Parameter:
tray
specifies the input source for the print
media. Possible values for the HP DesignJet 130 are:
tray
AUTOSELECT
TRAY1
ROLL1
REARPATH
MANUALFEED
none
default:
none
Writes the variable MEDIASOURCE to the PJL header. If none is specified, the variable is not written.
Examples:
-tray ROLL1
-tray
gXconvert
System Description
is only supported for the pcl3gui printer type model.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
228
unidirectional printing (only supported
for certain printer type models)
-unidirectional
unidirectional
output
Parameter:
unidirectional
unidirectional
specifies
yes
no
default:
whether unidirectional printing is used.
uses unidirectional printing. This will
increase print quality, but also increase
print time.
does not use unidirectional printing.
yes
-unidirectional
stylusc.
is only supported for the printer type model
Example:
-unidirectional yes
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
229
11 Raster Driver
use of PCL command source raster
width (only supported for printer type
models
hpdeskjet5x0c
and
hpdeskjet6x0c)
-usesrw
Parameter:
flag [width]
flag
yes
no
default:
yes
specifies the width in current units
(millimeters or inches) for which raster data should be transferred,
when the source raster width command is not used.
width
default:
flag specifies if the PCL command
source raster width should be used.
The PCL command source raster
width is used.
The PCL command source raster is not
used.
as specified with -size
Some PCL-printers can use a larger printable area if the PCL
command source raster width is not used. But when not using the
command, it may be necessary to send raster data for the complete
width of the paper sheet to make sure that no black margins are
added by the printer. So a width should be specified that is large
enough for the currently selected sheet.
Example A4-printer (210 mm sheet width)::
-size 280.0 203.2
-rotate 0
-usesrw no 210
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
-vmodel
230
Versatec model
Versatec model
[vmodel_name] |
[nplanes resolution maxscan ppscan] |
[cseq resolution maxscan ppscan]
vmodel_name
specifies the Versatec model and its
characteristics (optional).
nplanes
specifies the number of color planes
1
single plane monochrome (k)
3
three color planes (ymc)
4
four color planes (kcmy)
maxscan
specifies the maximum number of
scan lines. For devices with unlimited
number of scan lines, set maxscan to
-1.
ppscan
specifies the number of pixels per scan
line. This must be a multiple of 8.
cseq
specifies the sequence of the color
planes.
k
single plane monochrome
ymc
thermal transfer output device with
3-pass color donor roll; three color planes, yellow-magenta-cyan
ymck
thermal transfer output device with
4-pass color donor roll; four color planes, yellow-magenta-cyan-black
kcmy
color electrostatic output device; four
color planes, black-cyan-magenta-yellow
resolution
resolution of device in dots per inch
default:
none
Selects a Versatec model for which the output is generated and specifies a
Versatec model that is not included in the Versatec library.
There are various ways to specify the model or the characteristics of a
model. The easiest way is to specify the model name.
Parameter:
Example:
-vmodel v80
-vmodel ce3444
In this case, the characteristics of the model are searched in several locations. At first, an internal table is searched for the model name.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
231
11 Raster Driver
Currently this table keeps the models listed in Table 11-4.
Series Name
vmodel_name
V80 series:
v80 v81 v82
8200 series (200 dpi)
8222 8224 8236 8242 8272
7000 series (200 dpi)
7222 7224 7225 7236 7244
7000 series (400 dpi)
7422 7424 7425 7436 7444
Color wide output device series
ecp42 ecp42m
CE-3000 Color series (200 dpi)
ce3224 ce3224m ce3225 ce3225m ce3236
ce3236m ce3244 ce3244m
CE-3000 Color series (400 dpi)
ce3424 ce3424m ce3425 ce3425m ce3436
ce3436m ce3444 ce3444m
Spectrum series (200 dpi)
c2552 c2552m c2562 c2562m
Spectrum series (400 dpi)
c2558 c2558m c2568 c2568m
Thermal output device:
The following scheme for model names is
used to indicate which donor roll is being
used.
c27n6
3-pass color donor roll
c27n6a
4-pass color donor roll
c27n6m
monochrome donor roll
Thermal output device with A size paper
c2736 c2736a c2736m
Thermal output device with B size paper
c2756 c2756a c2756m
Thermal output device with A4 size paper
c2726 c2726a c2726m
Thermal output device with A3 size paper
c2766 c2766a c2766m
Thermal output device with special B size paper
c2776 c2776a c2776m
Thermal output device with special A3 size paper
c2786 c2786a c2786m
Firebird series
8836_2 8836_4
Aurora output device series:
For the 24 inch output device, 24 in the
name indicates that the output device was
installed with ANSI output width. 25 indicates that the output device was installed
with ISO output width.
in the name indicates 3-pass color output.
No suffix indicates normal 4-pass color
output.
s
Aurora output device (200 dpi)
gXconvert
System Description
8924-2
8925-2
8936-2
8944-2
8954-2
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
8924-2s
8925-2s
8936-2s
8944-2s
8954-2m
8924-2m
8925-2m
8936-2m
8944-2m
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
232
Series Name
vmodel_name
Aurora output device (400 dpi)
8924-4
8925-4
8936-4
8944-4
8954-4
8600 series output devices
For the 24 inch output device, 24 in the
name indicates that the output device was
installed with ANSI output width. 25 indicates that the output device was installed
with ISO output width.
8600 output device (200 dpi)
8624 8625 8636
8600 output device (400 dpi)
8624hr 8625hr 8636hr
HOPI 18
8840C_ap 8840C_al 8840C_bp
8840C_bl8840C_cp 8840C_cl 8840C_aal
8840C_aap 8840C_bal 8840C_bap
8840C_cal 8840C_cap 8840C_a4l
8840C_a4p 8840C_a3l 8840C_a3p
8840C_a2l 8840C_a2p
HOPI 24
8840D_ap 8840D_al 8840D_bp 8840D_bl
8840D_cp 8840D_cl 8840D_dp 8840D_dl
8840D_aap 8840D_aal 8840D_bap
8840D_bal 8840D_cap 8840D_cal
8840D_dap 8840D_dal 8840D_a4p
8840D_a4l 8840D_a3p 8840D_a3l
8840D_a2p 8840D_a2l 8840D_a1p
8840D_a1l
Blaser (XEROX 8810)
8810_ap 8810_al 8810_bp 8810_a4p
8810_a4l 8810_a3p
8924-4s
8925-4s
8936-4s
8944-4s
8954-4m
8924-4m
8925-4m
8936-4m
8944-4m
Table 11-4:
Versatec Output Device Models
If new models are introduced by Xerox, the model name may not be in this
table. Therefore, a file which keeps the characteristics of the Versatec
models is searched. At first, the environment variable VMODEL is evaluated.
Then, a file vmodel.dat is searched in the current directory. On UNIX,
finally /usr/lib/vgs/vmodel.dat is searched. Usually, this file is delivered with the Versatec library and may contain the latest models.
The Versatec library is not required for this driver. If the model name is not
found in either location, an error message is printed out and the driver is
not available. Then the characteristics must be specified directly (see
above).
For color output, at least cyan, magenta and yellow must be specified.
Recommended color sequences are:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
233
11 Raster Driver
Example:
for model ce3444:
-vmodel ce3444 or
-vmodel 4 400 -1 16832 or
-vmodel kcmy 400 -1 16832
for model c2736:
-vmodel c2736 or
-vmodel 3 300 2625 2432 or
-vmodel ymc 300 2625 2432
for model c2755m:
-vmodel c2756m or
-vmodel 1 300 4425 3200
-vmodel k 300 4425 3200
line width simulation
or
mode of wide line simulation
-widelines
Parameter:
widelines
widelines
simple
complex
default:
specifies the line type and line width.
simple, but fast line width simulation.
No line styles can be specified.
more complex line width simulation.
-capstyle round can be specified.
simple
Example:
-widelines complex
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
234
11.3 Predefined Raster Devices
A summary of predefined raster device IDs is given in Chapter 15.6, Predefined
Raster Devices, page 343.
For a complete list of predefined configuration parameters, have a look into the
raster device configuration file CXXRAS. It is located by using either the environment variable CXXRAS or GTS_FONTS.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
235
11 Raster Driver
11.4 Dithering (Color Simulation)
Most of the printers only can generate black and white or the 8 primary colors.
Dithering is used to simulate colors or shades of gray on these devices.
Without dithering, the raster driver will map all colors to the nearest color in the
RGB cube which is available on the device. No color other than white will be
mapped to white.
simulation of colors
When using dithering, up to 255 different colors can be generated. A color associated with a color index may be changed as often as needed. For b/w devices,
the colors will be converted to shades of gray internally.
Dithering requires more internal memory. In the worst case (b/w devices) an
additional buffer of 8 times the size given by -stripsize is used. Therefore, it
may be necessary to reduce this value. For devices able to generate 16 colors, the
additional buffer will need to be twice as large as the size entered in -stripsize.
If dithering has been enabled by -merge CMY with C + M + Y > 8, twice as much
available memory is needed.
11.4.1 Configuration of the Dithering
simulation
To generate the color or shades of gray, a dithering algorithm must be specified
by -dithermode:
dither mode
-dithermode
dither mode (only supported for
certain printer type models)
Parameter:
dithermode
dithermode
0
1
2
3
4
Floyd-Steinberg
specifies the algorithm used for of dithering.
no dithering
Floyd-Steinberg (see the follwing explanation)
ordered dither (see the follwing explanation)
ordered dither (see the follwing explanation)
ordered dither (see the follwing explanation)
The Floyd-Steinberg algorithm distributes the difference between the color
needed for a pixel and the best fitting color supported for the device onto neighbouring pixels. Therefore smooth color transitions can be generated.
The advantages of the Floyd-Steinberg algorithm are:
• full resolution for primary colors
• smooth color transitions
• no regular patterns
For three groups of output devices, specialized versions of Floyd-Steinberg algorithm are used:
• black & white devices
• devices supporting the 8 primary colors
• devices supporting more than 15 colors including the 8 primary colors
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
236
The last algorithm is the slowest version. So dithering for model hppaintjet
may be faster in high resolution than in low resolution, since the device uses 16
colors on 90 dpi and 8 colors on 180 dpi.
With ordered dither, colors are simulated by pattern matrices. To get a desired
color, a certain number of pixels within the matrix is set using the primary colors.
The number of colors that can be generated depends on the size of the matrices.
Currently the matrix sizes 2, 4, and 8 are supported.
ordered dither
Table 11-5 lists the maximum number of colors or shades of gray that can be
generated:
Matrix Size
Number of Colors
Number of Shades of
Gray
2
125
5
4
4913
17
8
274625
65
Table 11-5:
Maximum Number of Colors or Shades of Gray
The advantages of the ordered dither algorithm:
• fast algorithm
• full resolution for primary colors
The disadvantages of the ordered dither algorithm:
• regular patterns
• number of colors limited by size of dither matrices
• thin lines of light color may vanish
The raster driver will use the first 255 different colors generated.
11.4.2 Computation Time
The dithering process is independent of the number of graphics primitives used
with a picture. It only depends on the size of the used drawing area. For a typical
picture using fill areas the following computation times have been recorded:
no dithering
100 %
-dithermode 1
(Floyd-Steinberg)
340 %
-dithermode 2
(ordered dither)
160 %
The used device was 3140 x 2400 pixel with 8 colors.
With increasing number of graphics primitives the difference
between the time used for non-dithered and dithered output will
decrease.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
237
11 Raster Driver
11.5 Supported Parameters Sorted by Models
For detailed information of a specific parameter refer to Chapter
11.2, Configuring the CXXRAS Driver, page 194.
11.5.1 All Raster Models
Parameter
Values
-background
{yes | no}
-capstyle
round
-inches
-messages
string
-millimeters
-minlinewidth
width
-rotate
{0 | 90}
-size
x_size y_size
-stripsize
size
-subdevice
number
-widelines
{simple | complex}
Table 11-6:
Parameters Available for All Raster Models
11.5.2 Printer Type Model bitimage
Parameter
Values
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
Table 11-7:
gXconvert
System Description
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model bitimage
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
238
11.5.3 Printer Type Model bmp
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | index}
-dithermode
dithermode (only
-gamma
gamma
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-plotsizemode
{bypicture | bysize | byviewport}
Table 11-8:
available with -colrep bw)
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model bmp
11.5.4 Printer Type Model cals, cals_1, ccitt
Parameter
Values
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-plotsizemode
{bypicture | bysize | byviewport}
Table 11-9:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Models cals, cals_1,
ccitt
11.5.5 Printer Type Model ccrf
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | hwcol}
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-maxdata
{0 | 1 }
-plotsizemode
Table 11-10:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
{bysize | byviewport}
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model ccrf
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
239
11 Raster Driver
11.5.6 Printer Type Model epsonfx80
Parameter
Values
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
Table 11-11:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model epsonfx80
11.5.7 Printer Type Model garo
Parameter
Values
-colrep
rgb
-model
{ipf7x0|ipf5100|w8400|ipf5000|w7200|ipf82
0}
-resolution
depends on model and quality
-quality
depends on model and resolution
-plotsizemode
{bysize | byviewport| bypicture}
-size
x_size y_size x_offs y_offs
Table 11-12:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model garo
11.5.8 Printer Type Model gif
Parameter
Values
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-plotsizemode
{bysize | byviewport}
Table 11-13:
gXconvert
System Description
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model gif
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
240
11.5.9 Printer Type Model hpdeskjet5x0c, hpdeskjet6x0c
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | hwcol}
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-orientation
orientation
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}; (mapped to nearest of 75,
150, 300 dpi)
-paperformat
format
-size
x_size y_size x_offs y_offs
-usecid
{yes | no}
Table 11-14:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model hpdeskjet500c
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
241
11 Raster Driver
11.5.10Printer Type Model hplaserjet, hplaserjetii, hplaserjetiii,
hpdeskjet
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | grey10 | grey17}
-compression
{packbits | adaptive}
-dithermode
dithermode (not available
and -colrep grey17)
-gamma
gamma
-orientation
orientation
-paperformat
format
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}; mapped to nearest of 75,
100, 150, 300, 600 dpi with -colrep bw and to
300, 600 dpi with -colrep grey10 or
-colrep grey17)
-usecid
{yes | no}
Table 11-15:
with -colrep grey10
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model hplaserjet
11.5.11 Printer Type Model hppaintjet, hppaintjetxl
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | hwcol}
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-orientation
orientation
-paperformat
format
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}; (mapped to nearest of 90,
150, 180, 300 dpi)
-size
Table 11-16:
x_size y_size x_offs y_offs
Parameters Available for Printer Type Models hppaintjet,
hppaintjetxl
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
242
11.5.12Printer Type Model hpquietjet
Parameter
Values
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
Table 11-17:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model hpquietjet
11.5.13Printer Type Model hprtl
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | hwcol | hwcmyk | rgb}
-copies
number
-cutter
{yes | no}
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-plotsizemode
{bysize | bypicture | byviewport}e x_ffs y_offs
Table 11-18:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model hprtl
11.5.14Printer Type Model ibmprox24
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{grey256 | rgb}
-gamma
gamma
-jpegoptions
quality smoothing progressive
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-plotsizemode
{bysize | bypicture | byviewport | minpicture}e x_offs y_off
Table 11-19:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model ibmprox24
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
243
11 Raster Driver
11.5.15Printer Type Model jpeg
Parameter
Values
-dithermode
dithermode
-formlength
length
-gamma
gamma
-outputformat
mt93
-stripsize
size
Table 11-20:
(only supported with -outputformat mt93)
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model jpeg
11.5.16Printer Type Model necp6
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | hwcol}
-dithermode
dithermode
-formlength
length
-gamma
gamma
-resolution
{dpi | dpm | dpmm}; (mapped to nearest of
180, 360 dpi)
Table 11-21:
value
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model necp6
11.5.17Printer Type Model novajet, techjet
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | hwcol}
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-plotsizemode
{bysize | bypicture | byviewport} x_offs y_offs
Table 11-22:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Models novajet,
techjet
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
244
11.5.18Printer Type Model novajet, techjet
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | hwcol}
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-plotsizemode
{bysize | bypicture | byviewport} x_offs y_offs
Table 11-23:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Models novajet,
techjet
11.5.19Printer Type Model pcl3gui
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | hwcmyk | rgb}
-cutter
{no | yes}
-dithermode
dithermode
-duplex
{ON | OFF | none}
-initfiles
startfile betweenfile endfile
-material
material
-maxdetail
{ON | OFF |none}
-pcl3guioptions
pcl3guioptions
-plotsizemode
{bysize | bypicture | byviewport | minpicture}
-quality
quality
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-tray
tray
Table 11-24:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model pcl3gui
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
245
11 Raster Driver
11.5.20Printer Type Model pcl5c
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | grey256 | index | rgb}
-dithermode
dithermode
-initfiles
startfile betweenfile endfile
-orientation
orientation
-paperformat
format
-plotsizemode
{bysize | bypicture | byviewport | minpicture}
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
Table 11-25:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model pcl5c
11.5.21Printer Type Model ps (PostScript Raster output)
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | rgb}
-gamma
gamma
-initfiles
startfile betweenfile endfile
-pagesize
width height
-plotsizemode
{bysize | byviewport} x_offs y_offs
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
Table 11-26:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model ps
11.5.22Printer Type Model pdf
Parameter
Values
-compression
{deflate | g4 (bitmaps only)| lzw}
Table 11-27:
gXconvert
System Description
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model pdf
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
246
11.5.23Printer Type Model raster (General Raster)
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | hwcol}
-dithermode
dithermode (only
-gamma
gamma
-plotsizemode
{bysize | byviewport} x_offs y_offs
Table 11-28:
available with -colrep bw)
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model raster (General
Raster)
11.5.24Printer Type Model rst
Parameter
Values
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-outputformat
{mki | mkii}
-plotsizemode
{bysize | bypicture | byviewport} x_offs y_offs
Table 11-29:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model rst
11.5.25Printer Type Model sni2050
Parameter
Values
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-lunits
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-maxdata
size x_offs
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-plotsizemode
{bysize | byviewport}
Table 11-30:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
y_offs
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model sni2050
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
247
11 Raster Driver
11.5.26Printer Type Model stylusc
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | hwcol}
-dithermode
dithermode
-gamma
gamma
-microweave
{yes | no}
-resolution
{dpi | dpm | dpmm}; (mapped to nearest of
180, 360, 720 dpi)
-plotsizemode
{bysize | byviewport | bypicture}
-size
x_size y_size x_offs y_offs
-unidirectional
{yes | no}
Table 11-31:
value
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model stylusc
11.5.27Printer Type Model tiff
Parameter
Values
-colrep
{bw | grey256 | index}
-compression
{g1 | g4 | lzw | packbits}
-dithermode
dithermode (only
-gamma
gamma
-maxdata
size
-outputformat
{intel | motorola | auto}
-plotsizemode
{bysize | byviewport | bypicture | mapped |
minpicture}
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-size
x_size y_size x_offs y_offs
-unidirectional
{yes | no}
Table 11-32:
gXconvert
System Description
supported with -colrep bw)
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model tiff
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
248
11.5.28Printer Type Model versatec
Parameter
Values
-dithermode
dithermode (only
-gamma
gamma
-initformfeed
{normal | 0 | 1 | 2}
-plotsizemode
{bysize | byviewport}
-vmodel
see list of models at -vmodel
Table 11-33:
supported with -colrep bw)
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model versatec
11.5.29Printer Type Model wfax
Parameter
Values
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
Table 11-34:
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model wfax
11.5.30Printer Type Model xbm
Parameter
Values
-dithermode
dithermode (only
-gamma
gamma
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
-plotsizemode
{bysize | bypicture | byviewport}
-size
x_size y_size x_offs y_offs
-unidirectional
{yes | no}
Table 11-35:
supported with -colrep bw)
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model xbm
11.5.31Printer Type Model xwd
Parameter
Values
-resolution
value {dpi | dpm | dpmm}
Table 11-36:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model xwd
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
249
11 Raster Driver
11.6 CCRF Raster
11.6.1 Environment Variables
disk buffering
The disk buffering of the output device can be enabled or disabled by using the
environment variable CR_IDISK. If the output device has to use disk buffering,
CR_IDISK must be set to 1. If CR_IDISK is set to a different value or if it is not
set, disk buffering is disabled.
Some output devices do not work with disk buffering disabled. So
CR_IDISK should always be set to 1.
Disk buffering can also be enabled by specifying -maxdata 1 in
CXXRAS.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
11 Raster Driver
250
11.7 General Raster Format
When working with raster graphics, it is often useful to have raster formats which
are simple to interpret. For this purpose, some general raster formats have been
added to the driver. They consist of a simple text header followed by binary
image data. The text header keeps for all formats the same information:
Line 1: One integer value specifying the resolution in dpi
Line 2: One integer value specifying the number of pixels per line
Line 3: One integer value specifying the number of lines
Line 4: One integer value specifying the raster format
Line 5: Start of graphics data
reading raster
formats
The top left corner of the image is represented by the first byte(s) of graphics
data, the bottom right corner by the last byte(s). How the graphics data is interpreted, is specified by the raster format in line 4. Currently the following formats
are supported:
• 0: black/white bitmap
0-bits will represent white, 1-bits black. The most significant bit is the
left-most pixel. Each line starts on byte boundary. This format is specified
by -colrep bw. Dithering and merging can be used with this format.
• 1: RGB bitmap (1 bit per RGB)
Each pixel is represented by 1 Byte. Each byte keeps a color index in range
0 to 7. Bit 0 (the least significant bit) represents blue on or off, bit 1 green
and bit 2 red (see Table 11-37). For this raster format only the 8 primary
colors are used. It is specified by -colrep hwcol. Dithering and merging
can be used with this format.
Index
00000RGB
Color
0
00000000
black
1
00000001
blue
2
00000010
green
3
00000011
cyan
4
00000100
red
5
00000101
magenta
6
00000110
yellow
7
00000111
white
Table 11-37:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
supported formats
Color Definition
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
251
11 Raster Driver
11.8 Canon Garo Driver
The Canon GARO driver is used with Canon printers, which support the Canon
GARO format (imagePROGRAF series). The driver uses predefined tables for
color settings, material settings and output quality settings in dependence of the
used printer. These tables are delivered with gXconvert. They are stored in
subdirectories of install_path/tools/drivers/canon. The environment
variable GARORESOURCE must be set to this directory. Configuration files for each
supported printer are located in the corresponding directory (ipf7x0.cfg,
w8400.cfg, ipf5100.cfg). They describe the possible mapping of the output
parameters like resolution, quality and material for the printer model. These
configuration files must not be edited by the user. Only certain combinations of
resolution, quality and material will produce an output on the printer.
The following table describes possible combinations:
Printer
-model
-resolution
-quality
-material
iPF 5100
ipf5100
600 dpi
NORMAL
EXTRA_MATT_COATED_
PAPER
iPF 710
ipf7x0
600 dpi
NORMAL
MATT_COATED_PAPER
W8400 (OCE
CS2024)
w8400
300 dpi
NORMAL
PLAIN_PAPER
W7200
w7200
300 dpi
NORMAL
Plain_Paper
IPF 5000
ipf5000
600 dpi
NORMAL
EXTRA_MATT_COATED_
PAPER
IPF 820
ipf820
600 dpi
NORMAL
EXTRA_MATT_COATED_
PAPER
Table 11-38:
gXconvert
System Description
Canon Garo Driver: Possible Combinations for Output Parameters
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
12 Canon Driver
12
252
Canon Driver
The CCANLBP driver supports several LBP8A2, LBP8II and LBP8III devices. It
evaluates the environment variable CCANLBP in order to search its configuration
file. The name of the configuration file is CCANLBP. The device IDs can be in the
range of 9000 to 9999.
CCANLBP
12.1 Calling the CCANLBP Driver
physical output device
-device
Parameter:
deviceID manufacturer language model site
deviceID
9000
9010
physical output
device
must be multiple of 10.
used sequence
...
9990
manufacturer
language
model
site
name of the manufacturer of the output
device
language supported for the output device
model of the output device; for an
overview of all supported models see
Table 12-1
string to check site dependencies
default:
none
Assignments of properties will affect only the default setup until a subdevice is selected. Currently only deviceID and model are checked. manufacturer, language, and site must be present, but are reserved for future
use. A specific output device is selected via the parameter file.
Example:
-device 9020 Canon VDM lbp8iii site
The device ID can only be used once.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
253
supported devices
12 Canon Driver
Table 12-1 gives an overview of all supported devices and their model values.
Device
Model
Canon LBP8A2
lbp8a2
Canon LBP8A2
lbp8ii
Canon LBP8III
lbp8iii
Table 12-1:
gXconvert
System Description
Supported Device Models
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
12 Canon Driver
254
12.2 Configuring the CCANLBP Driver
The remaining parameters for configuring the CCANLBP driver are given in alphabetical order.
-colorprecision
or -colourprecisioncolor precision
parameters
color precision
Parameter:
precision_bits
precision_bits
Number
of bits to use per red, green,
blue part of a color.
1
...
15
default:
10
Sets the precision to represent colors internally.
Example:
-colorprecision 10
units of measurement
-inches
Parameter:
default:
unit
none
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as inches.
Example:
-inches
message string
-message
Parameter:
string
specifies the string that is printed to
STDERR.
string
default:
message
none
Example:
-message "using file CCANLBP"
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
255
unit
12 Canon Driver
or -millimetres
units of measurement
Parameter:
none
default:
millimeters
Values specifying lengths are interpreted as millimeters.
-millimeters
Example:
-millimeters
color table
color table entry
-rgb
Parameter:
color_index red green blue
color_index
color index to
red
color as red
0.0
be assigned
...
1.0
color as blue
blue
0.0
...
1.0
color as green
green
0.0
...
1.0
default:
none
The colors 0 and 1 (white, black) are predefined.
Example:
-rgb 1 0.0 0.0 0.0
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
12 Canon Driver
256
rotation (only supported for certain
device types)
-rotate
Parameter:
rotation
angle
angle
0
90
specifies whether the graphics has to
be rotated.
no rotation
rotation by 90°
default:
0
For unrotated graphics on output devices, the x-axis is parallel to the direction of paper motion. The unrotated x-axis will point to the right.
Example:
-rotate 90
size of the drawing area
-size
Parameter:
x_size y_size
specifies the size of the drawing area
in x-direction.
specifies the size ofthe drawing area in
y-direction.
x_size
y_size
default:
drawing area
device-dependent
Example:
-size 297.3 210.2
subdevice
-subdevice
subdevice
Parameter:
subdeviceID
subdeviceID
deviceID
specifies the ID of the subdevice
first possible value
...
deviceID+9 last possible value
default:
none
Copies the default setup to the specified subdevice. Assignment of properties will affect only this subdevice.
Example:
-subdevice 9110
Each ID can only be used once.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
257
12 Canon Driver
12.3 Predefined Canon Devices
A summary of predefined Canon device IDs is given in Chapter 15.7, Predefined
Canon Devices, page 360.
For a complete list of predefined configuration parameters, have a look into the
Canon device configuration file CCANLBP. It is located by using either the environment variable CCANLBP or GTS_FONTS.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
13
258
Support Programs
13.1 User-Defined Line Types
Most graphics systems support various line types. Depending on the capability
of the driver interface, these line types will be transformed into small solid line
segments or referred to by a line type index. For the conversion of files which are
using line types referenced by a line type index, this line type module offers the
possibility to define special line types for gXconvert, which fit the line types of
the generating application.
line types/line
type index
In addition to user-defined line types, gXconvert supports the line types listed in
Table 13-1:
Notation
Line Type
1
solid
2
dashed
3
dotted
4
dashed dotted
5
dashed dotted dotted
Table 13-1:
Supported Line Types
User-defined line types can also be used to define special hatch types1.
Combining both mechanisms, you are able to create pattern with the hatch
module.
hatch types
User-defined line types for the line type module of gXconvert must
have negative line type indices. To map the line type index of your
application to the gXconvert line type index, profiling must be
useda.
a. Chapter 4, Profiling, page 84
1. Chapter 13.3, User-Defined Hatch Types, page 277
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
259
13 Support Programs
13.1.1 Line Type Definition File
The syntax of the user-defined line type definition file is based on these principles:
• there is no restriction regarding length of a line,
• there is no distinction between upper case letters and lower case letters,
• commands may be separated by space, tabs or newline,
• parameters may be (but need not) introduced by a -,
• parameters may be shortened up to the 3 leading letters,
• multiple commands per line are allowed.
Example of all in one line:
base -200 unit mm ind 1 pat 2 0 1 1 1
#Comment line
Comments begins with #. Everything following the # up to the end
of the line will be ignored.
Example of a comment:
# This is a comment line.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
260
13.1.2 Parameters
fitting of line pattern
-adaptive
Parameter:
adaptive
adaptive
none
NO
YES
A_SEGM
A_LINE
A_SIGZ
F_INCR
F_NEXT
line pattern fitting
specifies the fitting of the line pattern
in the polyline.
equal to NO
The line patterns are applied as specified, no stretching or shrinking of line
patterns will be done.
Each line segment of the polyline will
keep the complete line patterns.
Each line segment of the polyline will
keep the complete line patterns.
The whole polyline will contain the
complete line pattern.
An adaptive zigzag line will be generated.
The line pattern is fixed but will
increase the last pen down pattern up
to the next corner. Start with next pen
up pattern.
The line pattern is fixed, but will start
with the next pen down pattern at the
corner of the line.
default:
none
-adaptive describes the fitting of the line pattern in the polyline. This is
used to define whether the patterns of the line is modified under certain
conditions.
The first -pattern value following A_SIGZ determines the width of the zig
(half the length of a zigzag), the second -pattern refers to the size of the
elevation of the zig from the base line and the third -pattern describes the
distance between the end of a zigzag and the beginning of the next.
Example:
-units mm
-adaptive A_SIGZ
-pattern 3
# width of zig (half the length of zig-zag)
-pattern 2
# elevation of zig from base line
-pattern 5
# distance between end of a zig-zag and
# start of the next
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
261
base index
13 Support Programs
base index for line types
-base
Parameter:
index
index
-200
specifies the base index for line types.
The requested value must be equal or
smaller than -200. The specified integer serves as the base index for all line
definitions in the file.
default:
none
-base defines the reference index for subsequent index commands. The
base command must be the first command in each user-defined line type
file.
Example:
-base -200
scaling of gap
scaling of pen-up width
-gap_scale
Parameter:
scale
scale
none
YES
NO
specifies whether pen-up gaps are
scaled.
equal to YES
Pen-up gaps are stretched with increasing line width to accommodate the
possible growing of pen-down gaps by
cap style attributes e. g. in GRALX_2x
or driver configuration files.
pen-up gaps are not scaled.
default:
none
-gap_scale allows or disallows the scaling of pen-up gaps in respect to
the current line width. This option inhibits the pattern to appear as a solid
line if -capstyle round is selected in configuration files.
Example:
-gap_scale no
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
262
line type index
-index
Parameter:
index
specifies the line type definition.
index
default:
line type index
none
specifies the ID (i. e. a number) that is used to reference the
following line type definition. Usually, this is the index of a line type that
is used in a graphics input file. Each line type definition starts with -index.
The value must be less than the value specified by -base or greater than
zero.
-index
Example:
-base -200 # base index is -200
-index -201 # user-defined line type -201
This is equivalent to:
-base -200 # base index is -200
-index 1 # user-defined line type -201
-index
is usually followed by a list of attribute definitions.
marker decoration
-m_index
Parameter:
marker
marker
specifies the line type.
marker
1
...
5
default:
none
A line type may be decorated by markers. You can select a standard marker
type by specifying a marker index 1 up to 5.
Example:
-m_index 4 # select marker type 4
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
263
scaling of marker
13 Support Programs
scaling factor for marker
Parameter:
{factor [scaled] |
size {mm|cm|inch|m}|
size metric}
factor [scaled]
sets a relative marker size scaling factor
size
sets an absolut marker size factor using
measurement units.
-m_size
size
default:
mm
cm
inch
m
metric
sets an absolute marker size using the
current units set by the last unit command.
none
Example of a (device-dependent) relative marker size scale factor:
-m_size factor or
-m_size factor scaled
-m_size 5 or
# a device-dependent default marker size
# is multiplied by 5 to yield the requested
# marker size
-m_size 5 scaled
Example of an absolute marker size using cm:
# marker size is 0.5 cm
-m_size 0.5 cm
Example of an absolute marker size using the current mesurements units
set by the last -unit command.
-m_size size metric
# line index is baseindex - 5
-index 5
-unit mm
# current units are mm
# pattern will be stretched or shrunk
# to fit integral into a line segment
-adaptive a_segm
-m_index 2
# use marker index 2
-m_size 5 metric
# marker size is 5 mm
-pattern 3 1 0 1 0 1
# dash double dot line
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
264
line type pattern
-pattern
line type pattern
Parameter:
move_length
move_length
1
specifies the line type pattern.
...
26
default:
none
Line patterns are composed of alternate pen-down and pen-up moves. The
first move is a pen-down move. (All odd numbered moves are pen-down
moves; even numbered moves are pen-up moves.). A maximum of 26
moves is allowed. (For zig zag lines only the first 3 values are valid and
have a special meaning.) Move values are measured in units specified in
the previous encountered unit command. If -unit has not been specified,
the default units are millimeters.
Example of dotted pattern:
-pattern 0.1 1.5
Example of dash-dot-dash pattern of 1 cm length:
-pattern 0.5 0.25 0.0 0.25
units of measurement
-units
Parameter:
units
specifies the units of measurement.
units
default:
measurement
mm
cm
inch
m
mm
-units may be placed anywhere in the user-defined line types file and
determines the current unit used for gap patterns and marker sizes.
Example of centimeters for gap length:
-units cm
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
265
13 Support Programs
13.1.3 Converting to a Binary File
binary format
The line type definition file must be converted into a binary format. This small
obstacle of compiling the ASCII line type definition file into a binary line type
definition file was chosen because of two reasons:
• Error checking during the compilation in order to avoid malfunction of your
application program due to bad line type definitions
• Speed of interpretation during starting the program
latob
To convert an ASCII line type definition file into its binary counterpart the
program latob is used. This program is located in the bin directory of your
gXconvert installation.
The name of this utility is an acronym. l is an abbreviation of 'l'ine
type module and atob of 'a'scii 'to' 'b'inary conversion. The latob
program expects the name of an ASCII line type definition file as
argument.
The postfix of the ASCII line type definition file should be .asc.
Example of converting the ASCII line type definition file,
mylines.asc, into its binary counterpart, mylines:
latob mylines.asc
In the case of errors a message is printed whichs support your when locating the
error cause. If the conversion was successful, no message at all is displayed but
a binary file with the same name as the ASCII file but without its postfix is generated.
If you are in doubt about the contents of a binary line type definition
file, use the utility program lbtoa ('l'ine type module 'b'inary 'to'
'a'scii conversion) to convert the binary representation back into a
readable ASCII format.
Example of generating the ASCII file, mylines.asc, using the binary
file mylines:
lbtoa mylines
Be careful not to overwrite your original file!
For a step-by-step instruction see Chapter 13.1.6, Summary of How to Create
Own Line Types, page 268.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
266
13.1.4 Environment Variable
The way how gXconvert searches the line type definition file is given by the
following algorithm:
environment
variables
1. Use the file specified via the GTSLTYPE environment variable.
2. If no GTSLTYPE environment variable has been defined, try to read a file
named GTSLTYPE in the local directory.
3. If still no line type definition file is found, try to read a file GTSLTYPE
located in the GTS_FONTS directory.
An example of a line type definition file is located in the fonts
directory and is named GTSLTYPE.ASC. The corresponding binary
file, GTSLTYPE, is also located in the fonts directory. Be careful
not to overwrite the original file GTSLTYPE.ASC when converting
the binary file back to an ASCII file.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
267
13 Support Programs
13.1.5 Example
Example of a line types definition file:
# base index is -200
-base -200
# use millimeters for gaps and marker size
-units mm
# start of definition of line type 201
-index 1
# length of pattern is 1 cm
# pattern is of type fixed by default
# (no -adaptive command specified)
-pattern 5 5
# no marking of line ends
# (no -m_index command specified)
# start of definition of line type 202
-index 2
# pattern will be stretched or shrunk
# to fit integral into the complete line
-adaptive a_line
# dash dot dot pattern of 5 mm length
# no marking of line ends
# (no -m_index command specified)
-pattern 2 1 0 1 0 1
-index 3
# pattern will be stretched or shrunk
# to fit integral into a line segment
-adaptive a_segm
# dash dot pattern of 5 mm length
-pattern 2 1 0 1
# use marker type 4 to mark line segments
-m_index 4
-m_size 0.5 cm # marker size is 0.5 cm
The recompiled version LTYPE.ASC of LTYPE.asc (latob
LTYPE.asc; lbtoa LTYPE) looks like this:
# Number of definitions 3
# Baseindex -200
# Size of structure in words 32
-Baseindex -200
#---Index -201
-Adaptive No
-gap_scale Yes
-Pattern 5.000 5.000
#---Index -202
-Adaptive A_line
-gap_scale Yes
-Pattern 2.000 1.000 0.000 1.000 0.000 1.000
#---Index -203
-Adaptive A_segm
-gap_scale Yes
-M_index 4
-M_size 5.000 mm
-Pattern 2.000 1.000 0.000 1.000
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
268
13.1.6 Summary of How to Create Own Line Types
1. Create an ASCII file containing your line type definitions:
vi mylines.asc
2. Convert the ASCII file into a binary format file called mylines:
latob mylines.asc
is required by gXconvert. The name of the converted file is the
same as the original file name, but without postfix .asc or .ASC.
3. If desired, check the conversion by converting the binary file back to a readable format. Usually, this step is not necessary.
mylines
1btoa mylines
The resulting ASCII file is named mylines.ASC.
On Windows this will overwrite your original file mylines.ASC.
Since lbtoa creates a generalized ASCII file, this will look
different from the original file. The comments of the original file
will be lost.
4. Define the environment variable GTSLTYPE to point to the binary file
containing your user-defined line types.
setenv GTSLTYPE `pwd`/mylines
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
269
13 Support Programs
13.2 User-Defined Markers
solid marker segments/marker
type index
A lot of graphics systems support various sets of marker types. Depending on the
capabilities of the driver interface, these marker types will be transformed into
small solid marker segments or referred to by a marker type index.
own marker
types
For the conversion of output files which use marker types referenced by a marker
type index, this marker type module offers the possibility to define special
marker types for gXconvert, which fit the marker types of the generating application.
The basic gXconvert supported marker types are listed in Table 13-2
Notation
Marker Types
1
· dot
2
+ plus
3
* asterisk
4
o circle
5
x cross
Table 13-2:
Marker Types Supported by gXconvert
User-defined marker types can also be used to enhance special hatch types1.
Combining user-defined markers and user-defined hatch types, you are able to
create user-defined pattern.
User-defined marker types for the marker type module of gXconvert must have negative marker indices. To map the marker type
index of your application to the marker type index of gXconvert
profiling must be useda.
a. Chapter 4, Profiling, page 84
1. Chapter 13.3, User-Defined Hatch Types, page 277
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
270
13.2.1 Marker Type Definition File
The marker type definition is specified in a text file. The syntax of this command
file conform to the following rules:
• There is no restriction regarding line length.
• There is no distinction between upper case letters and lower case letters.
• Commands may be separated by space, tabs or newlines.
• Parameters may (but need not) be introduced by -.
• Parameters may be abbreviated to the first 3 letters.
• Multiple commands per line are allowed.
Example:
Index -201 Ext 60 60 Lin -60 60 -60 -60 60
→ -60 60 60 -60 60
#Comment line
Comments begins with #. Everything following the # up to the end
of the line will be ignored.
Example of a comment:
# This is a comment line.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
271
13 Support Programs
13.2.2 Parameters
base index
basic index for marker definition
-base
Parameter:
base
base
specifies the base index for the marker
-200
default:
-base must be the first parameter in each user-defined marker type file.
The requested value must be equal to or smaller than -200. The specified
integer serves as the base index for all marker definitions in the file.
If -base has not been specified, base index -200 is assumed.
command is followed by a list of marker type definitions.
Each marker type definition starts with -index.
-base
marker extent
marker extent
-extent
Parameter:
x1 y1 [x2 y2]
x1 y1 [x2 y2]
default:
specifies the values of the rectangular
maker extent.
-31 -31 31 31
If -extent is not specified, a default extent of (-31, -31) to (31, 31) is
used.
Example of a square extent between (x1, y1) and (-x1, -y1):
-extent x1 y1
Example of a rectangular extent with corners (-50, -50) and (50, 50)
-extent 50 50
Example of a rectangular extent with corners (0, 0) and (100, 50)
-extent 0 0 100 50
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
272
marker type index
-index
Parameter:
index
index
marker type index
specifies the marker type in the application.
default:
none
The requested value is the marker type the user specifies in the application
program in order to select this user-defined marker type.
For more information referring to profiling see Chapter 4, Profiling, page
84.
Example:
-base -200 # base index is -200
-index -201 # user-defined marker type -201
This is equivalent to:
-base -200 # base index is -200
-index 1 # user-defined marker type -201
Usually, -index is followed by a list of attribute definitions.
line definition
Parameter:
x1 y1 x2 y2 [xi yi] ...
x1 y1 x2 y2 [xi yi] ...
specifies the values that specify the
geometry of a marker.
default:
none
-line
line definition
describes the geometry of a marker. You may use as many
geometric commands (-line, -vector, -rectangle) as you like to define
the shape of a marker.
-line
Example:
-line 0 0 50 50 -50 50 -50 -50 50 -50 50 50
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
273
rectangle definition
13 Support Programs
rectangle definition
-rectangle
x1 y1 [x2 y2]
x1 y1 [x2 y2]
Parameter:
default:
-rectangle
specifies the values that define the edges of a rectangle.
none
defines the edges of a rectangle (parallel to the coordinate
axes).
Example of defining a square which spans a square between (x1, y1) and
(-x1, -y1):
-rectangle x1 y1
Example of defining a square with corners (-50, -50) and (50, 50):
-rectangle 50 50
Example of defining a square with corners (0, 0) and (100, 50):
-rectangle 0 0 100 50
vector definition
vector definition
-vector
Parameter:
x1 y1 x2 y2
x1 y1 x2 y2
specifies the values that specifies a
vector.
default:
none
A vector is equivalent to a line definition for two points only.
Example of a line from (10, 20) to (30, 40):
-vector 10 20 30 40
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
274
13.2.3 Converting to a Binary File
The marker type definition file must be converted into a binary format. This
small obstacle of compiling the ASCII marker type definition file into a binary
marker type definition file was chosen because of two reasons:
• Error checking during the compilation in order to avoid malfunction of your
application program due to bad marker type definitions
• Speed of interpretation during starting the program
binary format
To convert an ASCII marker type definition file into its binary counterpart the
program matob is used. This program is located in the bin directory of your
gXconvert installation.
matob
The name of this utility is an acronym. m is an abbreviation of
'm'arker type module and atob of 'a'scii 'to' 'b'inary conversion. The
matob program expects the name of an ASCII marker type definition file as argument.
The postfix of the ASCII marker type definition file should be .asc.
Example of converting the ASCII marker type definition file,
mymarkers.asc, into its binary counterpart, mymarkers:
matob mymarkers.asc
In the case of errors a message is printed whichs support your when locating the
error cause. If the conversion was successful, no message at all is displayed but
a binary file with the same name as the ASCII file but without its postfix is generated.
If you are in doubt about the contents of a binary marker type definition file, use the utility program mbtoa ('m'arker type module
'b'inary 'to' 'a'scii conversion) to convert the binary representation
back into a readable ASCII format.
Example of generating the ASCII file, mymarkers.asc, using the
binary file mymarkers:
mbtoa mymarkers
Be careful not to overwrite your original file!
For a step-by-step instruction see Chapter 13.2.6, Summary of How to Create
Own Marker Types, page 276.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
275
13 Support Programs
13.2.4 Environment Variables
environment
variables
The marker type definition file is searched in three steps:
1. Use the file specified via the GTSMTYPE environment variable
2. If no GTSMTYPE environment variable has been defined, try to read a file
named GTSMTYPE in the local directory.
3. If still no marker type definition file is found, try to read a file GTSMTYPE
located in the local directory.
13.2.5 Example
Example of a user-defined marker types file:
#
# GKSGRAL Markers
#
# No base index specified, so it defaults to -200
#
# Rectangular marker
#
-Index 1
# equivalent to -index -201
-Extent -60 -60 60 60 # no border around rectangle
#
x
y
#
------Line -60 60
-60 -60
60 -60
60 60
-60 60
#
# Triangular marker
#
-Index -202
# equivalent to ind 2
-Extent -80 -80 80 80 # extent is larger then triangle definition below
#
x
y
#
------Line
0 80
-70 -40
70 -40
0 80
#
# Square head smiley
#
index -401 extent -50 -50 50 50
rect -50 -50 50 50
rect -30 20 -5 35
rect 5 20 30 35
line -40 0 -35 -15 -25 -25 -5 -30 5 -30 25 -25 35 -15 40 0
#
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
276
13.2.6 Summary of How to Create Own Marker Types
1. Create an ASCII file containing your marker type definitions:
vi mymarkers.asc
2. Convert the ASCII file into a binary format file called mymarkers:
matob mymarkers.asc
is required by gXconvert. The name of the converted file is the
same as the original file name, but without postfix .asc or .ASC.
3. If desired, check the conversion by converting the binary file back to a readable format. Usually, this step is not necessary.
mymarkers
mbtoa mymarkers
The resulting ASCII file is named mymarkers.ASC.
On Windows this will overwrite your original file mymarkers.ASC.
Since mbtoa creates a generalized ASCII file, this will look different
from the original file. The comments of the original file will be lost.
4. Define the environment variable GTSMTYPE to point to the binary file
containing your user-defined marker types.
setenv GTSMTYPE `pwd`/mymarkers
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
277
13 Support Programs
13.3 User-Defined Hatch Types
The hatch indices have to be negative. First, set a base index; the hatch indices
in the hatch definition file start at this index (i. e. the hatch index with the lowest
absolute value is the base index). Then, describe the hatches.
hatch structures
gXconvert distinguishes between simple and complex hatch structures.
13.3.1 Parameters in a Simple Hatch Structure
For a simple hatch use -Type Simple.
hatch index
hatch index
-Index
Parameter:
index
specifies the the hatch index. It must
be less than the base index.
index
default:
complexity
none
complexity of the hatch
-Type
paramter:
type
type
simple
complex
default:
hatch angle
specifies the hatch complexity of the
hatch type.
values for hatch index
a list of hatch indices
none
hatch angle
-Angle
Parameter:
angle
specifies the angle of the hatch index
in degree to the x-axis (counter-clockwise)
angle
0
...
360
default:
hatch distance
none
distance of hatch lines
-Distance
Parameter:
distance
specifies the distance of hatch lines;
the unit is mm.
distance
default:
gXconvert
System Description
none
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
278
hatch offset
-Offset
Parameter:
offset
offset
offset
specifies the hatch offset.
default:
none
The offset is added to the fill reference point. From there the hatch lines are
drawn (device coordinates).
hatch line type
-Linetype
Parameter:
type
Specifies the line type used for the
hatch lines.
type
default:
none
hatch line width
-Width
Parameter:
line width
width
specifies the line width used for the
hatch lines; the unit is mm.
width
default:
line type
none
13.3.2 Parameters in a Complex Hatch Structure
For a complex hatch use -Type Complex
hatch index
-Index
Parameter:
index
specifies the the hatch index. It must
be less than the base index.
index
default:
none
complexity of the hatch
-Type
paramter:
complexity
type
type
Simple
Complex
default:
hatch index
specifies the hatch complexity of the
hatch type.
values for hatch index
a list of hatch indices
none
-Reference
number of references
reference
Parameter:
references
references
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
specifies the number of references. Up
to six hatch indices are allowed.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
279
13 Support Programs
Example of a hatch:
-Baseindex -200
#----Index -201
-Type Simple
-Angle 45
-Distance 5
-Offset 2
-Linetype 1
-Width 1
#----Index -207
-Type Complex
-Reference -201 -202 -202 -204 -208 -209
#---. . .
For a more complex example refer to GTSHATCH.ASC in the fonts
directory:
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
280
13.3.3 Converting to a Binary File
The hatch type definition file must be converted into a binary format.
binary format
To convert an ASCII hatch type definition file into its binary counterpart the
program hatob is used. This program is located in the bin directory of your
gXconvert installation.
hatob
Example of converting the ASCII hatch type definition file,
myhatches.asc, into its binary counterpart, mymarkers:
hatob myhatches.asc
In the case of errors a message is printed whichs support your when locating the
error cause. If the conversion was successful, no message at all is displayed but
a binary file with the same name as the ASCII file but without its postfix is generated.
If you are in doubt about the contents of a binary hatch type definition file, use the utility program hbtoa ('h'atch type module 'b'inary
'to' 'a'scii conversion) to convert the binary representation back into
a readable ASCII format.
Example of generating the ASCII file, myhatches.asc, using the
binary file myhatches:
hbtoa myhatches
Be careful not to overwrite your original ASCII File!
13.3.4 Environment Variables
The hatch type definition file is searched in three steps:
1. Use the file specified via the GTSHTYPE environment variable
2. If no GTSHTYPE environment variable has been defined, try to read a file
named GTSHTYPE in the local directory.
3. If still no hatch type definition file is found, try to read a file GTSHTYPE
located in the GTS_FONTS directory.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
environment
variables
gXconvert
System Description
281
13 Support Programs
13.3.5 Example
Example of a hatch type definition file:
# Number of definitions 21
# Baseindex -200
# Size of structure in bytes 8
#
-Baseindex -200
#---Index -201
-Type Simple
-Angle 45
-Distance 5
-Offset 2
-Linetype 1
-Width 1
#---Index -202
-Type Simple
-Angle 15
-Distance 5
-Offset 2
-Linetype 3
-Width 1
#---Index -203
-Type Simple
-Angle 75
-Distance 5
-Offset 2
-Linetype 5
-Width 1
#---Index -204
-Type Simple
-Angle 45
-Distance 10
-Offset 2
-Linetype 1
-Width 1
#---Index -205
-Type Simple
-Angle 0
-Distance 0
-Offset 0
-Linetype 0
-Width 0
#---Index -206
-Type Complex
-Reference -201 -203
#---Index -207
-Type Complex
-Reference -201 -202 -203 -204 -208 -209
#---Index -208
-Type Simple
-Angle 45
-Distance 3
-Offset 2
-Linetype 3
-Width 1
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
282
#---Index -209
-Type Simple
-Angle 45
-Distance 4
-Offset 2
-Linetype 3
-Width 1
#---Index -210
-Type Simple
-Angle 45
-Distance 4
-Offset 2
-Linetype 4
-Width 1
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
283
13 Support Programs
13.4 User-Defined Pens and Patterns
This chapter describes how to create a pen definition file for interpreting HP-GL
and HP-GL/2 files. For interpreting CalComp files, the colors of patterns can be
defined additionally.
CALPENS.ASC keeps 1024 default colors which are nearly the colors
of the CalComp color test output.
13.4.1 Pen and Pattern Definition File
The pen and pattern definition is specified in a text file. The syntax of this
command file conform to the following rules:
• There is no restriction regarding line length.
• There is no distinction between upper case letters and lower case letters.
• Commands may be separated by space, tabs or newlines.
• Parameters may (but need not) be introduced by -.
• Parameters may be abbreviated to the first 3 letters.
• Multiple commands per line are allowed.
Example:
pen 1 0 0 0 pat 1 100 100 100
#Comment line
Comments begins with #. Everything following the # up to the end
of the line will be ignored.
Example of a comment:
# This is a comment line.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
284
13.4.2 Parameters
pen redefinition
-freeze
pen redefinition
Parameter:
pen_pattern
pen_pattern
specifies which pens and patterns may
not be redefined.
pen all
pen from_index to_index
pen index
pattern all
pattern from_index to_index
pattern index
default:
none
Disallow overwriting of pens and patterns specified in the user-defined pen
and patterns definition file by the input file.
Usually the settings specified in a user-defined pen and patterns file are
used as default values only. If a pen or pattern setting is defined in the input
file, this value substitutes the user-defined value. To disallow the redefinition of the pen or pattern setting by an input file to be converted, -freeze
has been introduced.
Example of disallowing overwriting of all pens and patterns:
-freeze all
Example of disallowing overwriting all pens:
-freeze pen all
Example of -disallowing overwriting of a range of pens:
# Suppress overwriting of pens 1 to 16
-freeze pen 1 16
Example of disallowing overwriting a single pen:
-freeze pen 14
Example of disallowing overwriting all patterns:
-freeze pattern all
Example of disallowing overwriting of a range of patterns:
# Suppress overwriting of patterns 1 to 16
-freeze pattern 1 16
Example of disallowing overwriting a single pattern
-freeze pattern 2
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
285
pen color
13 Support Programs
overwriting of pen colors
-freezecolor
Parameter:
pen
specifies which pen colors may not be
redefined.
pen
index
from_index to_index
default:
none
Disallows overwriting of pen colors defined in the user-defined pen definition file by the input file.
-freezecolor
pen width
can only be used if a color for that pen is defined.
overwriting of pen widths
-freezewidth
Parameter:
pen
specifies which pens width may not be
redefined.
pen
index
from_index to_index
default:
none
Disallows overwriting of pen widths defined in the user-defined pen definition file by the input file.
In the following example color black and width 0.35 is assigned as default
values to pen 1. It freezes the color of that pen. Color definitions for pen 1
in the input file are ignored. Changes in width of pen 1 are accepted.
Pen 2 is set to default values of red and width 0.5. The width is freezed.
Changes in color of pen 2 are accepted. Changes in width are ignored.
Example of -freezecolor and -freezewidth:
-pen 1 0 0 0
-pen 2 255 0
-freezecolor
-freezewidth
gXconvert
System Description
width 0.35
0 width 0.5
1
2
-freezecolor
can only be used if a color for that pen is defined.
-freezewidth
can only be used if a width is defined for a pen.
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
286
pattern color definition
-pattern
Parameter:
pattern color
pattern
specifies the pattern colors.
pattern
index red green blue [rgb]
specifies the pattern color definition in
the RGB system.
index cyan magenta yellow cmy
specifies the pattern color definition in
the CMY system.
index cyan magenta yellow black [cmyb]
specifies the pattern color definition in
the CMYB system.
default:
none
Determines the pattern color. For further explanation see the following
examples.
Example of pattern color definition in RGB system:
-range 0 255
# define pattern 100 as blue
-pattern 100 0 0 255
Example of pattern color definition in CMY system:
-range 0 255
# define pattern 100 as blue
-pattern 100 255 255 0 cmy
Example of pattern color definition in CMYB system:
# define pattern 100 as blue
-pattern 100 255 255 0 0
pen color definition
-pen
Parameter:
pen
pen color
pen
specifies the pen colors.
index red green blue [rgb]
specifies the pen color in the RGB system.
index cyan magenta yellow cmy
specifies the pen color in the CMY system.
index cyan magenta yellow black cmyb
specifies the pen color in the CMYB
system.
.
default:
none
Defines the color for a certain pen. For further explanation and a combination of pen color definitions and pen widths see the following examples.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
287
13 Support Programs
Example of color definition in RGB system:
-range 0 255
# define pen 100 as light gray
-pen 100 200 200 200
Example of color definition in CMY system:
-range 0 255
# define pen 100 as light gray
-pen 100 55 55 55 cmy
Example of color definition in CMYB system:
-range 0 255
# define pen 100 as light gray
-pen 100 55 55 55 0 cmyb
Example of combining the pen color and pen width definition:
-range 0 255
-units mm
#
# define pen 100 as light gray and a width of 0.5 mm
#
-pen 100 55 55 55 0 cmyb width 0.5
Also the freeze option can be added:
#
-range 0 255
-units mm
#
# define pen 100 as light gray and a width 0f 0.5 mm
# Freeze pen color and width
#
-pen 100 55 55 55 0 cmyb width 0.5 freeze
Example of using -pen with -freezecolor and -freezewidth:
-pen 101 0 0 255 width 0.35 freezecolor
-pen 102 0 255 0 width 0.35 freezewidth
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
288
RBG data range
-range
Parameter:
RGB data range
low_value high_value
specifies the start of the range of the
RGB data.
low_value
0
...
1023
specifies the end of the range of the
RGB data.
high_value
0
...
1023
default:
none
Determines the range for RGB data. The first integer must be smaller than
the second integer.
Example:
# define colors in the range 0 ... 1023
-range 0 1023
# pen 100 defined as red pen
-pen 100 1023 0 0
measurement unit
-units
Parameter:
unit
units
specifies the units of measurement
units
mm
cm
inch
m
default:
none
-units may be placed anywhere in the file and determines the current unit
used for defining the pen width.
Example:
# use centimeters for pen width
-units cm
# pen width set to 0.5 mm for pen 100
-width 100 0.05
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
289
pen width
13 Support Programs
pen width
-width
Parameter:
index width
specifies the pen number.
specifies the width of the pen.
index
width
default:
none
Example:
-units mm
-width 100 0.5 # width of pen 100 defined as 0.5 mm
-width 101 1 # width of pen 101 defined as 1 mm
Example of combining -width and -freezewidth:
-width 102 1.25 freezewidth
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
290
13.4.3 Example of Pen and Pattern Definition
Example of a pen and pattern definition file:
# Color system: RGB
# Color range is by default in the range 0-255.
# You therefore could have omitted the range statement.
-range 0 255
#
Nr
R
G
B
#--------------------pen 1
0
0
255
-pen 2
128 64 0
-pen 3
0
0
0
-pen 4
255 128 255
-pen 5
128 64 0
-pen 6
0
200 0
-pen 7
128 64 0
-pen 8
121 255 121
-pen 9
121 255 121
-pen 10
0
200 0
-pen 11
0
0
255
-pen 12
128 64 0
-pen 13
0
0
128
-pen 14
0
0
128
-pen 15
255 0
0
# Units are by default specified in mm.
# You therefore could have omitted the unit statement.
-units mm
-width 1 0.13
-width 2 0.13
-width 3 0.13
-width 4 0.30
-width 5 0.30
-width 6 0.30
-width 7 2.00
-width 8 0.13
-width 9 0.35
-width 10 0.35
-width 11 0.35
-width 12 0.35
-width 13 0.25
-width 14 0.50
-width 15 0.18
#
-pattern 1 255 0 0
-pattern 2 0 255 0
-pattern 3 0 0 255
-pattern 4 255 255 0
-pattern 5 255 0 255
-pattern 6 255 0 255
Example:
units mm pen 100 255 0 0 width 0.5 freeze
# is the same as
units mm
pen 100 255 0 0
width 100 0.5
freeze pen 100
# or as
units mm
pen 100 255 0 0 freeze
width 100 0.5
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
291
13 Support Programs
13.4.4 Summary of How to Create Own Pens and Pattern
1. Create an ASCII file containing your pen and pattern definitions:
vi mypens.asc
2. Convert the ASCII file into a binary format file called mypens:
patob mypens.asc
is required by gXconvert for CalComp or HPGL input. The
name of the converted file is the same as the original file name, but without
postfix .asc or .ASC.
3. If desired, check the conversion by converting the binary file back to a readable format. Usually, this step is not necessary.
mymarkers
pbtoa mypens
The resulting ASCII file is named mypens.ASC.
On Windows this will overwrite your original file mypens.ASC.
Since pbtoa creates a generalized ASCII file, this will look
different from the original file. The comments of the original file
will be lost.
4. Define an environment variable CCALIN_PENS (CalComp input) or
CHPIN_PENS (HP-GL input) to point to the file containing your user-defined
pens and patterns.
setenv CCALIN_PENS /usr/mydir/mypens
(UNIX C shell)
An example of this file is contained in the fonts directory. It is called
CALPENS.ASC (the ASCII file) and CALPENS (the binary file). So,
CCALIN_PENS can be set to $GTS_FONTS/CALPENS after loading the gXconvert environment.
If the binary file is located in the $GTS_FONTS directory, this can be specified on the command line using -penopt, for example, -penopt CALPENS.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
292
13.5 Listener for UNIX
The listener program is available as supplementary program only.
The listener is a program that looks into a specified directory and waits for
graphic files to appear. As soon as a new file has arrived and is finished in
writing, the listener takes this file and performs an operation with it. The operation is normally a call of gXconvert. The parameters of the conversion process
and the location of the result may be predefined. In addition to a single directory,
a list of directories may be specified.
The command line usage is:
listen.gxc [-v] dirname [sub] [timeout]
or:
listen.gxc [-v] -dirlist cfgfile [timeout]
Note that:
• If -v is specified, all conversions done are logged to .log in the scanned
directory.
• If sub is specified behind the directory name, all subdirectories of the given
directory are scanned.
• A file .options may be located in these subdirectories containing options
for gXconvert, for example -dithermode 2 8 -filetype TIFF.
• The subdirectories and the .* files are checked at runtime and may therefore
be changed at any time.
• If -dirlist is specified, the next parameter is interpreted as file which
include a list of directories which will be scanned.
The listener for gXconvert consists of the following two scripts:
•
•
listen.gxc
local_convert
Both scripts are placed in the bin directory of the gXconvert installation.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
293
13 Support Programs
13.5.1 Environment Settings for the Listener
The following environment variables must be set when using listen.gxc:
Environment Variable
Description
GXCHOME
must point to an installation of gXconvert (i. e.
the directories $GXCHOME/bin, $GXCHOME/fonts,
etc. must exist)
GXCTMP
is the directory where the conversions take place;
default is /tmp.
GXCDEST
file from where the destination directory is read.
$GXCDEST is searched in the directory where the
input files are placed in (must always be a .*
file); default is .destination.
Table 13-3:
Environment Variables for the Listener
When these environments have been set, listen.gxc can be called
from any directory.
13.5.2 Operation Modes
The listen.gxc script scans the directories for files to appear.
If a file is found and its size is not zero and constant over a certain time, the script
$GXCHOME/bin/local_convert is called.
If this script is not present, $GXCHOME/bin/gxconvert is used for the conversion. When the conversion has been finished, the input file will be removed.
The following parameters are added automatically to the call of the
conversion.
-acknowledge none
-overwrite yes
-input filename
-output $GXCDEST/filename
The output file will be placed in the destination directory after the conversion has
finished. The output file will have the same name as the input file.
The script local_convert creates a directory $GXCTMP/gxc.pid where the
conversion takes place. The pid file extension is replaced by the system's process
ID. Using the .options file as GXCONV.CON, the conversion is started.
If the conversion finishes successfully, the output file is copied to the -output
directory. The name of the directory has been taken from the .destination
file. The temporary directory is removed.
If the conversion fails, the -input file is also copied to the gxc.pid directory
and the directory is not removed.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
294
13.5.3 Example of Using the Listener
Suppose we want to use the /home/input/TIFF and /home/input/PS directories for the conversion to TIFF-G4 400 dpi (device 8072) and PostScript (device
2000). The output files are to be placed in the /home/output/TIFF and /home/
output/PS directories.
1. Create the /home/output/TIFF and /home/output/PS directories.
2. In the /home/input/TIFF directory place two files: .options and .destination.
/home/input/TIFF/.options contains:
3.
4.
-device 8072
-mode original
/home/input/TIFF/.destination contains:
/home/output/TIFF
In the /home/input/PS directory place another set
.destination files.
/home/input/PS/.options contains:
-device 2000
-mode original
/home/input/PS/.destination contains:
/home/output/PS
If gXconvert has been installed in /home/gxconv, you
of .options and
have to set at least
the following environment variable:
setenv GXCHOME /home/gxconv (C shell)
or
GXCHOME=/home/gxconv; export GXCHOME (Bourne shell)
5. Start the listener script using the command line:
listen.gxc -v /home/input sub &
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
295
13 Support Programs
13.6 Listener for Windows NT
The listener program is available as a supplementary program only!
It is not part of the standard gXconvert product.
The llistener is a Windows service for monitoring and controlling of directories
and incoming files. Every directory may be associated with a command that is
started whenever a file is newly written to that directory.
When a file is changed within a directory, the listener checks if that file can be
accessed exclusively. Only if the exclusive access is granted by the operating
system, the associated command is executed. This prevents the permanent operation on files that are updated periodically by some application.
The directory that is surveyed must not be located on a network
drive; it has to be on a local disk!
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
296
13.6.1 Installation and Execution
The installation and configuration of the listener requires to be logged in with
administrator privileges.
1. Copy the program file of the listener (gtslsnr.exe) into the Windows
directory (%windir%\system32).
2. Create a file containing the directories that are controlled by the listener.
This file is called gtslsnr.ini and resides in the Windows directory
(%windir%\system32). The drives that are used must be local drives, i. e.
network drives or assoviated drives are not allowed.
Example of a gtslsnr.ini file that contains 3 directories which the
listener has to survey:
[Directories]
c:\dir1=
d:\path_1\subdirectory2=
c:\dir3=
must be appended to the directory name! Lines beginning with ;
are considered as comment lines. Up to 255 directories may be
specified.
=
It is your responsibility that the computer which runs the listener
will be able to process the load that the command execution will
initiate. Keep in mind that the listener does not control the programs
that will be started. It will execute the program as soon as a new file
enters any of its directories. This may cause several of the programs
to be running in parallel. When running multiple gXconvert in
parallel this may put heavy load on the CPU and file system. If this
might causes, look for our companion product gXnetplot that will
handle all conversion tasks in a manageable and server oriented
way.
3. In every controlled directory, create a .config file that contains the
command that is executed whenever a file is changed in the corresponding
directory.
command filename more_params
The command that is contained in the .config file will be supplied with
actual parameters at runtime. The #F string will be replaced by the name of
the file that is copied into the directory. Table 13-4 lists all parts of a
command:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
297
13 Support Programs
Command
Description
command
command name (in the example below it is
D:\path\convert.bat)
filename
name of the file or the directory including the full
path
more_params
command parameters
Table 13-4:
Commands
Example of a .config file:
D:\path\convert.bat #F -resolution 600 dpi
4. Handle the file carefully
The listener starts your command or program and will take care of the file
when it becomes accessible again. When the processing of your file has
been completed, it is up to the command or program to delete the file out of
the listener's directory. Usually, it is good practice to move the file out of the
listener's directory before beginning to process that file. If the file remains in
the listener's directory, the listener will issue the command with that file
again (usually again and again, be prepared for one second delay between
each issue).
Do not start commands or programs within the listener's directory
or having the current directory set to one of the listener's directories.
In this case, these programs create intermediate files (like gXconvert), these files will also trigger the listener. This is usually not
what is desired.
Therefore, change the directory to another working directory before
starting gXconvert!
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
298
5. Start the listener service by opening a DOS box and entering the command
line:
gtslsnr -install
This registrates the listener as a Windows NT service (this is a program that
is able to run even without any user to be logged in).
6. Configure the listener.
Define the account that the listener runs. By default, the listener and all the
programs that it starts will run as the local System account. This implies
administrator privileges without network access.
If you need your executed programs to run under a certain user
account, you will have tell the operating system about it:
→ Settings → Control Panel → Services
Identify the listener gralPrintSpool Listener and click on Startup.
Under Log on as select This account: and identify the desired user
account for the listener. Type in the password and retype it.
All programs that the Listener will start will be using this account.
7. Reboot your system
This is required for the listener service to be initialized and started.
Start
Since it is a service, it will run immediately after the boot process
has been completed, independent of whether a user is logged in or
not.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
299
13 Support Programs
13.6.2 Example of Controlling a Directory
controlling file
actions
This example explains the basic operation of controlling file actions within a
directory.
1. Create the gtslsnr.ini file in the system32 directory of Windows. In that
file, include the names of all directories to be scanned. Use the full directory
name including the drive letter to specify the directories.
This step and all subsequent ones require to be logged in as a user
with administrator privileges.
Example of %windir%\system32\gtslsnr.ini:
[Directories]
D:\output_home\application=
Remember: Network or associated drives are not allowed!
2. Create the .config file in each directory to be scanned.
In each .config, write the command that the listener calls. Usually, this is a
.BAT file that allows evaluating the parameter settings.
The contents of the file .config in the directory might be:
Example of .config in the D:\output_home\application directory:
e:\tool_path\tif2rtl.bat #F 1.0
→ -resolution 600 dpi
Usually, there will be some difficulties creating this file because
neither the Notepad editor nor the Windows Explorer will allow you
to specify a file name of .config. The easiest solution is to use an
editor that allows full control of the file name. The following procedure allows you to use Window-based tools:
Create a file using any name that your editor will allow, for example
any_name.txt. Then, open a DOS box, change into the directory
and use the DOS rename command to change the name of that file,
for example:
ren any_name.txt .config
3. Create the e:\tool_path\tif2rtl.bat command file that evaluates the
parameters supplied by the listener.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
300
You may use any command file or program that may be started by
Windows. Be sure to use the full path and correct name of the
command file or program. Do not rely on the path evaluation of the
your PATH environment because it might not be available when the
listener is executing that command.
4. When a new file enters one of the listener's directories, the listener replaces
#F in the .config file's command line by the complete path and file name
and executes the specified command.
The executed command in our example will be:
Example:
e:\tool_path\tif2rtl.bat
→ D:\plot_home\application\filename 1.0
→ -resolution 600 dpi
5. When using the tif2rtl.bat example be sure to insert some lines. Change
the working directory to some non-listener directory. Therefore, insert a line
near the beginning of the file, for example:
cd D:\temp\work_dir
Delete the file in the listener's directory after the processing has been done.
Therefore, insert the following line at the end of tif2rtl.bat:
if exist %1 del %1
In case that you need to debug the listener's execution, insert a line similar
to:
echo %1 %2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8 %9
→ >> D:\temp\tof2rtl.log
This will write the command line to the end of the log file.
13.6.3 Event Messages
All messages generated by the listener (start and error messages) are written to
the system's event viewer file (Start → Programs → Administrative Tools
→ Event Viewer).
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
start and error
messages
gXconvert
System Description
301
13 Support Programs
13.6.4 Changing Listener's Files
Changes made to any .config file within a controlled directory or to the
gtslsnr.ini file will only be notified by the listener service after restarting the
computer or after stopping and restarting the listener service.
You need to be logged in with administrator privileges to do so.
The listener service is selected using the Control Panel → Services dialog.
Select the listener service and stop it, agree by pressing the Yes button on the
following dialog, and start the listener service again.
When starting the listener service, all configuration files are read
and evaluated.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
13 Support Programs
302
13.7 ps2pdf - PostScript to PDF Conversion
Using the ps2pdf program is seldom required in all newer versions
of gXconvert. As of version 3.56, a PDF output format is available
that generates PDF using the device ID 23xx.
For converting a PostScript file to PDF, the program ps2pdf.sh (on UNIX) or
ps2pdf.bat (on Windows) is available in the gXconvert's bin directory.
The command line parameters are:
ps2pdf.sh [-p papersize] inputfile [outputfile] (on UNIX)
ps2pdf.bat [-p papersize] inputfile [outputfile] (on Windows)
The parameters are:
-p:
paper size
Parameter:
papersize
paper size
papersize
specifies the paper size.
letter
note
legal
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
archE
archD
archC
archB
archA
flsa
flse
halfletter
11x17
ledger
The names of the paper sizes define the media sizes of the output
file according to the ISO format.
If -p has not been given, the output file uses the size of the input file. The
output is usually placed in the lower left corner of the paper size. If the file
is larger than the specified paper size, it is possibly cut in the upper right
corner.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
303
13 Support Programs
input file
inputfile
output file
outputfile
name of the PostScript input file
name of the PDF output file
UNIX: If no output file is given, the output is written to a file whose name
is constructed of the basename of the input file. An input file's extension
.ps is replaced by .pdf.
Windows: If no output file is given, the output file's name is constructed of
the input file and .pdf is appended.
Example of converting a PostScript file to PDF using A3 media size:
UNIX:
ps2pdf.sh -p a3 my_file.ps
This will create the A3 output file my_file.pdf
Windows:
ps2pdf.bat -p a3 my_file.ps
This will create the A3 output file my_file.ps.pdf
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
14 Codes and Command Lists
14
304
Codes and Command Lists
14.1 CGM Elements
Code
CGM Metafile Element
132
INTEGER PRECISION
133
REAL PRECISION
134
INDEX PRECISION
135
COLOR PRECISION
136
COLOR INDEX PRECISION
137
MAXIMUM COLOR INDEX
138
COLOR VALUE EXTENT
141
FONT LIST
142
CHARACTER SET LIST
143
CHARACTER CODING ANNOUNCER
257
SCALING MODE
258
COLOR SELECTION MODE
259
LINE WIDTH SPECIFICATION MODE
260
MARKER SIZE SPECIFICATION MODE
261
EDGE WIDTH SPECIFICATION MODE
263
BACKGROUND COLOR
385
VDC INTEGER PRECISION
386
VDC REAL PRECISION
387
AUXILIARY COLOR
388
TRANSPARENCY
389
CLIP RECTANGLE
390
CLIP INDICATOR
641
LINE BUNDLE INDEX
642
LINE TYPE
643
LINE WIDTH
644
LINE COLOR
645
MARKER BUNDLE INDEX
646
MARKER TYPE
647
MARKER SIZE
648
MARKER COLOR
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
305
14 Codes and Command Lists
649
TEXT BUNDLE INDEX
650
TEXT FONT INDEX
651
TEXT PRECISION
652
CHARACTER EXPANSION FACTOR
653
CHARACTER SPACING
654
TEXT COLOR
655
CHARACTER HEIGHT
656
CHARACTER ORIENTATION
657
TEXT PATH
658
TEXT ALIGNMENT
659
CHARACTER SET INDEX
660
ALTERNATE CHARACTER SET INDEX
661
FILL BUNDLE INDEX
662
INTERIOR STYLE
663
FILL COLOR
664
HATCH INDEX
665
PATTERN INDEX
666
EDGE INDEX
667
EDGE TYPE
668
EDGE WIDTH
669
EDGE COLOR
670
EDGE VISIBILITY
674
COLOR TABLE
675
ASPECT SOURCE FLAGS
Table 14-1:
gXconvert
System Description
CGM Metafile Element and their Codes
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
14 Codes and Command Lists
306
14.2 CalComp Input
The gXconvert CalComp input part supports the complete CalComp 906/907
command set.
Furthermore, many commands of the 951 set and PCI set are recognized. A HCBS generated CalComp file is a combination of 951,
906, and 907 commands and is therefore also supported by gXconvert.
The Support column contains entries with the following meanings:
actions during
conversion
Entry
Meaning
CS
The command is completely supported.
S
The command is supported, minor restrictions apply, see the
Comment column.
*
The command is recognized and skipped.
H
The command controls hardware behaviour. It is of no interest for
a conversion process. The command is recognized and skipped.
Table 14-2:
Entries and their Meanings
Table 14-3 references the actions that are required during conversion:
Code
Command Name
Controller
Support
00
No Operation 1
951/906/907
CS
01
Search Address
951/906/907
CS
02
Pen Down
951/906/907
CS
03
Pen Up
951/906/907
CS
04
Pen Select
951/906/907
CS
05 ...
Symbol String Count
951/906/907
CS
06 ...
Controller
Scaling
07 ...
Radix Definition
08 00
Disable Double Buff- 51/906/907
ering
H
08 01
Enable Double Buff- 951/906/907
ering
H
08 02
Set Response Suffix 951/906/907
Length
H
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Symbol 951/906/907
951/906/907
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
Comment
S
CS
gXconvert
System Description
307
14 Codes and Command Lists
08 03
Set Turnaround Delay
951/906/907
H
08 04 ...
Set Good
Message
Response
951/906/907
H
08 05
Set Bad
Message
Response
951/906/907
H
08 06
Set Response Request
String
951/906/907
H
08 07
Set Maximum Waiting
Time
951/906/907
H
08 08
Set Waiting Response
Message
951/906/907
H
08 09
Disable Del Character
951/906/907
H
08 0A
Set 128 Byte Buffers
51/906/907
H
08 0B
Set 256 Byte Buffers
951/906/907
H
08 0C
Set 512 Byte Buffers
951/906/907
H
08 0D
Set 1024 Byte Buffers
951/906/907
H
09 ...
Scaling
951/906/907
CS
0A
Pause
951/906/907
H
0B 00 03
Manual
951/906/907
H
0B 00 04
No Operation 2
951/906/907
CS
output device Performance
906/907
H
Newplot
951/906/907
S
0B
00
...
05
0B 00 06
0B
00
...
0B
Chordal
Command
0B
00
...
0B
Font Select
951/906/907
S
0B
05
...
0E
Symbol Characteristics 951/906/907
1
S
0B
05
...
0F
Symbol Characteristics
2
951/906/907
S
0B 07 ...
output device Symbol
Scaling
951/ /907
S
0B 08 ...
Dash Bypass
951/ /907
CS
0C ...
Arc 16 Bit
951/ /907
CS
0C ...
Circle 16 Bit
951/ /907
CS
0C ...
Arc 24 Bit
951/ /907
CS
gXconvert
System Description
Tolerance 951/ /907
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
CS
Controls switching to
German character set.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
14 Codes and Command Lists
308
0C ...
Circle 24 Bit
951/ /907
CS
0D ...
Dashline
951/ /907
CS
0E ...
Plot Symbol
Selected Set
0E 06
Operator Message
0E 07
Operator Message with 951/ /907
Pause
H
0E 08
Select Symbol Set 0
951/ /907
S
0E 09
Select Symbol Set 1
951/ /907
S
0E 0A
Select Symbol Set 2
951/ /907
S
0E 0B
Select Symbol Set 3
951/ /907
S
0E 0C
Select Symbol Set 4
951/ /907
S
0E ...
User-Defined Symbol9
51/ /907
*
0E ...
Erase User Symbol Set
951/ /907
*
0E ...
User-Defined Symbol
951/ /907
*
0E ...
Erase User Symbol Set
951/ /907
*
0E 0F ...
Plot Symbol from any 951/ /907
Set
S
0E 10
Write to RAM
951/ /907
H
0E 11
Negate
951 Electrostat
*
0E 12 ...
Setpen
951 Electrostat
S
0E 13 00
Paper Cutter
951 Electrostat
H
0E 13 01
Top of Form
951 Electrostat
H
Async
951 Electrostat
H
0E 15 ...
Hatch
951 Electrostat
CS
CalComp hatch pattern
not used.
0E 16 ...
Setpat
951 Electrostat
CS
Pattern used to calculate color intensities
only.
0E 18
Start Plot
951 Electrostat
H
0E 19
Force Plot
951 Electrostat
H
0E 1A
output device Select
951 Electrostat
H
0E
13
...
14
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
from 951/ /907
951/906/907
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
S
Character is taken from
GRAL Calcomp font.
No
symbol
set
switching is done.
H
Character is taken from
GRAL Calcomp font.
No
symbol
set
switching is done.
Line density ignored.
gXconvert
System Description
309
14 Codes and Command Lists
0E 1B
Plot Copies
951 Electrostat
S
0E 1D ...
Mirror
951/ /907
CS
Electrostat
0E 1E ...
Window
951/ /907
S
Electrostat
0E 1F
Rotation
951/ /907
CalComp
special
feature 'exterior clipping' not realized.
CS
Electrostat
0E 20 ...
New Pen
951/ /907
CS
Electrostat RVI
0E 21 ...
Pattern Fill
951/ /907
CS
The color used for
filling is submitted to
the same restrictions as
in the Hatch command.
CS
Pattern used to calculate color intensities
only.
CS
Mapping of CMYB
colors to RGB colors.
Electrostat RVI
0E 22 ...
Setpat
951/ /907
Electrostat RVI
0E 23 ...
Color Modify
951/ /907
Electrostat RVI
0E 24 ...
Color Sequence
951/ /907
*
Electrostat RVI
0E 25
Disk IO
951/ /907
H
Electrostat RVI
0E 26 ...
New Level
951/ /907 Elec- CS
trostat RVI
0E 27
Plot Status
951/ /907
Erase level data evaluated
H
Electrostat RVI
0E 28 ...
Xsetpen
951/ /907
CS
Electrostat RVI
0E 29 ...
Set Level
951/ /907
CS
Electrostat RVI
0E 2A ...
Raster Fill
951/ /907
Erase level data evaluated
CS
Electrostat RVI
0E 2B ...
Pixel
951/ /907
CS
Electrostat RVI
0E 2C ...
Area Fill
951/ /907
CS
Electrostat RVI
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
14 Codes and Command Lists
0E 0F
Table 14-3:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
End of Plot
310
951/906/907
Electrostat RVI
CS
Actions During CalComp Conversion
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
311
14 Codes and Command Lists
14.3 HP-GL Input
14.3.1 HP-GL Commands
The gXconvert HP-GL input part recognizes the HP-GL and HP-GL/2
commands listed in Table 14-5.
The Support column contains entries with the following meaning:
Entry
Meaning
CS
The command is completely supported.
CSn
The command is completely supported, no output will be generated
(generally due to the functionality of the command).
S
The command is supported, minor restrictions apply, see the
Comment column.
Sn
The command is supported, minor restrictions apply, see the
comments column, no output will be generated (generally due to the
functionality of the command).
*
The command is recognized and skipped, no output will be generated.
H
The command controls hardware behaviour. It is of no interest for a
conversion process. The command is recognized and skipped.
Table 14-4:
Entries and their Meanings
The HP-GL HP-GL/2 column list the type of HP-GL:
• HP-GL (also included in HP-GL/2)
• HP-GL/2 (only available in HP-GL/2
Table 14-5 references the actions that are required during conversion:
Code
Command Name
HP-GL
HP-GL/2
Support
Comment
AA
arc absolute
2
CS
including chord angle, chordal
tolerance, and line type of arc.
AC
anchor corner
2
CS
transformed to fill reference
point.
AD
alternate font definition
1
S
partially supported
AF
advance full page
1
CSn
advance to next picture
AH
advance half page
1
CSn
advance to next picture
AP
automatic pen pick up
1
H
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
14 Codes and Command Lists
312
Code
Command Name
HP-GL
HP-GL/2
Support
Comment
AR
arc relative
2
CS
including chord angle, chordal
tolerance and line type of arc
AS
select pen acceleration
1
H
AT
absolute arc three points
2
CS
including chord angle, chordal
tolerance and line type of arc
BF
buffer plot
1
H
out of use; instruction recognized but ignored
BL
buffer label
1
H
out of use; instruction recognized but ignored
BP
begin plot
2
CSn
internal control
BR
Bezier curve relative
1
*
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
BZ
Bezier curve absolute
1
*
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
CA
alternate character set
2
Sn
supported character sets: ISO,
German and Special
CC
character chord angle
1
*
instruction recognized but
ignored; refers to HP specific
arc-font characters
CF
character fill mode
2
*
instruction recognized but
ignored; specifies the way
output fonts will be rendered
CI
circle
2
CS
including chord angle, chordal
tolerance and line type of arc
CM
character selection mode
1
*
instruction recognized but
ignored; refers to HP specific 7/
8 bit and ISO 7/8 bit character
set modes
CO
comment
1
CSn
internal control only
CP
character plot
1
S
may be incorrect for certain
combinations of rotation, text
path and text direction
CR
set color range
2
CSn
internal control only
CS
standard character set
1
S
supported character sets: ISO,
German and Special
CT
chord tolerance mode
2
CSn
internal control only
CV
enable curved line gener- 1
ator
*
instruction
ignored
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
recognized
but
gXconvert
System Description
313
14 Codes and Command Lists
Code
Command Name
HP-GL
HP-GL/2
Support
Comment
DC
digitize clear
2
H
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
DF
set default values
2
CS
DI
set absolute label direction
2
CS
DL
download character
2
*
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
DP
digitize point
2
H
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
DR
set relative label direction
2
CS
DS
designate character set into 1
slot
H
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
DT
define label terminator
2
CSn
internal use only
DV
define variable text path
2
CS
EA
edge rectangle absolute
2
CS
EC
enable cutter
2
H
EP
edge polygon
2
CSn
ER
edge rectangle relative
2
CS
ES
extra space
2
S
EW
edge wedge of circle
2
CSn
FP
fill polygon
2
CSn
FI
primary font selection
2
CS
FN
secondary font selection
2
CS
FP
fill polygon
2
CS
FR
advance frame
2
CSn
advance to next picture
FS
pen force
1
H
instruction
ignored
FT
fill type
2
CSn
restriction applies: hatch types
must be mapped using hatch
utility (hatob) and line utility
(latob)
GC
set count number
1
Sn
out of use; instruction recognized but ignored
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
increase or decrease of spaces
between lines might not work
as expected
recognized
but
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
14 Codes and Command Lists
314
Code
Command Name
HP-GL
HP-GL/2
Support
Comment
GM
gm
1
Sn
out of use; instruction recognized but ignored
GP
group pen
1
H
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
IM
input mask
1
H
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
IN
initialize output device
2
CS
IP
input p1 and p2
2
CS
internal use only; no output
generated
IR
input relative p1 and p2
2
CS
internal use only; no output
generated
IV
invoke character slot (i)
into character table (j)
1
*
instruction
ignored
IW
input window
2
CS
KY
assign function to key
1
H
LA
line attributes
2
Sn
LB
label ASCII string
2
CS
LM
label mode
1
*
LO
label origin
2
Sn
LT
set line type
2
CS
MC
merge control
2
*
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
MG
message
2
*
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
MT
media type
2
H
NP
number of pens
2
CSn
NR
not ready
2
H
OA
output actual position
1
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OC
output commanded posi- 1
tion
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
recognized
but
instruction recognized but
ignored; attributes can be set
via configuration files for
output
devices,
e. g.
GRALX_20
LO 1-9 currently supported
gXconvert
System Description
315
14 Codes and Command Lists
Code
Command Name
HP-GL
HP-GL/2
Support
Comment
OD
output digitized point
2
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OE
output error
2
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OF
output factors
1
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OG
output count number
1
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OH
output hard clip limits
2
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OI
output identification
2
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OK
output function key
1
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OL
output label length
1
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OO
output options
1
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OP
output p1 and p2
2
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OS
output status
2
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OT
output carousel type
1
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
OW
output window
1
*
instruction recognized
ignored; not applicable
but
PA
plot absolute
2
CS
PB
print buffered label
1
*
instruction
ignored
but
PC
pen color assignment
2
CSn
PD
pen down
2
CS
PE
polyline encode
2
CS
including fractional data
PG
advance full page
2
CS
advance to next picture
PM
polygon mode
2
CSn
PR
plot relative from current 2
pen
gXconvert
System Description
recognized
CS
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
14 Codes and Command Lists
316
Code
Command Name
HP-GL
HP-GL/2
Support
Comment
PS
select paper size
2
CS
influences VDC extent
PT
pen thickness
1
CSn
PU
pen up
2
CS
PW
pen width
2
CS
QL
quality level
2
H
RA
fill rectangle absolute
2
CS
RF
raster fill
2
CSn
RO
rotate coordinate system
2
CSn
RP
replot
2
Sn
RR
fill rectangle relative
2
CS
RT
relative arc three points
2
CS
SA
select alternate font
2
CSn
SB
scalable or bitmap font
2
*
SC
user unit scaling
2
CS
SD
standard font definition
2
Sn
only attribute four (character
height) is evaluated
SG
select pen group
1
H
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
SI
set absolute character size
2
CS
SL
set character slant
2
CS
SM
symbol mode
2
CS
SP
select pen
2
CS
SR
set relative character size
2
CS
SS
select standard font
2
CS
ST
sort
2
H
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
SV
screened vectors
2
CSn
TD
transparent data
2
*
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
TL
tick length
1
CSn
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
Total number of copies is
written to GXCONV.INF (not
to the output file)
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
gXconvert
System Description
317
14 Codes and Command Lists
Code
Command Name
HP-GL
HP-GL/2
Support
TR
transparency mode
2
CSn
UC
user-defined character
1
*
UF
create
type
user-defined
fill 1
*
UL
user-defined line type
2
CS
VA
activate adaptive velocity
1
H
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
VN
reactivate normal velocity
1
H
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
VS
set velocity
2
H
instruction
ignored
recognized
but
WD
write to display
1
*
WG
fill wedge of circle
2
CS
WU
pen width unit selection
2
CS
XT
draw x-axis tick
1
CSn
YT
draw y-axis tick
1
CSn
Table 14-5:
gXconvert
System Description
Comment
Actions During HP-GL or HP-GL/2 Conversion
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
14 Codes and Command Lists
318
14.4 HP RTL Input
Table 14-7 lists the commands that are supported during interpretation of HP
RTL coded files. Major HP PCL commands are recognized, too.
HP RTL is a sub-set of HP-GL/2 but it is purely intended for specifying raster graphics data. The HP RTL coding consists of ESC
command sequences (which are not listed here).
The coding in the Support column is as follows:
Entry
Meaning
CS
The command is completely supported.
S
The command is supported, minor restrictions apply, see the
Comment column.
*
The command is recognized and skipped, no output will be generated.
H
The command controls hardware behaviour. It is of no interest for a
conversion process. The command is recognized and skipped.
Table 14-6:
Entries and their Meanings
Command Name
Mode
Support
Comment
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode
-1
CS
Context switch from HP RTL to "stand alone
output device"
0
CS
The HP-GL/2 pen position and palette are set to
the previous pen position and palette
1
CS
The HP-GL/2 pen position is set to the current
HP RTL CAP; the HP-GL/2 palette is set to the
previous HP-GL/2 palette.
2
S
The HP-GL/2 pen position is set to the previous
HP-GL/2 pen position; the HP-GL/2 palette is
set to the current HP RTL palette
3
S
The HP-GL/2 pen position is set to the current
HP RTL CAP; the HP-GL/2 palette is set to the
current HP RTL palette
0
CS
The new HP RTL CAP and palette are set to the
previous HP RTL CAP and palette
1
CS
The HP RTL CAP is set to the HP-GL/2 pen
position; the HP RTL palette is set to the
previous HP RTL palette
Enter PCL Mode
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
319
14 Codes and Command Lists
Command Name
Mode
Support
Comment
2
S
The HP RTL CAP is set to the previous HP RTL
CAP. The HP RTL palette is set to the HP-GL/
2 palette
3
S
The HP RTL CAP is set to the HP-GL/2 pen
position; the HP RTL is set to the HP-GL/2
palette
Reset
CS
Universal Exit Language/
Start of PJL
CS
AppleTalk Config.
CS
Configure Image Data
0
CS
Indexed by plane (indexed color selection;
encoded by plane)
1
CS
Indexed by pixel (indexed color selection;
encoded by pixel)
Set Red Parameter
CS
Set Green Parameter
CS
Set Blue Parameter
CS
Assign
Number
Color
Index
CS
Push/Pop Palette
S
Source Raster Width
CS
Source Raster Height
CS
Move CAP
(Decipoints)
Horizontal
CS
Move CAP
(Dots)
Horizontal
CS
Move CAP Horizontal (HP
RTL Native Resolution
Inch Units)
CS
Move CAP Vertical (Decipoints)
CS
Move CAP Vertical (Dots)
CS
Move CAP Vertical (HP
RTL Native Resolution
Inch Units)
CS
Y Offset
CS
Destination Raster Width
CS
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
14 Codes and Command Lists
Command Name
320
Mode
Support
Destination Raster Height
CS
Raster Line Path
CS
Negative Motion
CS
Set Graphics Resolution
CS
Start Raster Graphics
CS
End Raster Graphics
CS
Transfer Raster Data by
Plane
CS
Transfer Raster Data by
Row/Block
CS
Set Compression Method
0
CS
unencoded (row-based)
1
CS
run-length encoding (row-based)
2
CS
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) revision 4.0
"Packbits" encoding (row-based)
3
CS
seed-row encoding (row-based)
Set Number of Planes Per
Row
CS
Start of PJL
CS
Mechanical Print Quality
H
Current Pattern
*
Designate Primary Font
*
Enable Underline
*
End of File Wrap
*
Fill Rectangular
Command
Area
*
HMI
*
Horizontal Rectangle Size
*
Horizontal Rectangle Size
*
Line Termination
*
Move CAP
Columns
*
Move CAP Vertical Rows
*
Number of Copies
*
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
instruction recognized but ignored
*
Gamma Correction
Horizontal
Comment
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
321
14 Codes and Command Lists
Command Name
Mode
Paper Size
Pattern
Mode
Support
*
Transparency
*
Perforation Skip Mode
*
Primary and Secondary
Pitch Mode
*
Print Mode Selection
*
Rotate Image
*
Select Logical Page
*
Select Media Source
*
Select Render Algorithm
*
Select Scale Algorithm
*
Set Foreground color
*
Set Left Margin
*
Set Page Length
*
Set Picture Frame Anchor
Point
*
Set Right Margin
*
Set Text Length
*
Set Top Margin
*
Shading
*
Source
Mode
Transparency
*
Text Color
*
Transparent Print Mode
*
Vertical Rectangle Size
*
VMI
*
Table 14-7:
gXconvert
System Description
Comment
Actions During HP RTL Conversion
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
15
322
List of Predefined Devices
Table 15-1 lists all abbreviations used in this section:
Abbreviation
Paper Format
A4 L
DIN A4 landscape
A4 P
DIN A4 portrait
A4 S
DIN A4 square (larger size of A4 in both dimensions)
A3 L
DIN A3 landscape, etc.
DL
D size landscape
DP
D size portrait
EL
E size landscape
EP
E size portrait
Table 15-1:
Abbreviations for Paper Formats
The paper formats listed in this section only give you an approximate idea. The paper formats supported by the output devices are
usually smaller. Look into the configuration files for the correct
sizes.
The predefined devices which are listed here are delivered with the
standalone version of gXconvert. The configuration files delivered
with PLOSSYS netdome are using different devices with the
mainly used output formats. See [NETDOME_TEC] for a list of
predefined device IDs.
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
323
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.1 Predefined PostScript and PDF Devices
configuration file
CXXPSCRI
The PostScript and PDF device IDs are predefined in the configuration file
CXXPSCRI.
The specification of "color" in the device details means that the
color data is available in the output file sent to the device. This does
not mean that the device is producing color output. All PostScript
devices are capable of mapping (rasterizing, screening) these colors
to their printing capabilities.
mapping of the
device
Using this mapping of the device usually results in better print quality, although
higher transmission and printing time.
300 dpi
All PostScript devices are defined using 300 dpi. This is usually only important
when converting from a raster or hybrid format containing raster elements to
PostScript. Even if all modern devices support higher resolution, a lower raster
resolution will give the device the opportunity to use its screening capabilities to
map color or gray scale images to the best printing result.
Whenever this does not give sufficient quality (e. g. when printing small texts,
super-fine lines, or high-resolution images), feel free to overwrite the predefined
values (e. g. by specifiying -resolution 600 dpi in the command line).
15.1.1
PostScript Devices
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2000
285 * 197 [6 6] (A4 L)
256 colors, 300 dpi
2001
197 * 285 [6 6] A4 P)
256 colors, 300 dpi
2002
365 * 287 [5 34] (A3 L)
256 colors, 300 dpi
2003
287 * 365 [5 34] (A3 P)
256 colors, 300 dpi
2004
285 * 197 [6 6] (A4 L)
256 gray scales, 300 dpi
2005
197 * 285 [6 6] (A4 P)
256 gray scales, 300 dpi
2006
365 * 287 [6 6] (A3 L)
256 gray scales, 300 dpi
2007
287 * 365 [5 34] (A3 P)
256 gray scales, 300 dpi
2008
291 * 204 [0 0] (A4 L)
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
256 colors, 300 dpi
2009
8000 * 8000 [0 0]
PostScript Level 2, variable page
size
256 colors, 300 dpi
up to 8000 mm * 8000 mm
Table 15-2:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined PostScript Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.1.2
324
Lexmark (Optra and Others)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2010
204 * 264 [3 23] (A4)
Optra C, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2011
287 * 204 [2 5] (A4)
Optra N / Pro N, gray, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2012
411 * 287 [5 5] (A3)
Optra N / Pro N, gray, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2013
287 * 204 [2 5] (A4)
Optra RN+, gray, 300 dpi, rotate
90
2014
285 * 195 [6 6] (A4)
Optra Optra SC 1275, 1275n,
color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2015
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
Optra 1650, 1650n, 1650S, gray,
300 dpi, rotate 90
2016
285 * 200 [4 10] (A4)
4079, 4079+Pro, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2017
404 * 286 [6 12] (A3)
4079, 4079+Pro, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2018
285 * 200 [4 10] (A4)
4039, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2019
404 * 286 [6 12] (A3)
4039, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
Table 15-3:
15.1.3
Predefined Lexmark Devices
HP LaserJet
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2020
282 * 200 [5 10] (A4)
4500/N/DN, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2021
288 * 200 [5 7] (A4)
8500/N/DN, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 0
2022
291 * 411 [5 7] (A3)
8500/N/DN, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 0
2023
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
5C, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2024
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
5CM, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2025
408 * 287 [5 5] (A3)
5CM, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
Table 15-4:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined HP LaserJet Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
325
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.1.4
IBM
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2026
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
4043, gray, 300 dpi, rotate 90
Table 15-5:
15.1.5
Kodak PhotoPrinter
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2027
1520 * 10000 [0 0]
LFP 2060, color, 300 dpi, rotate
0
2028
210 * 297 [1 1] (A4)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2029
420 * 297 (A3)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
Table 15-6:
15.1.6
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined IBM Devices
Predefined Kodak PhotoPrinter Devices
QMS (Magicolor and Others)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2030
285 * 202 [4.5 6.0] (A4)
Magicolor 330, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2031
407 * 287 [4.0 7.0] (A3)
Magicolor 330, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2032
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
410, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2033
408 * 287 [5 5] (A3)
410, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2034
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
860, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2035
408 * 287 [5 5] (A3)
860, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2036
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
880, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2037
408 * 287 [5 5] (A3)
880, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2038
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
1660/Enhanced, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2039
408 * 287 [5 5] (A3)
1660/Enhanced, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2040
196 * 282 [8 10] (A4)
2060 BX/EX/FX/GX, color, 300
dpi, rotate 0
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
326
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2041
282 * 405 [8 10] (A3)
2060 BX/EX/FX/GX, color, 300
dpi, rotate 0
2042
282 * 200 [5.5 6.0] (A4)
2425 Turbo, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2043
406 * 288 [4.5 7.0] (A3)
2425 Turbo, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2044
285 * 202 [4.5 6.0] (A4)
Magicolor 330, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
Table 15-7:
15.1.7
Predefined QMS (Magicolor and Others) Devices
Seiko ColorPoint
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2044
210 * 288 [5 5] (A4)
835 PS, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2045
420 * 288 [5 5] (A3)
835 PS, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
Table 15-8:
15.1.8
Predefined Seiko ColorPoint Devices
Tektronix/Xerox Phaser
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2050
282 * 200 [5 10] (A4)
300, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2051
282 * 200 [5 10] (A4)
340+, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2052
282 * 200 [5 10] (A4)
350, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2053
187 * 270 [12 25] (A4)
350 EF, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2054
282 * 200 [5 9] (A4)
360, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2055
282 * 200 [5 9] (A4)
380, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2056
282 * 200 [5 9] (A4)
380 EF, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2057
405 * 287 [6 9] (A3)
380 EF, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2058
282 * 200 [5 5] (A4)
440, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2059
297 * 210 [5 5] (A4)
440 E, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2060
187 * 270 [12 25] (A4)
450 EF, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2061
203 * 273 [5 5] (A4)
480, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2062
291 * 396 [5 5] (A3)
480, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
327
15 List of Predefined Devices
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2063
282 * 200 [5 10] (A4)
550, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2064
282 * 200 [5 10] (A4)
560, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2065
282 * 200 [5 10] (A4)
560 E, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2066
282 * 200 [5 10] (A4)
560 EF, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2067
6000 * 914
600, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2068
282 * 200 [5 5] (A4)
740, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2069
Unused
2070
282 * 200 [5 5] (A4)
780, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2071
405 * 287 [4 4] (A3)
780, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2072
282 * 200 [5 10] (A4)
840, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
Table 15-9:
15.1.9
Predefined Tektronix/Xerox Phaser Devices
QMS Magicolor
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2073
198.5 * 285.5 [6 6] (A4)
Magicolor 2, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 0
Table 15-10:
Predefined QMS Magicolor Devices
15.1.10 Lexmark
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2074
285 * 200 [4 10] (A4)
W810, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2075
404 * 286 [6 12] (A3)
W810, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
Table 15-11:
Predefined Lexmark Devices
15.1.11 WDV
gXconvert
System Description
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2080
282 * 200 [5 5] (A4)
2400/2410/2416/2420/2422,
color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2081
405 * 287 [4 4] (A3)
2400/2410/2416/2420/2422,
color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
328
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2082
282 * 200 [5 5] (A4)
2600/2610, color, 300 dpi, rotate
90
2083
405 * 287 [4 4] (A3)
2600/2610, color, 300 dpi, rotate
90
2084
282 * 200 [5 5] (A3)
1200, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
Table 15-12:
Predefined WDV Devices
15.1.12 Océ
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2085
205 * 290 [3 4] (A4)
3165, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2086
413 * 291 [3 4] (A3)
3165, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2087
196.5 * 291 [4.5 4.0] (A4)
625, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2088
407 * 291 [4.0 9.0] (A3)
625, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2089
Unused
2090
205 * 290 [3 4] (A4)
4900, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2091
413 * 291 [3 4] (A3)
4900, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
Table 15-13:
Predefined Océ Devices
15.1.13 Mannesmann Tally
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2092
201 * 287 [4.5 5.0] (A4)
8204 , color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2093
411 * 287 [5.0 5.0] (A3)
8204 , color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2094
201 * 287 [4.5 5.0] (A4)
8004 , color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2095
201 * 287 [4.5 5.0] (A3)
8104 , color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
Table 15-14:
Predefined Mannesmann Tally Devices
15.1.14 QMS (Magicolor and Others)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2096
196 * 282 [8 10] (A4)
4060, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
329
15 List of Predefined Devices
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2097
282 * 405 [8 10] (A3)
4060, color, 300 dpi, rotate 90
2098
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
1060/Enhanced, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2099
Unused
2100
196 * 282 [8 10] (A4)
2560, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2101
282 * 405 [8 10] (A3)
2560, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2102
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
1725, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2103
196 * 282 [8 10] (A4)
3260/4032, color, 300 dpi, rotate
0
2104
282 * 405 [8 10] (A3)
3260/4032, color, 300 dpi, rotate
0
2105
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
PagePro 1100, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2106
283 * 199 [5 5] (A4)
PagePro 18, color, 300 dpi, rotate
90
2107
285 * 202 [4.5 6.0] (A4)
Magicolor 6100, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
2108
407 * 287 [4.0 7.0] (A3)
Magicolor 6100, color, 300 dpi,
rotate 90
Table 15-15:
Predefined QMS (Magicolor and Others) Devices
15.1.15 PDF
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2300
210 * 297 [0 0] (A4 P)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2301
420 * 297 [0 0] (A3 L)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2302
594 * 420 [0 0] (A2 L)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2303
841 * 594 [0 0] (A1 L)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2304
1189 * 841 [0 0] (A0 L)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2305
5000 * 5000 [0 0]
Variable size, up to 5000mm
5000mm, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
Table 15-16:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined PDF Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
330
15.1.16 Hyprid PDF
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
2310
210 * 297 [0 0] (A4 P)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2311
420 * 297 [0 0] (A3 L)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2312
594 * 420 [0 0] (A2 L)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2313
841 * 594 [0 0] (A1 L)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2314
1189 * 841 [0 0] (A0 L)
color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2315
5000 * 5000 [0 0]
Variable size, up to 5000mm
5000mm, color, 300 dpi, rotate 0
2316
5000 * 5000 [0 0]
PDF/A 1b output, variable size,
up to 5000mm 5000mm, color,
300 dpi, rotate 0
Table 15-17:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined Hyprid PDF Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
331
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.2 Predefined HP-GL(/2) Devices
configuration file
The HP-GL(/2) device IDs are predefined in the configuration file CHPGLX.
CHPGLX
15.2.1
gXconvert
System Description
HP-GL
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
3000
274 * 192 (A4 L)
HP 7475A
3001
192 * 274 (A4 P)
HP 7475A
3002
401 * 274 (A3 L)
HP 7475A
3003
274 * 401 (A3 P)
HP 7475A
3010
271 * 190 (A4 L)
HP 7550A
3011
190 * 271 (A4 P)
HP 7550A
3012
399 * 271 (A3 L)
HP 7550A
3013
271 * 399 (A3 P)
HP 7550A
3020
297 * 210 (A4 L)
HP DraftPro (HP 7570A)
3021
210 * 297 (A4 P)
HP DraftPro (HP 7570A)
3022
420 * 297 (A3 L)
HP DraftPro (HP 7570A)
3023
297 * 420 (A3 P)
HP DraftPro (HP 7570A)
3024
564 * 366 (A2 L)
HP DraftPro (HP 7570A)
3025
366 * 564 (A2 P)
HP DraftPro (HP 7570A)
3026
787 * 564 (A1 L)
HP DraftPro (HP 7570A)
3027
564 * 787 (A1 P)
HP DraftPro (HP 7570A)
3030
267 * 156 (A4 L)
HP 7585B
3031
156 * 267 (A4 P)
HP 7585B
3032
366 * 267 (A3 L)
HP 7585B
3033
267 * 366 (A3 P)
HP 7585B
3034
564 * 366 (A2 L)
HP 7585B
3035
366 * 564 (A2 P)
HP 7585B
3036
787 * 564 (A1 L)
HP 7585B
3037
564 * 787 (A1 P)
HP 7585B
3038
1135 * 811 (A0 L)
HP 7585B
3039
811 * 1135 (A0 P)
HP 7585B
3040
267 * 156 (A4 L)
HP 7586B
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
332
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
3041
156 * 267 (A4 P)
HP 7586B
3042
366 * 267 (A3 L)
HP 7586B
3043
267 * 366 (A3 P)
HP 7586B
3044
564 * 366 (A2 L)
HP 7586B
3045
366 * 564 (A2 P)
HP 7586B
3046
787 * 564 (A1 L)
HP 7586B
3047
564 * 787 (A1 P)
HP 7586B
3048
1135 * 811 (A0 L)
HP 7586B
3049
811 * 1135 (A0 P)
HP 7586B
3050
265 * 154 (A4 L)
HP DraftMaster I (HP 7595A)
3051
154 * 265 (A4 P)
HP DraftMaster I (HP 7595A)
3052
364 * 265 (A3 L)
HP DraftMaster I (HP 7595A)
3053
265 * 364 (A3 P)
HP DraftMaster I (HP 7595A)
3054
562 * 364 (A2 L)
HP DraftMaster I (HP 7595A)
3055
364 * 562 (A2 P)
HP DraftMaster I (HP 7595A)
3056
785 * 562 (A1 L)
HP DraftMaster I (HP 7595A)
3057
562 * 785 (A1 P)
HP DraftMaster I (HP 7595A)
3058
1133 * 809 (A0 L)
HP DraftMaster I (HP 7595A)
3059
809 * 1133 (A0 P)
HP DraftMaster I (HP 7595A)
3060
265 * 154 (A4 L)
HP DraftMaster II (HP 7596A)
3061
154 * 265 (A4 P)
HP DraftMaster II (HP 7596A)
3062
364 * 265 (A3 L)
HP DraftMaster II (HP 7596A)
3063
265 * 364 (A3 P)
HP DraftMaster II (HP 7596A)
3064
562 * 364 (A2 L)
HP DraftMaster II (HP 7596A)
3065
364 * 562 (A2 P)
HP DraftMaster II (HP 7596A)
3066
785 * 562 (A1 L)
HP DraftMaster II (HP 7596A)
3067
562 * 785 (A1 P)
HP DraftMaster II (HP 7596A)
3068
1133 * 809 (A0 L)
HP DraftMaster II (HP 7596A)
3069
809 * 1133 (A0 P)
HP DraftMaster II (HP 7596A)
3070
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
O3M microfilm
3071
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
O3M microfilm
Table 15-18:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined HP-GL Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
333
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.2.2
Standard Plot Format
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
3080
297 * 210 (A4 L)
Standard Plot
3081
210 * 297 (A4 P)
Standard Plot
3082
410 * 290 (A3 L)
Standard Plot
3083
290 * 410 (A3 P)
Standard Plot
Table 15-19:
15.2.3
Rotring NC Plotscriber
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
3090
297 * 210 (A4 L)
Rotring NC plotscriber
3091
210 * 297 (A4 P)
Rotring NC plotscriber
3092
410 * 290 (A3 L)
Rotring NC plotscriber
3093
290 * 410 (A3 P)
Rotring NC plotscriber
Table 15-20:
15.2.4
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined Standard Plot Format Devices
Predefined Rotring NC Plotscriber Devices
HP-GL/2
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
3100
242 * 178 (A4 L)
HP DraftMaster (MX)
3101
178 * 242 (A4 P)
HP DraftMaster (MX)
3102
364 * 265 (A3 L)
HP DraftMaster (MX)
3103
265 * 364 (A3 P)
HP DraftMaster (MX)
3104
562 * 364 (A2 L)
HP DraftMaster (MX)
3105
364 * 562 (A2 P)
HP DraftMaster (MX)
3106
785 * 562 (A1 L)
HP DraftMaster (MX)
3107
562 * 785 (A1 P)
HP DraftMaster (MX)
3108
1133 * 809 (A0 L)
HP DraftMaster (MX)
3109
809 * 1133 (A0 P)
HP DraftMaster (MX)
3110
289 * 203 (A4 L)
HP PaintJet XL with
3111
203 * 289 (A4 P)
HP-GL/2 cartridge
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
334
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
3112
409 * 279 (A3 L)
HP PaintJet XL with
3113
279 * 409 (A3 P)
HP-GL/2 cartridge
3120
864 * 559 (D L)
HP 7600 electrostatic output
device
3121
559 * 864 (D P)
HP 7600 electrostatic output
device
3122
1118 * 864 (E L)
HP 7600 electrostatic output
device
3123
864 * 1118 (E P)
HP 7600 electrostatic output
device
3130
286 * 201 (A4 L)
HP LaserJet III using HP-GL/2
3131
201 * 286 (A4 P)
HP LaserJet III using HP-GL/2
3140
297 * 210 (A4 L)
general HP-GL/2 pen output
device
3141
210 * 297 (A4 P)
general HP-GL/2 pen output
device
3142
420 * 297 (A3 L)
general HP-GL/2 pen output
device
3143
297 * 420 (A3 P)
general HP-GL/2 pen output
device
3144
584 * 420 (A2 L)
general HP-GL/2 pen output
device
3145
420 * 584 (A2 P)
general HP-GL/2 pen output
device
3146
840 * 594 (A1 L)
general HP-GL/2 pen output
device
3147
594 * 840 (A1 P)
general HP-GL/2 pen output
device
3148
1189 * 840 (A0 L)
general HP-GL/2 pen output
device
3149
840 * 1189 (A0 P)
general HP-GL/2 pen output
device
3150
297 * 210 (A4 L)
general HP-GL/2 raster output
device
3151
210 * 297 (A4 P)
general HP-GL/2 raster output
device
3152
420 * 297 (A3 L)
general HP-GL/2 raster output
device
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
335
15 List of Predefined Devices
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
3153
297 * 420 (A3 P)
general HP-GL/2 raster output
device
3154
584 * 420 (A2 L)
general HP-GL/2 raster output
device
3155
420 * 584 (A2 P)
general HP-GL/2 raster output
device
3156
840 * 594 (A1 L)
general HP-GL/2 raster output
device
3157
594 * 840 (A1 P)
general HP-GL/2 raster output
device
3158
1189 * 840 (A0 L)
general HP-GL/2 raster output
device
3159
840 * 1189 (A0 P)
general HP-GL/2 raster output
device
Table 15-21:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined HP-GL/2 Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.2.5
336
Benson
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
3200
237 * 180 (A4 L)
Benson 16xx (BGL)
3201
180 * 237 (A4 P)
Benson 16xx (BGL)
3202
360 * 267 (A3 L)
Benson 16xx (BGL)
3203
267 * 360 (A3 P)
Benson 16xx (BGL)
3204
599 * 425 (A2 L)
Benson 16xx (BGL)
3205
425 * 599 (A2 P)
Benson 16xx (BGL)
3206
845 * 599 (A1 L)
Benson 16xx (BGL)
3207
599 * 845 (A1 P)
Benson 16xx (BGL)
3208
1194 * 845 (A0 L)
Benson 16xx (BGL)
3209
845 * 1194 (A0 P)
Benson 16xx (BGL)
3210
237 * 180 (A4 L)
Benson 18xx (BGL)
3211
180 * 237 (A4 P)
Benson 18xx (BGL)
3212
360 * 267 (A3 L)
Benson 18xx (BGL)
3213
267 * 360 (A3 P)
Benson 18xx (BGL)
3214
599 * 425 (A2 L)
Benson 18xx (BGL)
3215
425 * 599 (A2 P)
Benson 18xx (BGL)
3216
845 * 599 (A1 L)
Benson 18xx (BGL)
3217
599 * 845 (A1 P)
Benson 18xx (BGL)
3218
1194 * 845 (A0 L)
Benson 18xx (BGL)
3219
845 * 1194 (A0 P)
Benson 18xx (BGL)
Table 15-22:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined Benson Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
337
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.3 Predefined Versatec Devices
configuration file
The Versatec device IDs are predefined in the configuration file CVERVGS.
CVERVGS
15.3.1
Versatec
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
4000
297 * 210 (A4 L)
color, 200 dpi
4001
210 * 297 (A4 P)
color, 200 dpi
4002
420 * 297 (A3 L)
color, 200 dpi
4003
297 * 420 (A3 P)
color, 200 dpi
4004
594 * 420 (A2 L)
color, 200 dpi
4005
420 * 594 (A2 P)
color, 200 dpi
4006
840 * 594 (A1 L)
color, 200 dpi
4007
594 * 840 (A1 P)
color, 200 dpi
4008
1189 * 840 (A0 L)
color, 200 dpi
4009
840 * 1189 (A0 P)
color, 200 dpi
4010
297 * 210 (A4 L)
color, 400 dpi
4011
210 * 297 (A4 P)
color, 400 dpi
4012
420 * 297 (A3 L)
color, 400 dpi
4013
297 * 420 (A3 P)
color, 400 dpi
4014
594 * 420 (A2 L)
color, 400 dpi
4015
420 * 594 (A2 P)
color, 400 dpi
4016
840 * 594 (A1 L)
color, 400 dpi
4017
594 * 840 (A1 P)
color, 400 dpi
4018
1189 * 840 (A0 L)
color, 400 dpi
4019
840 * 1189 (A0 P)
color, 400 dpi
Table 15-23:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined Versatec Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.3.2
338
Versatec Thermal Transfer
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
4020
239 * 200 (A4 L)
color, 300 dpi
4021
200 * 239 (A4 P)
color, 300 dpi
4022
362 * 287 (A3 L)
color, 300 dpi
4023
287 * 362 (A3 P)
color, 300 dpi
Table 15-24:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined Versatec Thermal Transfer Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
339
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.4 Predefined CalComp Devices
configuration file
The CalComp device IDs are predefined in the configuration file CCALHCBS.
CCALHCBS
Most CalComp devices are predefined with a step size of 2032 dpi.
If they assume a step size of 400 dpi, pictures will become too
large by a factor of 5.08.
15.4.1
CalComp Color Electrostat 58xx
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
5
5000
297 * 210 (A4 L)
5001
210 * 297 (A4 P)
5002
420 * 297 (A3 L)
5003
297 * 420 (A3 P)
5004
594 * 420 (A2 L)
5005
420 * 594 (A2 P)
5006
840 * 594 (A1 L)
5007
594 * 840 (A1 P)
5008
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
5009
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
Table 15-25:
gXconvert
System Description
color
stepsize 2032 dpi
resolution 400 dpi
Predefined CalComp Color Electrostat 58xx Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.4.2
CalComp Pen Plotter 907ipe
Device ID
Size (mm)
5010
297 * 210 (A4 L)
5011
210 * 297 (A4 P)
5012
420 * 297 (A3 L)
5013
297 * 420 (A3 P)
5014
594 * 420 (A2 L)
5015
420 * 594 (A2 P)
5016
840 * 594 (A1 L)
5017
594 * 840 (A1 P)
5018
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
5019
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
Table 15-26:
15.4.3
340
Device Details
color
stepsize 2032 dpi
resolution 2032 dpi
Predefined CalComp Pen Plotter 907ipe Devices
CalComp Electrostat B/W 57xx
Device ID
Size (mm)
5020
297 * 210 (A4 L)
5021
210 * 297 (A4 P)
5022
420 * 297 (A3 L)
5023
297 * 420 (A3 P)
5024
594 * 420 (A2 L)
5025
420 * 594 (A2 P)
5026
840 * 594 (A1 L)
5027
594 * 840 (A1 P)
5028
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
5029
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
Table 15-27:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Device Details
black/white
stepsize 2032 dpi
resolution 400 dpi
Predefined CalComp Electrostat B/W 57xx Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
341
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.4.4
CalComp Thermal Transfer 58xx
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
5030
256 * 203 (A4 L)
color
5031
203 * 256 (A4 P)
stepsize 300 dpi
5032
406 * 256 (A3 L)
resolution 300 dpi
5033
256 * 406 (A3 P)
Table 15-28:
15.4.5
CalComp TechJet
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
5040
1189 * 840 (A0 L)
color, 360 dpi
5041
840 * 1189 (A4 P)
Stepsize 2032 dpi
Table 15-29:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined CalComp Thermal Transfer 58xx Devices
Predefined CalComp TechJet Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
342
15.5 Predefined Metafile Devices
The Metafile device IDs are predefined in the configuration file CXXMETA.
configuration file
CXXMETA
15.5.1
CGM
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
7000
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
Cleartext encoding, 40 dpmm
7001
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
Cleartext encoding, 40 dpmm
7010
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
Character encoding, 40 dpmm
7011
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
Character encoding, 40 dpmm
7020
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
Binary encoding, 40 dpmm
7021
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
Binary encoding, 40 dpmm
Table 15-30:
15.5.2
Predefined CGM Devices
DXF
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
7030
1190 * 1190 (A0 S)
Cleartext, 20 dpmm
7031
1190 * 1190 (A0 S)
Binary, 20 dpmm
7032
1190 * 1190 (A0 S)
Cleartext EBCDIC, 20 dpmm
7033
1190 * 1190 (A0 S)
Binary EBCDIC, 20 dpmm
Table 15-31:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined DXF Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
343
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.6 Predefined Raster Devices
configuration file
The Raster device IDs are predefined in the configuration file CXXRAS.
CXXRAS
15.6.1
Canon GARO
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8710
9000 * 431.9
Canon imagePROGRAF iPF5100, 600dpi,
normal quality, etxra matt coated paper
8720
9000 * 914
Canon imagePROGRAF iPF7x0, 600dpi,
normal quality, matt coated paper
8730
9000 * 841
Canon W8400 (OCE CS2024), 300 dpi,
normal quality, plain paper
8711
9000*413.9
Canon image PROGRAF iPF 5000, 600
dpi, normal quality, extra matt coated paper
9000*841
Canon W7200, 300 dpi, normal qualoty,
plain paper
8721
8731
Table 15-32:
Predefined Canon Garo Devices
Device-IDs 8711-8719, 8721-8729 and 8731-8739 are reserved for usage with
the same printer but different settings of resolution, quality and material. For
possible combinations of these settings see Chapter 11.8, Canon Garo Driver,
page 251.
15.6.2
Epson FX 80
Device ID
Size (mm)
Epson FX80
8
8000
266.7 * 203.2 (A4 L)
8001
203.2 * 266.7 (A4 P)
Table 15-33:
15.6.3
Device Details
Predefined Epson FX 80 Devices
HP LaserJet III (PCL)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8010
266.7 * 203.2
b/w, 300 dpi
offset: 4.5 0 (A4 L)
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
344
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8011
203.2 * 266.7
b/w, 300 dpi
offset: 4.5 0 (A4 P)
8012
405 * 285 (A3 L)
b/w, 300 dpi
8013
285 * 405 (A3 P)
b/w, 300 dpi
8014
287.5 * 200.5
b/w, 600 dpi
offset: 4.5 0 (A4 L)
200.5 * 287.5
8015
b/w, 600 dpi
offset: 4.5 0 (A4 P)
409.5 * 285.5
8016
b/w, 600 dpi
offset: 4.5 0 (A3 L)
285.5 * 409.5
8017
b/w, 600 dpi
offset: 4.5 0 (A3 P)
Table 15-34:
15.6.4
Predefined HP LaserJet III (PCL) Devices
NEC P6/P7
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8020
266.7 * 203.2 (A4 L)
color, 180 dpi
8021
203.2 * 266.7 (A4 P)
color, 180 dpi
8022
420.6 * 297.4 (A3 L)
color, 180 dpi
8023
297.4 * 420.6 (A3 P)
color, 180 dpi
8024
266.7 * 203.2 (A4 L)
b/w, 360 dpi
8025
203.2 * 266.7 (A4 P)
b/w, 360 dpi
8026
420.6 * 297.4 (A3 L)
b/w, 360 dpi
8027
297.4 * 420.6 (A3 P)
b/w, 360 dpi
Table 15-35:
15.6.5
Predefined NEC P6/P7 Devices
HP PaintJet (90 dpi)
For Mannesmann Tally MT 92C only with 300 dpi and HP DeskJet Emulation.
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8030
266.7 * 203.2 (A4 L)
color, 180 dpi
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
345
15 List of Predefined Devices
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8031
203.2 * 266.7 (A4 P)
color, 180 dpi
8032
405.0 * 279.0
color, 180 dpi
offset: 5.5 0 (A3 L)
8033
279.0 * 405.0
color, 180 dpi
offset: 5.5 0 (A3 P)
8034
266.7 * 203.2 (A4 L)
color, 300 dpi
8035
203.2 * 266.7 (A4 P)
color, 300 dpi
8036
420.6 * 279.4 (A3 L)
color, 300 dpi
8037
279.4 * 420.6 (A3 P)
color, 300 dpi
Table 15-36:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined HP PaintJet (90 dpi) Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.6.6
346
WFAX (Only Available With Raster Extension)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8040
289 * 202 (A4 L)
WFax
8041
202 * 289 (A4 P)
WFax
Table 15-37:
15.6.7
Predefined WFAX Devices
HP QuietJet
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8050
266.7 * 203.2 (A4 L)
HP QuietJet
8051
203.2 * 266.7 (A4 P)
Table 15-38:
15.6.8
Predefined HP QuietJet Devices
HP LaserJet III (PCL)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8060
266.7 * 203.2 (A4 L)
HP LaserJet III with
8061
203.2 * 266.7 (A4 P)
grayscale 3 * 3
8062
266.7 * 203.2 (A4 L)
HP LaserJet III with
8063
203.2 * 266.7 (A4 P
grayscale 4 * 4
Table 15-39:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined HP LaserJet III (PCL) Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
347
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.6.9
TIFF G4 (Only Available With Raster Extension)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8070
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
100 dpi, unrotated
8071
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
100 dpi, rotated
8072
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
200 dpi, unrotated
8073
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
200 dpi, rotated
8074
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
400 dpi, unrotated
8075
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
400 dpi, rotated
8076
420 * 420 (A3 S)
800 dpi, unrotated
8077
420 * 420 (A3 S)
800 dpi, rotated
8080
TIFF G3
...
currently not supported
8087
Table 15-40:
Predefined TIFF G4 Devices
15.6.10 IBM ProPrinter
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8090
266.7 * 203.2 (A4 L)
IBM ProPrinter
8091
203.2 * 266.7 (A4 P)
X24
Table 15-41:
Predefined IBM ProPrinter Devices
15.6.11 Mannesmann Tally MT93/94 (Using IBM ProPrinter
X24E Emulation)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8092
420.6 * 297.4 (A3 L)
Mannesmann Tally
8093
297.4 * 420.6 (A3 P)
MT93/94
Table 15-42:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined Mannesmann Tally MT93/94 Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
348
15.6.12 Bitimage
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8100
size is variable
Bitimage
8101
Table 15-43:
Predefined Bitimage Devices
15.6.13 XWD
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8110
297 * 210 (A4 L)
75 dpi
8111
210 * 297 (A4 P)
75 dpi
Table 15-44:
Predefined XWD Devices
15.6.14 HP DeskJet 500 C (PCL)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8120
266.7 * 203.2 (A4 L)
color, 300 dpi
8121
203.2 * 266.7 (A4 P)
color, 300 dpi
8122
280.0 * 203.2 (A4 L)
b/w, 300 dpi
8123
203.2 * 280.0 (A4 P)
b/w, 300 dpi
Table 15-45:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined HP DeskJet 500 C (PCL) Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
349
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.6.15 SNI 2050
cgbit.dat
Configured by file cgbit.dat, see parameter -size.
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8130
297 * 210 (A4 L)
300 dpi, compressed
8131
207 * 297 (A4 P)
300 dpi, compressed
8132
420 * 297 (A3 L)
300 dpi, compressed
8133
297 * 420 (A3 P)
300 dpi, compressed
8134
297 * 210 (A4 L)
300 dpi, uncompressed
8135
207 * 297 (A4 P)
300 dpi, uncompressed
8136
420 * 297 (A3 L)
300 dpi, uncompressed
8137
297 * 420 (A3 P)
300 dpi, uncompressed
Table 15-46:
Predefined SNI 2050
15.6.16 HP RTL (Like HP DesignJet 650C)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8140
263 * 200 (A4 L)
color, 300 dpi
8141
200 * 263 (A4 P)
color, 300 dpi
8142
386 * 287 (A3 L)
color, 300 dpi
8143
287 * 386 (A3 P)
color, 300 dpi
8144
560 * 410 (A2 L)
color, 300 dpi
8145
410 * 560 (A2 P)
color, 300 dpi
8146
806 * 584 (A1 L)
color, 300 dpi
8147
584 * 806 (A1 P)
color, 300 dpi
8148
3000 * 904 (36inch L)
color, 300 dpi, 36-inch roll
8149
904 * 3000 (36inch P)
color, 300 dpi, 36-inch roll
Table 15-47:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined HP RTL Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
350
15.6.17 Encad Novajet (RTL) (Using RTL Emulation Mode)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8150
247 * 180 (A4 L)
color, 300 dpi
8151
180 * 247 (A4 P)
color, 300 dpi
8152
370 * 267 (A3 L)
color, 300 dpi
8153
267 * 370 (A3 P)
color, 300 dpi
8154
544 * 390 (A2 L)
color, 300 dpi
8155
390 * 544 (A2 P)
color, 300 dpi
8156
791 * 564 (A1 L)
color, 300 dpi
8157
564 * 791 (A1 P)
color, 300 dpi
8158
1139 * 811 (A0 L)
color, 300 dpi
8159
811 * 1139 (A0 P)
color, 300 dpi
Table 15-48:
Predefined Encad Novajet (RTL) Devices
15.6.18 CALS
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8160
1189 * 840 (A0 L)
200 dpi
8161
840 * 1189 (A0 P)
200 dpi
8162
1189 * 840 (A0 L)
300 dpi
8163
840 * 1189 (A0 P)
300 dpi
8164
1189 * 840 (A0 L)
400 dpi
8165
840 * 1189 (A0 P)
400 dpi
Table 15-49:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined CALS Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
351
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.6.19 CCITT Group 4 (2D)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8170
297 * 210 (A4 L)
200 dpi
8171
210 * 297 (A4 P)
200 dpi
8172
420 * 297 (A3 L)
200 dpi
8173
297 * 420 (A3 P)
200 dpi
Table 15-50:
Predefined CCITT Group 4 Devices
15.6.20 General Raster
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8180
297 * 210 (A4 L)
b/w bitmap, 75 dpi
8181
210 * 297 (A4 P)
b/w bitmap, 75 dpi
8182
297 * 210 (A4 L)
RGB bitmap, 75 dpi
8183
210 * 297 (A4 P)
RGB bitmap, 75 dpi
Table 15-51:
Predefined General Raster Devices
15.6.21 Versatec Compacted Raster 1D
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8190
1192 * 842 (A0 L)
ce 3444, color , 400 dpi
8191
842 * 1192 (A0 P)
ce 3444, color, 400 dpi
8192
1192 * 842 (A0 L)
ce 3444m, monochrome, 400 dpi
8193
842 * 1192 (A0 P)
ce 3444m, monochrome, 400 dpi
Table 15-52:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined Versatec Compacted Raster 1D Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
352
15.6.22 Versatec 8845 Roll Paper
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8194
9000 * 299 (A3 roll)
A3 roll, b/w, 400 dpi
8195
9000 * 594 (A2 roll)
A2 roll, b/w, 400 dpi
8196
9000 * 841 (A0 roll)
A0 roll, b/w, 400 dpi
Table 15-53:
Predefined Versatec 8845 Roll Paper Devices
15.6.23 CCRF Electrostatic Plotter
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8200
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
monochrome, 400 dpi
8201
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
monochrome, 400 dpi
8202
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
color, 400 dpi
8203
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
color, 400 dpi
Table 15-54:
Predefined CCRF Electrostatic Plotter Devices
15.6.24 TIFF G1
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8210
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
b/w, 200 dpi
8211
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
b/w, 200 dpi
8212
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
gray, 200 dpi
8213
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
gray, 200 dpi
8214
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
color, 200 dpi
8215
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
color, 200 dpi
Table 15-55:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined TIFF G1 Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
353
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.6.25 TIFF LZW
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8220
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
b/w, 200 dpi
8221
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
b/w, 200 dpi
8222
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
gray, 200 dpi
8223
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
gray, 200 dpi
8224
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
color, 200 dpi
8225
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
color, 200 dpi
Table 15-56:
Predefined TIFF LZW Devices
15.6.26 CalComp TechJet Color (Using HP RTL)
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8230
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
color, 360 dpi, using dithering
8231
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
color, 360 dpi, using dithering
8232
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
monochrome, 360 dpi, no dither
8233
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
monochrome, 360 dpi, no dither
Table 15-57:
Predefined CalComp TechJet Color (Using HP RTL) Devices
15.6.27 PCX
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8240
1190 * 1190 (A0 S)
b/w, 100 dpi, unrotated
8241
1190 * 1190 (A0 S)
b/w, 100 dpi, rotated
8242
1190 * 1190 (A0 S)
256 colors, 100 dpi, unrotated
8243
1190 * 1190 (A0 S)
256 colors, 100 dpi, rotated
Table 15-58:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined PCX Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
354
15.6.28 TIFF Packbits
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8250
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
b/w, 200 dpi
8251
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
b/w, 200 dpi
8252
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
gray, 200 dpi
8253
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
gray, 200 dpi
8254
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
Index color, 200 dpi
8255
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
Index color, 200 dpi
8256
1190 * 841 (A0 L)
24 bit color, 200 dpi
8256
841 * 1190 (A0 P)
24 bit color, 200 dpi
Table 15-59:
Predefines TIFF Packbits Devices
15.6.29 Epson Stylus
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8260
280 * 204 offset: 3 0 (A4
L)
b/w, 360 dpi
8261
204 * 280 offset: 3 0 (A4 P)
b/w, 360 dpi
8262
280 * 204 offset: 3 0 (A4
L)
color, 360 dpi
8263
offset: 3 0 (A4 P)
color, 360 dpi
8264
403 * 291 offset: 3 0 (A3
L)
b/w, 360 dpi
8265
offset: 3 0 (A3 P)
b/w, 360 dpi
8266
403 * 291 offset: 3 0 (A3
L)
color, 360 dpi
8267
291 * 403 offset: 3 0 (A3 P)
color, 360 dpi
Table 15-60:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined Epson Stylus Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
355
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.6.30 Indigo RST
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8270
1155 * 830 (A0 L)
MK-I, 400 dpi
8271
830 * 1155 (A0 P)
MK-I, 400 dpi
8272
1155 * 830 (A0 L)
MK-II, 400 dpi
8273
830 * 1155 (A0 P)
MK-II, 400 dpi
Table 15-61:
Predefined Indigo RST Devices
15.6.31 GIF
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8280
1189 * 840 (A0 L)
100 dpi
8281
840 * 1189 (A0 P)
100 dpi
Table 15-62:
Predefined GIF Devices
15.6.32 Windows BMP
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8290
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
b/w, 100 dpi
8291
reserved
8292
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
8293
reserved
Table 15-63:
gXconvert
System Description
color, 100 dpi
Predefined Windows BMP Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
356
15.6.33 Océ 9800
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8300
4000 * 297 (A3 L roll)
A3 roll, TIFF G4, b/w, 400 dpi
8301
4000 * 420 (A2 L roll)
A2 roll, TIFF G4, b/w, 400 dpi
8302
6000 * 594 (A1 L roll)
A1 roll, TIFF G4, b/w, 400 dpi
8303
10000 * 895 (A0 L roll)
A0 roll, TIFF G4, b/w, 400 dpi
8304
10000 * 914 (36" L roll)
36" roll, TIFF G4, b/w, 400 dpi
8305
reserved
8306
604 * 840 (A1 P)
A1 with space for 10 mm label
8307
430 * 594 (A2 P)
A2 with space for 10 mm label
8308
307 * 420 (A3 P)
A3 with space for 10 mm label
8309
220 * 297 (A4 P)
A4 with space for 10 mm label
Table 15-64:
Predefined Océ 9800 Devices
15.6.34 Océ 9400
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8310
4000 * 297 (A3 L roll)
A3 roll, TIFF G4, b/w, 300 dpi
8311
4000 * 420 (A2 L roll)
A2 roll, TIFF G4, b/w, 300 dpi
8312
6000 * 594 (A1 L roll)
A1 roll, TIFF G4, b/w, 300 dpi
8313
10000 * 895 (A0 L roll)
A0 roll, TIFF G4, b/w, 300 dpi
8314
10000 * 914 (36" L roll)
36" roll, TIFF G4, b/w, 300 dpi
8315
reserved
8316
604 * 840 (A1 P)
A1 with space for 10 mm label
8317
430 * 594 (A2 P)
A2 with space for 10 mm label
8318
307 * 420 (A3 P)
A3 with space for 10 mm label
8319
220 * 297 (A4 P)
A4 with space for 10 mm label
Table 15-65:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined Océ 9400 Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
357
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.6.35 X11 Bitmap
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8320
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
b/w, 100 dpi
Table 15-66:
Predefined X11 Bitmap Devices
15.6.36 RoWe 3200
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8330
210 * 297 (A4 P)
TIFF G4, 400 dpi
8331
5000 * 297 (A3 L roll)
A3 roll, TIFF G4, 400 dpi
8332
5000 * 594 (A1 L roll)
A1 roll, TIFF G4, 400 dpi
8333
5000 * 841 (A0 L roll)
A0 roll, TIFF G4, 400 dpi
8334
5000 * 420 (A2 L roll)
A2 roll, TIFF G4, 400 dpi
Table 15-67:
Predefined RoWe 3200 Devices
15.6.37 TIFF G4
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8340
297 * 210 (A4 L)
A4 TIFF G4, 400 dpi
8341
420 * 297 (A3 Ll)
A3, TIFF G4, 400 dpi
Table 15-68:
Predefined TIFF G4 Devices
15.6.38 JPEG
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8370
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
gray256, 100 dpi
8371
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
rgb, 100 dpi
Table 15-69:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined JPEG Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
358
15.6.39 PostScript Raster
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8380
200 * 287[5 5] (A4 P)
Fixed page size, b/w, 300 dpi,
rotate 0
8381
287 * 410 [5 5] (A3 P)
Fixed page size, b/w, 300 dpi,
rotate 0
8382
1189 * 1189 [0 0](A0 S)
Variable page size, b/w, 300 dpi
8383
Unused
8384
200 * 287 [5 5] (A4 P)
Fixed page size, rgb, 300 dpi
8385
287 * 410 [5 5] (A3 P)
Fixed page size, rgb, 300 dpi
8386
1190 * 1190 [0 0] (A0 S)
Variable page size, rgb, 300 dpi
Table 15-70:
Predefined PostScript Raster Devices
15.6.40 PDF Raster
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8400
200 * 287 [5 5] (A4 P)
Fixed page size, b/w, 300 dpi
8401
287 * 410 [5 5] (A3 P)
Fixed page size, b/w, 300 dpi
8402
1189 * 1189 (A0 S)
Variable page size, b/w, 300 dpi
8403
Unused
8404
200 * 287 [5 5] (A4 P)
Fixed page size, rgb, 300 dpi
8405
287 * 410 [5 5] (A3 P)
Fixed page size, rgb, 300 dpi
8406
1189 * 1189 [0 0] (A0 S)
Variable page size, rgb, 300 dpi
Table 15-71:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined PDF Raster Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
359
15 List of Predefined Devices
15.6.41 PCL3GUI
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
8620
281 * 200 (A4 L)
Fixed page size, b/w, 600 dpi
8621
281 * 200 (A4 L)
Fixed page size, dithered color, 600
dpi
8622
281 * 200 (A4 L)
Fixed page size, rgb, 600 dpi
8623
1200 * 594 (24 inch roll)
Variable page size, rgb, 600 dpi
8624
1200 * 597 (24 inch roll)
Variable page size, contone rgb,
300 dpi, HP DesignJet 130
8625
3000 x 914 (36 inch roll)
Variable page size, contone rgb,
300 dpi, HP DesignJet 500
8628
9000 x 904 (36 inch roll)
Variable page size, contone rgb,
300 dpi, HP DesignJet T1100
Table 15-72:
gXconvert
System Description
Predefined PCL3GUI Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
15 List of Predefined Devices
360
15.7 Predefined Canon Devices
The Canon device IDs are predefined in the configuration file CCANLBP.
configuration file
CCANLBP
15.7.1
Canon LBP8A2
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
9000
280 * 197 (A4 L)
300 dpi
9001
197 * 280 (A4 P)
300 dpi
Table 15-73:
15.7.2
Predefined Canon LBP8A2 Devices
Canon LBP8II
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
9010
280 * 197 (A4 L)
300 dpi
9011
197 * 280 (A4 P)
300 dpi
Table 15-74:
15.7.3
Predefined Canon LBP8II Devices
Canon LBP8III
Device ID
Size (mm)
Device Details
9020
280 * 197 (A4 L)
300 dpi
9021
197 * 280 (A4 P)
300 dpi
Table 15-75:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Predefined Canon LBP8III Devices
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
361
16 List of Exit Codes
16
List of Exit Codes
This chapter lists all exit codes returned by gXconvert. The exit codes vary on
UNIX and Windows. On UNIX, the exit codes are between 0 and 255. On
Windows, they are between 0 and 6018.
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
16 List of Exit Codes
362
16.1 UNIX
Table 16-1 lists all exit codes returned by gXconvert on UNIX:
Exit Code
Meaning
0
Program terminated without error
1
Profile not found or error opening log file
2
Input file not found or error closing log file
3
Input format TIFF not licensed or error writing log file
4
Not enough memory
5
Internal error, gXconvert terminated
113
Empty profile file name
114
NULL profile file pointer
115
Profile file name too long
116
Profil-info_pnts
117
Profile already selected
118
Profile has not been selected yet
119
Profiling has not been initalized yet
120
No mask (for attributes)
121
Function type does not exist
122
Error executing fgets
123
Error executing sscanf
124
Missing profiling line #end
125
Unknown format or profile linie
126
Unexpected end of profile file
127
Error opening profile file
128
Error closing profile
129
No more memory
130
Maximum of redef elements exceeded
136
Error number desm in log module
137
Undefined status: closed log file
138
Undefined status: closed log module
139
Undefined status: initialized log file
140
Undefined status: initialized log module
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
field full (Profiling list too long)
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
363
gXconvert
System Description
16 List of Exit Codes
Exit Code
Meaning
147
File name and pointer for log file not specified
148
Log format does not exist
149
Log level not allowed
150
Log module does not exist
151
Log format not allowed
152
Log data does not match the allowed format
157
Name of log file too long
158
Number of log formats exceeds the maximum
159
Number of modules exceeds the maximum
185
Insufficient parameter definition
186
Parameter already defined
187
Maximum length of the parameter exceeded
188
Unknown parameter
189
Incomplete parameter
190
Maximum number of parameters exceeded
191
Error allocating memory
192
Missing quotes in string
193
Configuration file does not exist
194
Unknown parameter ignored
195
Parameter or Input too long
208
Basic error number for OCM module
209
Output control module in an undefined state
210
Invalid parameter
211
Error allocating memory
212
Overflow of the internal list
213
Invalid output device type
214
Output device not selected
215
Graphic file does not exist
216
Overflow of the output buffers
217
Invalid box definition
233
Metafile interpreter is in an undefined status
234
Invalid parameter value
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
16 List of Exit Codes
364
Exit Code
Meaning
235
Maximum number of open metafiles exceeded
236
Metafile cannot be opened
237
Cannot allocate memory
238
Invalid CGM file
239
Maximum number of images per metafile exceeded
240
Metafile not open
241
End of metafile reached
242
Buffer exceeded
243
Invalid viewport definition.
244
Invalid image index
245
Profile file cannot be opened
246
Metafile format not supported
247
Error in implementaion
248
Error in installation (bad buffer size).
249
Invalid log file
250
Invalid error file
251
Maximum number of tolerated errors exceeded
252
Metafile format not licensed
253
Input format CalComp not licensed
254
Input format HP-GL not licensed
255
Invalid name of environment file
Table 16-1:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Exit Codes on UNIX
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
365
16 List of Exit Codes
16.2 Windows
Table 16-2 lists all exit codes returned by gXconvert on Windows:
gXconvert
System Description
Exit Code
Meaning
1001
Metafile interpreter in invalid state
1002
Invalid parameter value
1003
Maximum number of open metafiles exceeded
1004
Cannot open metafile
1005
Cannot allocate memory
1006
Invalid CGM file
1007
Maximum number of images per metafiles exceeded
1008
Metafile not open
1009
End of metafile encountered
1010
Buffers exceeded
1011
Invalid viewport definition
1012
Invalid image index
1013
Cannot open profile file
1014
Metafile format not supported
1015
Error in implementation
1016
Error in installation: bad buffer sizes
1017
Invalid log file
1018
Invalid error file
1019
Maximim number of tolerated errors exceeded
1020
Metafile format not licensed
1021
Calcomp format not licensed
1022
HP-GL format not licensed
1023
Invalid environment filename
1024
Invalid metafile name
1025
Environment file not found
1026
Metafile not found
1027
TIFF format not licensed
1028
PostScript format not licensed
1029
Error in naming list file
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
16 List of Exit Codes
366
Exit Code
Meaning
1030
Completely variable error message
2001
Output control module in invalid state
2002
Invalid parameter
2003
Storage allocation error
2004
Internal list overflow
2005
Invalid device type
2006
Device not selected
2007
Graphic image does not exist
2008
Output buffer overflow
2009
Invalid box definition
2010
Completely variable error message
3001
Invalid parameter definition
3002
Parameter already defined
3003
Maximum parameter length exceeded
3004
Unknown parameter
3005
Parameter incomplete
3006
Maximum number of parameters exceeded
3007
Storage allocation error
3008
Missing quote sign in string
3009
Configuration file does not exist
3010
Unknown parameter skipped
3011
Line too long
3012
Ambiguous parameter
4001
Invalid filename
4002
Invalid element type
4003
Invalid state
4004
Invalid picture name
4005
Invalid VPF
4006
Invalid VPP
4007
No metafile name
5001
Not in proper state: log closed
5002
Not in proper state: log module closed
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
367
gXconvert
System Description
16 List of Exit Codes
Exit Code
Meaning
5003
Not in proper state: log initialised
5004
Not in proper state: log module initialised
5011
File name and pointer not specified
5012
Format doesn't exist
5013
Loglevel out of range
5014
Module doesn't exist
5015
Illegal format
5016
Log data doesn't match format
5021
File name too long
5022
Number of formats exceeds maximum value
5023
Number of modules exceeds maximum value
5121
Error opening file
5122
Error closing file
5123
Error writing file
5124
Not enough memory
6001
Blank profile filename
6002
NULL profile filename pointer
6003
Too long profile filename
6004
Prof_info_pnts array is full
6005
Profile is already selected
6006
Profile isn't selected yet
6007
No profile initialised yet
6008
No mask (for attributes)
6009
Function type doesn't exist
6010
Error during fgets
6011
Error during sscanf
6012
Profile line: #end is missing
6013
Unknown format or profile line
6014
Unexpected end of profile file
6015
Error during open
6016
Error during close
6017
No more memory
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
16 List of Exit Codes
368
Exit Code
Meaning
6018
Max. number of redef element exceeded
1xxx
Error codes from metafile interpreter module
2xxx
Error codes from output control module
3xxx
Error codes from command line decoder module
4xxx
Error codes from layout module
5xxx
Error codes from logging module
6xxx
Error codes from profile module
Table 16-2:
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Exit Codes on Windows
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
369
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 7-1:
gXconvert
System Description
Cap and Join Styles............................................................................................118
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
List of Table
370
List of Table
Table 1-1:
Table 1-2:
Table 2-1:
Table 2-2:
Table 3-1:
Table 3-2:
Table 3-3:
Table 4-1:
Table 7-1:
Table 7-2:
Table 7-3:
Table 7-4:
Table 8-1:
Table 8-2:
Table 8-3:
Table 8-4:
Table 11-1:
Table 11-2:
Table 11-3:
Table 11-4:
Table 11-5:
Table 11-6:
Table 11-7:
Table 11-8:
Table 11-9:
Table 11-10:
Table 11-11:
Table 11-12:
Table 11-13:
Table 11-14:
Table 11-15:
Table 11-16:
Table 11-17:
Table 11-18:
Table 11-19:
Table 11-20:
Table 11-21:
Table 11-22:
Table 11-23:
Table 11-24:
Table 11-25:
Table 11-26:
Table 11-27:
Table 11-28:
Table 11-29:
Table 11-30:
Table 11-31:
Table 11-32:
Table 11-33:
Typographical Conventions Employed in this Documentation............................... 2
Pictograms Employed in this Documentation ......................................................... 2
Input License Groups and Corresponding Input Formats ..................................... 11
Output License Groups and Corresponding Output Formats ................................ 12
Conversion Specifiers and Their Meaning ............................................................ 62
Formal Grammar of GXCONV.INF: Syntax Elements............................................. 80
Formal Grammar of GXCONV.INF: Detailed Grammar .......................................... 81
Attributes to be Mapped ........................................................................................ 94
Replacement of Special Characters ..................................................................... 124
Replacement of Special Characters ..................................................................... 125
Common Pagesizes.............................................................................................. 129
Replacement of Special Characters ..................................................................... 134
Supported Device Models ................................................................................... 137
Replacement of Special Characters ..................................................................... 142
Initialization and Reset Strings............................................................................ 143
Devices and Rotation Angles .............................................................................. 153
Supported Device Models ................................................................................... 193
Valid Combinations for the HP DesignJet 130 ................................................... 209
-resolution: Supported Printer Type Models................................................. 223
Versatec Output Device Models.......................................................................... 232
Maximum Number of Colors or Shades of Gray ....................... 236
Parameters Available for All Raster Models ....................................................... 237
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model bitimage ................. 237
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model bmp ...................... 238
Parameters Available for Printer Type Models cals, cals_1, ccitt ....... 238
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model ccrf ..................... 238
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model epsonfx80 ................ 239
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model garo ..................... 239
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model gif ...................... 239
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model hpdeskjet500c ............ 240
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model hplaserjet ............... 241
Parameters Available for Printer Type Models hppaintjet, hppaintjetxl . 241
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model hpquietjet ............... 242
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model hprtl .................... 242
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model ibmprox24 ................ 242
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model jpeg ..................... 243
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model necp6 .................... 243
Parameters Available for Printer Type Models novajet, techjet ......... 243
Parameters Available for Printer Type Models novajet, techjet ......... 244
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model pcl3gui........................................ 244
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model pcl5c .................... 245
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model ps ....................... 245
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model pdf ...................... 245
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model raster (General Raster) ............ 246
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model rst ...................... 246
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model sni2050 .................. 246
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model stylusc .................. 247
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model tiff ..................... 247
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model versatec ................. 248
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
371
Table 11-34:
Table 11-35:
Table 11-36:
Table 11-37:
Table 11-38:
Table 12-1:
Table 13-1:
Table 13-2:
Table 13-3:
Table 13-4:
Table 14-1:
Table 14-2:
Table 14-3:
Table 14-4:
Table 14-5:
Table 14-6:
Table 14-7:
Table 15-1:
Table 15-2:
Table 15-3:
Table 15-4:
Table 15-5:
Table 15-6:
Table 15-7:
Table 15-8:
Table 15-9:
Table 15-10:
Table 15-11:
Table 15-12:
Table 15-13:
Table 15-14:
Table 15-15:
Table 15-16:
Table 15-17:
Table 15-18:
Table 15-19:
Table 15-20:
Table 15-21:
Table 15-22:
Table 15-23:
Table 15-24:
Table 15-25:
Table 15-26:
Table 15-27:
Table 15-28:
Table 15-29:
Table 15-30:
Table 15-31:
Table 15-32:
Table 15-33:
Table 15-34:
Table 15-35:
gXconvert
System Description
List of Table
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model wfax ......................248
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model xbm .......................248
Parameters Available for Printer Type Model xwd .......................248
Color Definition ...................................................................................................250
Canon Garo Driver: Possible Combinations for Output Parameters ...................251
Supported Device Models ....................................................................................253
Supported Line Types ..........................................................................................258
Marker Types Supported by gXconvert...............................................................269
Environment Variables for the Listener...............................................................293
Commands ...........................................................................................................297
CGM Metafile Element and their Codes..............................................................305
Entries and their Meanings ..................................................................................306
Actions During CalComp Conversion .................................................................310
Entries and their Meanings ..................................................................................311
Actions During HP-GL or HP-GL/2 Conversion ................................................317
Entries and their Meanings ..................................................................................318
Actions During HP RTL Conversion...................................................................321
Abbreviations for Paper Formats .........................................................................322
Predefined PostScript Devices .............................................................................323
Predefined Lexmark Devices ...............................................................................324
Predefined HP LaserJet Devices ..........................................................................324
Predefined IBM Devices ......................................................................................325
Predefined Kodak PhotoPrinter Devices..............................................................325
Predefined QMS (Magicolor and Others) Devices ..............................................326
Predefined Seiko ColorPoint Devices..................................................................326
Predefined Tektronix/Xerox Phaser Devices .......................................................327
Predefined QMS Magicolor Devices ...................................................................327
Predefined Lexmark Devices ...............................................................................327
Predefined WDV Devices ....................................................................................328
Predefined Océ Devices .......................................................................................328
Predefined Mannesmann Tally Devices ..............................................................328
Predefined QMS (Magicolor and Others) Devices ..............................................329
Predefined PDF Devices ......................................................................................329
Predefined Hyprid PDF Devices..........................................................................330
Predefined HP-GL Devices..................................................................................332
Predefined Standard Plot Format Devices ...........................................................333
Predefined Rotring NC Plotscriber Devices ........................................................333
Predefined HP-GL/2 Devices...............................................................................335
Predefined Benson Devices .................................................................................336
Predefined Versatec Devices ...............................................................................337
Predefined Versatec Thermal Transfer Devices ..................................................338
Predefined CalComp Color Electrostat 58xx Devices .........................................339
Predefined CalComp Pen Plotter 907ipe Devices................................................340
Predefined CalComp Electrostat B/W 57xx Devices ..........................................340
Predefined CalComp Thermal Transfer 58xx Devices ........................................341
Predefined CalComp TechJet Devices.................................................................341
Predefined CGM Devices ....................................................................................342
Predefined DXF Devices .....................................................................................342
Predefined Canon Garo Devices ..........................................................................343
Predefined Epson FX 80 Devices ........................................................................343
Predefined HP LaserJet III (PCL) Devices ..........................................................344
Predefined NEC P6/P7 Devices ...........................................................................344
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
List of Table
Table 15-36:
Table 15-37:
Table 15-38:
Table 15-39:
Table 15-40:
Table 15-41:
Table 15-42:
Table 15-43:
Table 15-44:
Table 15-45:
Table 15-46:
Table 15-47:
Table 15-48:
Table 15-49:
Table 15-50:
Table 15-51:
Table 15-52:
Table 15-53:
Table 15-54:
Table 15-55:
Table 15-56:
Table 15-57:
Table 15-58:
Table 15-59:
Table 15-60:
Table 15-61:
Table 15-62:
Table 15-63:
Table 15-64:
Table 15-65:
Table 15-66:
Table 15-67:
Table 15-68:
Table 15-69:
Table 15-70:
Table 15-71:
Table 15-72:
Table 15-73:
Table 15-74:
Table 15-75:
Table 16-1:
Table 16-2:
372
Predefined HP PaintJet (90 dpi) Devices ............................................................ 345
Predefined WFAX Devices ................................................................................. 346
Predefined HP QuietJet Devices.......................................................................... 346
Predefined HP LaserJet III (PCL) Devices.......................................................... 346
Predefined TIFF G4 Devices ............................................................................... 347
Predefined IBM ProPrinter Devices .................................................................... 347
Predefined Mannesmann Tally MT93/94 Devices .............................................. 347
Predefined Bitimage Devices .............................................................................. 348
Predefined XWD Devices ................................................................................... 348
Predefined HP DeskJet 500 C (PCL) Devices..................................................... 348
Predefined SNI 2050 ........................................................................................... 349
Predefined HP RTL Devices ............................................................................... 349
Predefined Encad Novajet (RTL) Devices .......................................................... 350
Predefined CALS Devices................................................................................... 350
Predefined CCITT Group 4 Devices ................................................................... 351
Predefined General Raster Devices ..................................................................... 351
Predefined Versatec Compacted Raster 1D Devices........................................... 351
Predefined Versatec 8845 Roll Paper Devices .................................................... 352
Predefined CCRF Electrostatic Plotter Devices .................................................. 352
Predefined TIFF G1 Devices ............................................................................... 352
Predefined TIFF LZW Devices ........................................................................... 353
Predefined CalComp TechJet Color (Using HP RTL) Devices .......................... 353
Predefined PCX Devices ..................................................................................... 353
Predefines TIFF Packbits Devices....................................................................... 354
Predefined Epson Stylus Devices ........................................................................ 354
Predefined Indigo RST Devices .......................................................................... 355
Predefined GIF Devices....................................................................................... 355
Predefined Windows BMP Devices .................................................................... 355
Predefined Océ 9800 Devices.............................................................................. 356
Predefined Océ 9400 Devices.............................................................................. 356
Predefined X11 Bitmap Devices ......................................................................... 357
Predefined RoWe 3200 Devices.......................................................................... 357
Predefined TIFF G4 Devices ............................................................................... 357
Predefined JPEG Devices .................................................................................... 357
Predefined PostScript Raster Devices ................................................................. 358
Predefined PDF Raster Devices .......................................................................... 358
Predefined PCL3GUI Devices............................................................................. 359
Predefined Canon LBP8A2 Devices ................................................................... 360
Predefined Canon LBP8II Devices...................................................................... 360
Predefined Canon LBP8III Devices .................................................................... 360
Exit Codes on UNIX............................................................................................ 364
Exit Codes on Windows ...................................................................................... 368
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
373
Bibliography
Bibliography
[GXCONV_USR]
gXconvert, User Manual, SEAL Systems 1
[GXNETPLOT_USR]
gXnetPlot, User Manual, SEAL Systems
[NETDOME_TEC]
PLOSSYS netdome, System Description, SEAL Systems
1. only available in German
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Terminology
374
Terminology
The following section explains the most important terms that are used in this documentation. Terms
identified by → refer to other terms in this section.
Driver
Program for controlling an →output device
Format converter
Program for converting a document from one graphics format into another,
e. g. gXconvert
Graphics file
File which contains the graphical information of the document
Metaformat
Standardized graphic format (e. g. GKSM, CGM, TIFF/G4)
Output device
Printer or plotter on which the document is output
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
375
Abbreviations
Abbreviations
ASCII
ATA
BCMY
BMP
C907
CAD
CALS
CCRF
CGI
CGM
CMY
CMYK
DXF
EPS
GIF
GKS
GKSM
HCBS
HP-GL
HP-GL/2
HP RTL
IGDS
ISO
JPEG
LZW
PCX
PDF
PNM
PS
PS/2
RGB
RTL
TIFF
VCGL
VCRF
VDC
VDS
VGS
VPF
VPP
VRF
gXconvert
System Description
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Air Transport Association
Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Color Schema
Bitmap
CalComp-Format 907
Computer Aided Design
Computer Aided Acquisition a Logistic Supports
CalComp Compact Raster Format
Computer Graphics Interface
Computer Graphics Metafile
Cyan Magenta Yellow Color Scheme
Cyan Magenta Yellow Key Color Scheme
AutoCAD Graphics Format
Encapsulated PostScript
Graphic Interchange Format
Graphic Kernel System
GKS Metafile
Host Computer Basic Software
Hewlett-Packard Graphic Language
Hewlett-Packard Graphic Language 2
Hewlett-Packard Raster Transfer Language
Intergraph Data Standards
International Standards Organization
Joint Photograhic Experts Group
Lempel-Ziv-Welch (compression algorithm)
PC graphics file format
Adobe Portable Document Format
Portable Bitmap Format
PostScript
PostScript Level 2
Red Green Blue Color Scheme
Raster Transfer Language
Tagged Image File Format
Versatec Color Graphics Language
Versatec Color Random Format
Virtual Device Coordinates
Versatec Data Standards
Versatec Graphics Software
Viewport Frame
Viewport Position
Versatec Random Format
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Abbreviations
WMF
XWD
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
376
Windows Metafile
X Window Dump
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
377
Index
Index
Symbols
#ACCOUNT 59
#COPIES 59
#DATE 58
#DATEUS 58
#DATEUSYY 58
#DATEYY 58
#FILE 58
#HOST 59
#JOBID 59
#JOBNAME 27
#LABELx 58
#PAGE 59
#PLOTTER 59
#PS 124, 134
#SCALE 59
#TIME 59
#USER 59
.config (listener) 296
.destination (listener) 293
.log (listener) 292
.options (listener) 292
A
A_LINE 260
A_SEGM 260
A_SIGZ 260
ABORT 24
ABSTRACT 33
abstract 185
abstract scale mode 33
-acknowledge 16
adaptive 201
-adaptive (line type definition) 260
-align
general 17
stamp or label 46
alignment
general 17
stamp or label 46
AllowTransparency 73
-Angle (hatch type definition) 277
ANVIL 25
Anvil 25
input 7
license 11
ANVILIN 11
append output file 117
-appendoutput (CXXPSCRI driver) 117
gXconvert
System Description
ASCII 375
ATA 375
TIFF 194
-atacompatible (CXXRAS driver) 194
attribute
example of mapping 93
map 90
possible for mapping 94
attribute mapping 84
AutoCAD 180
-auxtray (CXXPSCRI driver) 134
B
-backcolind (stamp or label) 47
-backcolor (stamp or label) 47
-background (CXXRAS driver) 195
-base
line type definition 261
marker type definition 271
BCMY 375
Benson device IDs 336
BEST 221
bevel 125, 144
BGL
license 12
output 7, 136
binary 178, 216
hatch type definition 280
line type definition 265
marker type definition 274
-binintprec (CXXMETA driver) 176
-binvintprec (CXXMETA driver) 176
Bitimage 192
device IDs 348
license 12
output 8
bitimage 192, 223
black value reduction 205
blend mode 73
BMP 375
bmp 193, 198, 199, 200
BOTTOMCENTER 46, 56
BOTTOMLEFT 46, 56
BOTTOMRIGHT 46, 56
bounding box 124, 134, 220
BRIEF 38
brightness 204
buffer size 43, 226
buffering 210
butt 118, 138, 158, 196
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Index
bwelectrostat model 157
bycliprect 150
bycolor 148, 167
bycolorindex 148, 167
bycolour 148, 167
bycolourindex 148, 167
bypicture 57, 220
bysize 150, 183, 220
BYVIEWPORT 56
byviewport 150, 183, 220
C
C907 375
CAD 375
CALCOMP 25
CalComp 25
commands 306
input 7, 109
license 11, 12
output 7
restriction 13
CalComp Color Electrostat 58xx
device IDs 339
CalComp Pen Plotter 907ipe
device IDs 340
CalComp TechJet 192
CalComp TechJet Color
device IDs 353
CalComp Thermal Transfer 58xx
device IDs 341
CALCOMP.ENV 23, 84, 88
CALIN 11
CALOUT 12, 13
CALS 25, 192, 375
device IDs 350
input 7
license 11, 12
output 8
cals_1 192
CALSIN 11
CALVIN 11
Canon
license 12
output 7
Canon Garo 192
device ID‘s 343
Canon LBP8A2 device IDs 360
Canon LBP8II device IDs 360
Canon LBP8III device IDs 360
cap style 19, 118
-capstyle 19, 76
CCALHCBS driver 158
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
378
CHPGLX driver 138
CXXPSCRI driver 118
CXXRAS driver 196
-capstylefix
CXXPSCRI driver 118
CXXRAS driver 197
Catia Image input 7
CCALHCBS
configuation file 12
driver 157
environment variable 157
model 157
predefined device IDs 339
CCALIN_BORDER_WIDTH (environment
variable) 109
CCALIN_IGNORE_RO (environment variable) 109
CCALIN_NO_PATTERN (environment variable) 109
CCALIN_PENS (environment variable) 37,
109, 291
CCALIN_RESOLUTION (environment variable) 109
CCALIN_STEP_SIZE (environment variable)
110
CCALIN_VDC_EXTENT (environment variable) 110
CCANLBP
configuration file 12
driver 252
environment variable 252
model 253
predefined device IDs 360
CCITT Group 4
device IDs 351
license 12
output 8
CCRF 192, 375
disk buffering 210, 249
license 12
output 7, 8
ccrf 192, 198, 199, 200, 210
CCRF Electrostatic Plotter
device IDs 352
CCRFOUT 12
CDEVTX40
configuration file 12
CENTER 46, 56
CENTERBOTTOM 46, 56
CENTERCENTER 46, 56
CENTERRIGHT 46, 56
CENTERTOP 46, 56
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
379
Index
CG03PSROT (environment variable) 138
CG08BWTHRESHOLD (environment variable) 194
CG08ROP (environment variable) 111
CG08WINTEMP (environment variable) 111
CGI 375
CGIBWSCALETYPE (environment varaible)
112
CGISCALETYPE (environment variable) 112
CGM 25, 375
clear text 186
device IDs 342
elements 304
input 7
license 11, 12
output 7, 175
CGM+IN 11
CGM.ENV 23, 84
CGMIN 11
CGMOUT 12
character 178
character expansion factor 139
-charexpansion (CHPGLX driver) 139
-checksum (CCALHCBS driver) 158
CHPGLX
configuration file 12
model 137
predefined device IDs 331
CHPGLX (driver) 136
CHPGLX (environment environment) 136
CHPIN_BORDER_WIDTH (environment
variable) 104
CHPIN_CA_DEFAULT (environment variable) 106
CHPIN_COLEPS (environment variable) 104
CHPIN_DEBUG (environment variable) 104
CHPIN_HPGL_CLIP (environment variable)
104
CHPIN_HPSTEPS (environment variable) 104
CHPIN_NP (environment variable) 105
CHPIN_OLD_TEXT (environment variable)
105
CHPIN_PCL_PRINT (environment variable)
105
CHPIN_PENS (environment variable) 37, 105,
291
CHPIN_PM_RESTORE (environment variable) 105
CHPIN_RESPECT_PS (environment variable)
106
CHPIN_RTL_POS (environment variable) 106
CHPIN_SKIP_ESCCMNT (environment varigXconvert
System Description
able) 105
CHPIN_USE_RP (environment variable) 106
CHPIN_VDC_EXTENT (environment variable) 107
-chrintprec (CXXMETA driver) 177
-chrvintprec (CXXMETA driver) 177
CLEAR 23, 24
CLOSE 23, 24, 36
CMY 375
CMYK 375
gamma correction 205
code
CalComp 306
CGM 304
HP PCL 318
HP RTL 318
HP-GL/2 311
RTL 318
-codingtype (CXXMETA driver) 178
col 121
-colmap 19, 95
color
brightness correction 26
direct 39
freeze pen 285
index 182
map 119
map file 19
merge 32, 148, 211
mode 20
pattern 286
pen 147, 166
precision 121
representation 121
resolution 39
table 95
-color (stamp or label) 47
color profile 72
color space 71
colorimage 119
-colorimage (CXXPSCRI driver) 119
-colormap
CCALHCBS driver 158
CHPGLX driver 139
CXXMETA driver 178
CXXPSCRI driver 119
CXXRAS driver 197
-colormode 20
-colorprecision
CCALHCBS driver 160
CHPGLX driver 140
CXXMETA driver 180
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Index
CXXPSCRI driver 121
ColorSpaceType 71
colourelectrostat model 157
-colourmap
CCALHCBS driver 158
CHPGLX driver 139
CXXMETA driver 178
CXXPSCRI driver 119
CXXRAS driver 197
-colourmode 20
-colourprecision
CCALHCBS driver 160
CCANLBP driver 254
CHPGLX driver 140
CXXMETA driver 180
CXXPSCRI driver 121
COLOURS.ENV 87
-colrep
CXXPSCRI driver 121
CXXRAS driver 198
comment 28
CompatibilityLevel 72
complex 233
-compressimage (CXXPSCRI driver) 122
compression 122
HP-GL/2 147
-compression (CXXRAS driver) 201
CompuServe GIF 192
license 12
-config 21
configuration
input format 98
output device 113
configuration file
CCALHCBS 157, 174, 339
CCANLBP 252, 257, 360
CHPGLX 136, 156, 331
CVERVGS 337
CXXMETA 175, 189, 342
CXXPSCRI 116, 135, 323
CXXRAS 190, 234, 343
font mapping 96
hatch type 277, 280
keep 28
line type 265
marker type 270, 275
output device 113
parameter 21
conformance level 72
CONTINUE 23, 24
coordinate type 44
-copies (CXXRAS driver) 202
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
380
copy 151
CR_IDISK (environment variable) 210, 249
-cutter
CHPGLX driver 141
CXXRAS driver 202
CVDSIN_BORDER_WIDTH (environment
variable) 108
CVERVGS
configuration file 12
predefined device IDs 337
CWINDOWS
configuration file 12
CXXMETA
configuration file 12
driver 175
environment variable 175
model 175
predefined device IDs 342
CXXPSCRI
configuration file 12
driver 116
environment variable 113, 116
predefined device IDs 323
CXXRAS
configuration file 12
driver 190
environment variable 190
model 192
predefined device IDs 343
CXXX11
configuration file 12
cyclic 167
D
dashed line type 258
-debug 21
debug 21, 28
DEC VTx40 license 12
default 142, 151
deflate 201
demo mode 13
description file GXCONV.DSC 78
-device 22
CCALHCBS driver 157
CCANLBP driver 252
CHPGLX driver 136
CXXMETA driver 175
CXXPSCRI driver 116
CXXRAS driver 190
stamp or label 48
device 9
device ID, predefined 322, 362, 365
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
381
Index
direct color 39
directory
list for listener 292
scan 292
disk buffering 210, 249
disk space requirement 14
-Distance
hatch type definition 277
dither mode 22
dithering 22, 203, 235
-dithermode 22, 76, 235
CXXRAS driver 203
dotted line type 258
DRAFT 221
driver 374
DXF 375
device IDs 342
license 12
output 7, 175
DXFOUT 12
CHPGLX 136
CHPIN_BORDER_WIDTH 104
CHPIN_CA_DEFAULT 106
CHPIN_COLEPS 104
CHPIN_DEBUG 104
CHPIN_HPGL_CLIP 104
CHPIN_HPSTEPS 104
CHPIN_NP 105
CHPIN_OLD_TEXT 105
CHPIN_PCL_PRINT 105
CHPIN_PENS 37, 105, 291
CHPIN_PM_RESTORE 105
CHPIN_RESPECT_PS 106
CHPIN_RTL_POS 106
CHPIN_SKIP_ESCCMNT 105
CHPIN_USE_RP 106
CHPIN_VDC_EXTENT 107
CR_IDISK 210, 249
CVDSIN_BORDER_WIDTH 108
CXXMETA 175
CXXPSCRI 113, 116
CXXRAS 190
general 112
GRAL_CRI_JPEGDEFRES 111
GRALIMGDSC 194
GRALPLOTLIB 37
GS_LIB 99, 100, 128
GS_PROGRAM 99, 100, 128
GTS_CRIMAXBUFF 111
GTS_FONTS 206
GTS_USE_INCH 29, 31, 41, 65, 66, 78
GTSHTYPE 280
GTSLBMETA 28
GTSLTYPE 266
GTSMTYPE 275
GTSTIFFLONG 111
GTSTIFFRESUNIT 111
GXCDEST 293
GXCHOME 293
GXCLOGDIR 77
GXCLWSCALE 97
GXCRHW 107
GXCTMP 293
HP-GL input format 104
PEN_COLORS 106
PostScript 99
PostScript und PDF input format 100
PSICHKRES 100
PSICHKSIZE 101
PSICHKSIZX 101
PSICHKSIZY 101
PSICLIP 101
E
EmbedFonts 73
Encad Novajet 193
device IDs 350
end of block 160
end of file 23
end of line 19
end of picture 24
-env 23, 84
environment file 23
attribute mapping 84
COLOURS.ENV 87
example 85
LWIDTH.ENV 86
environment variable
CalComp input 109
CCALHCBS 157
CCALIN_BORDER_WIDTH 109
CCALIN_IGNORE_RO 109
CCALIN_NO_PATTERN 109
CCALIN_PENS 37, 109, 291
CCALIN_RESOLUTION 109
CCALIN_STEP_SIZE 110
CCALIN_VDC_EXTENT 110
CCANLBP 252
CG03PSROT 138
CG08BWTHRESHOLD 194
CG08ROP 111
CG08WINTEMP 111
CGIBWSCALETYPE 112
CGISCALETYPE 112
gXconvert
System Description
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Index
PSIDITHER 101
PSIDMODE 101
PSIFORMAT 102
PSIGAMMA 26, 102
PSIMAXCOL 102
PSIOFFX 100, 102
PSIOFFY 100, 102
PSIPDFDOCSIZE 101
PSIPIPE 102
PSIPSDOCSIZE 101
PSIRESOLUTION 102
PSIRESTART 102
PSITHRESHOLD 102
PSIUSEBOX 103
PSIUSEQUIT 103
PSPIPE 99
raster input format 111
TEMP 103
TMP 15
Versatec input format 108
-eob (CCALHCBS driver) 160
-eof 23, 24, 36
-eop 24, 36
-eop (CCALHCBS driver) 161
EPS 375
output 7, 116
eps 128
Epson Capsl output 8
Epson FX 80 192
device IDs 343
output 8
Epson Stylus
device IDs 354
Epson Stylus Color 192
epsonfx80 192
erase 165
-errmax 24
-error 24
even 54
event log (listener) 300
example
attribute mapping 93
environment file 85
font mapping 96
user-defined hatch type 281
user-defined line type 267
user-defined marker type 275
user-defined pen definition 290
exit code 361
expire, license 10
-extent
marker type definition 271
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
382
F
F_INCR 260
F_NEXT 260
file type, recognize 25
-filetype 25
fill simulation 141
-filldistance (CHPGLX driver) 141
fillgrey 121
-fillpattsize (CCALHCBS driver) 161
FIT 33
fixed 126, 170
Floyd 235
Floyd-Steinberg dithering 235
-font
CXXMETA driver 180
stamp or label 48
font 9, 73
index 180
map 96
stamp or label 48
FONTINDEX 96
FONTLIST 96
-fontname (CXXPSCRI driver) 123
fonts directory 206
FONTS_dev 96
-format 26, 38, 49
format
font mapping file 96
profile file 91
format converter 374
formfeed 161
-formlength (CXXRAS driver) 203, 204
-freeze (pen definition) 284
-freezecolor (pen definition) 285
-freezewidth (pen definition) 285
FULL 38, 44
G
g1 201
g4 201
-gamma 26, 76
CXXRAS driver 203, 204
gamma correction 26, 204
-gap_scale (line type definition) 261
garo 192, 223
general raster 193
device IDs 351
format 250
GIF 375
device IDs 355
license 12
output 8
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
383
Index
gif 192
GIFOUT 12
GKS 375
GKSM 25, 375
input 7
license 11
GKSMIN 11
GRAL_CRI_JPEGDEFRES (environment
variable) 111
GRALIMGDSC (environment variable) 194
GRALPLOTLIB (environment variable) 37
-graphics (stamp or label) 49
graphics file 374
graphics stamp or label 47, 49
restriction 52
grey 121
grey10 199
grey17 199
grey256 199
GS_LIB (environment variable) 99, 100, 128
GS_PROGRAM (environment variable) 99,
100, 128
GTS_CRIMAXBUFF (environment variable)
111
GTS_FONTS (environment variable) 206
GTS_USE_INCH (environment variable) 29,
31, 41, 65, 66, 78
GTSHTYPE (environment variable) 280
GTSLBMETA (environment variable) 28
gtslic 10
gtslsnr (listener) 298
gtslsnr.ini (listener) 296
GTSLTYPE (environment variable) 266
GTSMTYPE (environment variable) 275
GTSTIFFLONG (environment variable) 111
GTSTIFFRESUNIT (environment variable)
111
GXCDEST (environment variable) 293
GXCHOME (environment variable) 293
GXCLOGDIR (environment variable) 77
GXCLWSCALE (environment variable) 97
GXCONF.INF 79, 107
GXCONV.CMP 19
GXCONV.CON 21
GXCONV.DSC 78, 107
GXCONV.ENV 84
GXCONV.ERR 21
GXCONV.INF 27
GXCONV.LOG 31
GXCONV.PRO 38, 90
GXCONV.STA 90
GXCRHW (environment variable) 107
gXconvert
System Description
GXCTMP (environment variable) 293
gXnetplot 59
H
hatch type 9
complex 278
conversion to binary 280
definition 277
example of user-defined 281
file 277, 280
simple 277
user-defined 277
hatob 280
hbtoa 280
HCBS 25, 375
input 7
license 12
output 7, 157
-height (stamp or label) 50
-help 26
HIGH 221
HP DesignJet 130 209
HP DesignJet 650 C 193
HP DeskJet 192
output 8
HP DeskJet 500 C 192
device IDs 348
HP DeskJet 5x0 C 192
HP DeskJet 6x0 C 192
HP LaserJet
device IDs 324
output 8
HP LaserJet II PCL 192
HP LaserJet III
device IDs 346
HP LaserJet III PCL 192
device IDs 344
HP LaserJet PCL 192
HP PaintJet 192
device IDs 345
output 8
HP PaintJet XL 192
HP PCL
commands 318
output 8
HP PCL3GUI 193
HP QuietJet 192
device IDs 346
HP RTL 193, 375
commands 318
device IDs 349
input 7
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Index
license 11, 12
output 8
hpdeskjet 192, 198, 199, 223
hpdeskjet500c 192, 198, 199, 223
hpdeskjet5x0c 192
hpdeskjet6x0c 192
HP-GL 25, 375
device IDs 332
hybrid 11
input 7, 104
license 11, 12
output 7, 136
HPGL 25
HPGL.ENV 23, 84, 89
HP-GL/2 25, 375
commands 311
device IDs 335
input 7
output 7, 136, 137
HPGLEXT 11
HPGLIN 11
HPGLOUT 12
hplaserjet 192, 198, 199, 223
hplaserjetii 192, 198, 199, 223
hplaserjetiii 192, 198, 199, 201, 223
hppaintjet 192, 199, 223
hppaintjetxl 192, 198, 199, 223
HP-PCL 215, 217
hpquietjet 192
hprtl 193, 198, 199, 200, 223
hwcmyk 199
hwcol 199
hybrid HP-GL 11
hyprid PDF device IDs 330
I
IBM device IDs 325
IBM ProPrinter
device IDs 347
output 8
IBM ProPrinter X24 192
ibmprox24 192, 216
IGDS 25, 375
license 11
IGDSIN 11
IGNORE 24
imagemask 119
IMGIN 11
IMGOUT 12
inch 29
-inches
CCANLBP driver 254
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
384
CHPGLX driver 141
CXXMETA driver 180
CXXPSCRI driver 123
CXXRAS driver 205
-Index
hatch type definition 277, 278
-index
line type definition 262
marker type definition 272
index 200
Indigo
MK-I 216
MK-II 216
output device 193
Indigo RST
device IDs 355
license 12
output 7
-info 27, 79
information file 27
example 82
GXCONV.INF 79
-initfiles
CXXPSCRI driver 124
CXXRAS driver 206
-initformfeed (CXXRAS driver) 207
-initstring
CCALHCBS driver 162
CHPGLX driver 142
CXXPSCRI driver 125
-input 27
input file 27
attribute mapping 90
type 25
input format
CalComp 109
configuration 98
HP-GL 104
license 11
PDF 99
PostScript 99
raster 111
survey 7
Versatec 108
input source 227
integer precision 176, 186
intel 216
Intergraph Raster 25
input 7
ISO 375
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
385
J
job name 27
-jobname 27
join style 27, 125
-joinstyle 27, 76
CHPGLX driver 144
CXXPSCRI driver 125
JPEG 193, 375
device IDs 357
input 7
license 11, 12
output 7
jpeg 193, 199, 200, 223
-jpegoptions (CXXRAS driver) 208
JPGIN 11
JPGOUT 12
K
-keepcfg 28
Kodak PhotoPrinter device IDs 325
L
-label 28
label 46
alignment 46
file 30
font 48
graphics 49
height 50
line width 57
merge 50
named 29
offset 29, 51
orientation 52
output device ID 48
page 54
placeholder 27, 58
position 46, 56
PPD 55
rotate 57
scale 57
suppress 57
text 58
text color 47
transparent 63
unit 64
watermark 64
-label1..10 29
-labeloffsetn 29
-labelopt 29, 30, 42, 46
-labelterminator (CHPGLX driver) 144
Larson extension 11
gXconvert
System Description
Index
latob 265, 274
-layout 30
layout file 30
available parameter 65
structure of a layout file 65
layout in demo mode 13
LBP8A2 output 252
LBP8II output 252
LBP8III output 252
LBPOUT 12
lbtoa 265
LEFTBOTTOM 46, 56
LEFTCENTER 46, 56
LEFTTOP 46, 56
Lexmark
device IDs 327
Lexmark device IDs 324
license 10
demo mode 13
expire 10
format 10
input license group 11
key 10
output license group 12
lightness 204
-line (marker type definition) 272
line pattern 264
fitting 260
line type 9
conversion to binary 265
dashed 258
dotted 258
example of user-defined 267
file 265
gap 261
index 261
marker 262
pattern 264
solid 258
user-defined 258
line width 145, 163, 214
map 97
simulation 233
stamp or label 57
-lineenhance (CXXPSCRI driver) 126
-linepattern (CXXPSCRI driver) 126
lines per strip 210
-Linetype (hatch type definition) 278
-linetypename (CXXMETA driver) 181
-linetypes (CXXMETA driver) 181
-linpattsize (CCALHCBS driver) 162
list of directories for listener 292
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Index
listen.gxc (listener) 292
listener 292
change 301
install 296
log 300
UNIX 292
Windows NT 295
local_convert (listener) 292, 293
-log 31
log file 31
logging scope 38
long 128
-lunits (CXXRAS driver) 208
-lwidsimulation (CCALHCBS driver) 163
LWIDTH.ENV 86
LZW 375
lzw 201
M
-m_index (line type definition) 262
-m_size (line type definition) 263
main memory 14
Mannesmann Tally
device IDs 328
MT 92C device ID 344
MT91 192
MT92C 192
MT93/94 device IDs 347
MT93/MT94 192
output 8
map
attribute 90
color 119
font 96
line width 97
possible attribute 94
mapped 220
margin 31
-margins 31
marker type
conversion to binary 274
definition 269, 274
example 275
file 270, 275
in line 262
rectangle 273
scale factor 263
user-defined 269
vector 273
material 209
-material (CXXRAS driver) 209
matob 274
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
386
-maxcolindex (CXXMETA driver) 182
-maxcoordinate (CXXPSCRI driver) 127
-maxdata (CXXRAS driver) 210
-maxdetail (CXXRAS driver) 210
-maxnestwidth (CXXRAS driver) 211
mbtoa 274
-merge 32, 76
CXXRAS driver 211
stamp or label 50
merge 165
color 32, 148, 211
-message
CCALHCBS driver 163
CCANLBP driver 254
CHPGLX driver 144
CXXMETA driver 182
CXXPSCRI driver 127
CXXRAS driver 213
metafile identifier (CXXMETA driver) 183
metaformat 374
metric 185
metric scale mode 33
-mfidentifier (CXXMETA driver) 183
-microweave (CXXRAS driver) 213
-millimeters
CCALHCBS driver 163
CCANLBP driver 255
CHPGLX driver 145
CXXMETA driver 182
CXXPSCRI driver 128
CXXRAS driver 213
-millimetres
CCALHCBS driver 163
CCANLBP driver 255
CHPGLX driver 145
CXXMETA driver 182
CXXPSCRI driver 128
CXXRAS driver 213
-minlinewidth
CHPGLX driver 145
CXXRAS driver 214
minpicture 220
miter 125, 144
mki 216
mkii 216
-mode 33
-model
CXXRAS driver 214
model
CCALHCBS driver 157
CCANLBP driver 253
CHPGLX driver 137
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
387
CXXMETA driver 175
CXXRAS driver 192
-model (CCALHCBS driver) 164
monitoring, listener 295
motorola 216
mt93 216
N
named label 29
NEC
P6 output 8
P6/P7 192
P6/P7 device IDs 344
necp6 192, 198, 199, 223
-newline (CHPGLX driver) 146
-newlines (CHPGLX driver) 146
newsubfiletype 194
-noclip (CCALHCBS driver) 164
NORMAL 221
NovaJet
output 8
RTL license 12
novajet 193, 198, 199, 223
-npens (CHPGLX driver) 146
-nsync (CCALHCBS driver) 165
O
Océ 9400 device IDs 356
Océ 9800 device IDs 356
Océ device IDs 328
odd 54
offset
PostScript input 100
stamp or label 29, 51
-Offset (hatch type definition) 278
-offset (stamp or label) 51
optimization 34
-optimize 34
options for PNG file 221
ordered dither 236
-orientation
CXXRAS driver 215
stamp or label 52
orientation 35
orientation, stamp or label 52
ORIGINAL 33
other 142
-output 36
output device 22, 374
configuration 113
configuration file 113
list of 22
gXconvert
System Description
Index
parameter 76
stamp or label 48
output driver
CCALHCBS 157
CCANLBP 252
CHPGLX 136
CXXPSCRI 116
CXXRAS 190
output file 36
append 117
overwrite 37
placeholders 36
output format
license 12
survey 7
output intent 71
output size 41
output statistics 43
-outputformat
CHPGLX driver 147
CXXPSCRI driver 128
CXXRAS driver 216
OutputIntentDestOutputProfile 72
OutputIntentDictionary 71
-overlay
CCALHCBS driver 165
CHPGLX driver 148
overlay 165
-overwrite 36, 37
P
packbits 201
-page (stamp or label) 54
-pagesize
CXXPSCRI driver 129
-pagesize (CXXRAS driver) 216
paper format
abbreviation 322
paper offset
PostScript 100
PostScript input 100
paper size 26, 217
-paperformat (CXXRAS driver) 217
parameter 15
comment in configuration file 21
configuration file 21
for output device 76
overview 26
passed through 76
survey 8
-pattern
line type definition 264
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Index
pen definition 286
pattern color 286
PCL 215, 217
PCL 5c 193
PCL3GUI
device ID‘s 359
pcl3gui 193, 198, 199, 200
PCL3GUI output options 218
-pcl3guioptions (CXXRAS driver) 218
pcl5c 193
PCX 193, 375
device IDs 353
license 12
output 8
pcx 193, 198, 200
PDF 201, 375
characteristic 71
create from postscript 302
device IDs 329
input 7, 99
license 11
output 7, 116
printer output, license 12
profile 71, 130, 219
version 72
pdf 128, 193, 198, 200
PDF Raster
device IDs 358
PDF raster 193
PDF/A 1b 71, 330
PdfaIdAmd 73
PdfaIdConformance 72
PDFIN 11
PDFOUT 12
-pdfprofile
CXXPSCRI driver 130
CXXRAS driver 219
pdfprofile.cfg 71
PEN 34
-pen
CCALHCBS driver 166
CHPGLX driver 147
pen definition 286
pen
color 147, 166
example of definition 290
freeze 285
freeze definition 284
freeze width 285
option file 37
width 147, 166, 289
PEN_COLORS (environment variable) 106
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
388
-penopt 37
penplot model 157
-penselectmode 37, 76
CCALHCBS driver 167
CHPGLX driver 148
-penspeed (CHPGLX driver) 149
-picnames (CXXMETA driver) 183
-picture 37
picture name 183
pid (listener) 293
placeholder
#ACCOUNT 59
#COPIES 59
#DATE 58
#DATEUS 58
#DATEUSYY 58
#DATEYY 58
#FILE 58
#HOST 59
#JOBID 59
#JOBNAME 27
#LABELx 58
#PAGE 59
#PLOTTER 59
#SCALE 59
#TIME 59
#USER 59
output file 36
stamp or label 58
-plotdistance
CCALHCBS driver 167
-plotsizemode 41
CHPGLX driver 150
CXXMETA driver 183
CXXRAS driver 220
-plotvals (CCALHCBS driver) 168
PNG 193
png 193
PNG file, options for 221
-pngoptions (CXXRAS driver) 221
PNM 25, 375
license 11
PNMIN 11
polyline 260
Position 65
position
PostScript 99
stamp or label 56
-position (stamp or label) 56
POSTSCRIPT 25
PostScript 25
convert to PDF 302
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
389
Index
device IDs 323
environment variable 99
input 7, 99
license 11, 12
output 7, 116
paper offset 100
position 99
PostScript Raster
device IDs 358
PostScript raster 193
PPD
file 26, 38
stamp or label 55
-ppd 26, 38
stamp or label 55
predefined 170
predefined device ID 322, 362, 365
print quality 221
printer format 8
raster 8
-profile 38, 91
profile file 38, 91
format 91
profiling 9, 84, 90
program parameter 15
projecting 118, 138, 158, 196
-prot 38
PROTOCOL 24
PROUT 12
PS 375
ps 193, 198, 200
PS/2 375
ps2pdf.bat 302
ps2pdf.sh 302
PSICHKRES (environment variable) 100
PSICHKSIZE (environment variable) 101
PSICHKSIZX (environment variable) 101
PSICHKSIZY (environment variable) 101
PSICLIP (environment variable) 101
PSIDITHER (environment variable) 101
PSIDMODE (environment variable) 101
PSIFORMAT (environment variable) 102
PSIGAMMA (environment variable) 26, 102
PSIMAXCOL (environment variable) 102
PSIN 11
PSIOFFX (environment variable) 100, 102
PSIOFFY (environment variable) 100, 102
PSIPDFDOCSIZE (environment variable) 101
PSIPIPE (environment variable) 99, 102
PSIPSDOCSIZE (environment variable) 101
PSIRESOLUTION (environment variable) 102
PSIRESTART (environment variable) 102
gXconvert
System Description
PSITHRESHOLD (environment variable) 102
PSIUSEBOX (environment variable) 103
PSIUSEQUIT (environment variable) 103
PSOUT 12
Q
QMS
device IDs 326, 329
Magicolor device IDs 327
-quality (CXXRAS driver) 221
quality of output 221
R
-radix (CCALHCBS driver) 168
-range (pen definition) 288
RASIN 11
RASOUT 12
raster 193, 198, 199
format 8
image output 190
input 111
printer format 8
printer output 190
printer output, license 12
scale 112
rasterization 226
buffer 43, 226
RBG data range 288
recognize file type 25
-rectangle (marker type definition) 273
-Reference (hatch type definition) 278
-replot (CHPGLX driver) 151
-resetstring
CCALHCBS driver 168
CHPGLX driver 151
CXXPSCRI driver 130
-resolution 38, 76
CCALHCBS driver 169
CXXMETA driver 184
CXXPSCRI driver 130
CXXRAS driver 222
resolution 38, 39
resource requirement 14
result code 361
RGB 375
-rgb
CCALHCBS driver 169
CCANLBP driver 255
CHPGLX driver 152
CXXMETA driver 184
CXXPSCRI driver 131
rgb 200
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Index
-rgbresolution 39
-rgbtable (CCALHCBS driver) 170
RIGHTBOTTOM 46, 56
RIGHTCENTER 46, 56
RIGHTTOP 46, 56
-rms (CXXRAS driver) 224
-rotate 40
CCALHCBS driver 170
CCANLBP driver 256
CHPGLX driver 153
CXXPSCRI driver 132
CXXRAS driver 224
stamp or label 57
rotation 40
Rotring NC Plotscriber
device IDs 333
license 12
output 136, 149
round 118, 125, 138, 144, 158, 196
RoWe 3200 device IDs 357
RPLOUT 12
rst 193, 216
RSTOUT 12
RTL 375
commands 318
license 12
RVGSOUT 12
S
-scale 41
stamp or label 57
scale
b/w raster data 112
color raster data 112
factor 41
marker 263
mode 33
mode abstract 33
mode metric 33
stamp or label 57
scalegap 126
-scalemode (CXXMETA driver) 185
scan directory 292
Seiko ColorPoint device IDs 326
select pen 148, 167
sequential overlay 165
SGI Image input 7
short 128
simple 233
-size 41
CCALHCBS driver 171
CCANLBP driver 256
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
390
CHPGLX driver 154
CXXMETA driver 185
CXXPSCRI driver 133
CXXRAS driver 225
size
block/strip 210
demo mode 13
output 41
strip 226
tolerance 17
SNI 2050 193
device IDs 349
license 12
output 8
sni2050 193, 208, 216, 223
solid line type 258
space requirement 14
special blend mode 73
speed of pen 149
stamp 46
alignment 46
demo mode 13
file 42
font 48
graphics 49
height 50
line width 57
merge 50
offset 29, 51
orientation 52
output device ID 48
page 54
placeholder 27, 58
position 46, 56
PPD 55
rotate 57
scale 57
suppress 57
text 58
text color 47
transparent 63
unit 64
watermark 64
-stampoffsetn 29
-stampopt 42, 46
Standard Plot Format
device IDs 333
input 7
output 8, 136
state information 9
-statistics 43
statistics 43
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description
391
STDERR 77
STDOUT 77
STDPLD 25
license 11, 12
STDPLDIN 11
-stepsize (CCALHCBS driver) 171
STRING 221
string 221
precision 94
text precision 96, 180
strip
line per 210
size 226
-stripsize 43, 76
CXXRAS driver 226
stroke 173
precision 94
text precision 96
-strokewidth (stamp or label) 57
stylusc 192, 198, 199
sub (listener) 292
-subdevice
CCALHCBS driver 172
CCANLBP driver 256
CHPGLX driver 154
CXXMETA driver 186
CXXPSCRI driver 133
CXXRAS driver 227
subdevice 9, 113
SUN Raster input 7
-suppress (stamp or label) 57
-sync (CCALHCBS driver) 172
sync character 165
T
TAPE9 25
input 7
license 11
TAPE9IN 11
techjet 192, 198, 199, 200
Tektronix/Xerox Phaser device IDs 327
TEMP (environment variable) 103
temporary file 15
text 178
color for stamp or label 47
precision 96, 180
stamp or label 58
-text (stamp or label) 58
TIFF 25, 193, 201, 375
G1 device IDs 352
G1 input 7
G1 output 8
gXconvert
System Description
Index
G4 device IDs 347, 357
G4 output 8
G5 input 7
G5 output 8
input 7
input (with single JEPG stream) 7
license 11, 12
LZW device IDs 353
LZW input 7
LZW output 8
Packbits device IDs 354
Packbits input 7
tiff 193, 198, 199, 200, 201, 210, 216
tiffg4 223
TIFIN 11
tile 43
-tiled 43
TMP (environment variable) 15
todefine 170
tolerance 17
TOPCENTER 46, 56
TOPLEFT 46, 56
TOPRIGHT 46, 56
translib 216
transparency 73, 155
-transparency (CHPGLX driver) 155
-transparent (stamp or label) 63
-tray
CXXPSCRI driver 134
CXXRAS driver 227
triangular 118, 138, 158, 196
-txtintprec (CXXMETA driver) 187
-txtvintprec (CXXMETA driver) 186
-Type (hatch type definition) 277, 278
type of input file 25
type of material 209
U
-unidirectional (CXXRAS driver) 228
unit
CXXPSCRI driver 123
stamp or label 64
-unit (stamp or label) 64
-units 44
line type definition 264
pen definition 288
UNIX
exit code 362
listener 292
UserUnit 74
-usesrw (CXXRAS driver) 229
UseUserUnit 74
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
Index
V
-v (listener) 292
VCGL 375
output 8
VCRF
license 12
output 8
VDC 188, 375
extent 44, 187
extent, HPGL input 107
integer precision 176
-vdc 44
-vdcext (CXXMETA driver) 187
-vdctype (CXXMETA driver) 188
VDS 25
license 11
VDSIN 11
-vector (marker type definition) 273
Versatec
8845 Roll Paper device IDs 352
compacted raster 193
Compacted Raster 1D device IDs 351
device IDs 337
input 108
license 12
model 230
output 8
Thermal Transfer device IDs 338
versatec 193
VGS 375
VGSOUT 12
-vmodel (CXXRAS driver) 230
VMS record format 224
VPF 375
VPP 375
VRF 25, 375
input 7
VTx40 license 12
392
CXXRAS driver 233
-Width (hatch type definition) 278
-width (pen definition) 289
width of pen 147, 166
-window 45
Windows 77
exit code 365
service listener 295
Windows BMP 193
device IDs 355
license 12
output 8
WMF 376
license 12
output 8
restriction 13
WMFOUT 12, 13
X
X11
license 12
output 8
X11 Bitmap 193
device IDs 357
license 12
X11OUT 12
xbm 193
XWD 25, 376
device IDs 348
input 7
license 11, 12
output 8
X11 window 193
xwd 193, 223
W
wait 161
-watermark (stamp or label) 64
WAY 34
WDV device IDs 328
WFAX 193
device IDs 346
license 12
wfax 193, 223
wide line 44
-widelines 44, 76
CCALHCBS driver 173
CHPGLX driver 155
SEAL Systems
www.sealsystems.com
2009-10-20
Version 4.1.0
gXconvert
System Description

High definition audio driver r2 29

Service manual for honda arx1200t3d

Sally nightmare before christmas patchwork dress

GXT 120 Wireless Gaming Mouse

3.0-Procedure-to-det..

T-1000 Bagger

Reading Foundations Newsletter Feb 2014

Composition of Functions with GSP

A-3 XO Product Datasheet

WILLIAM TUCKER